OSN 3500 V200R011C00 Product Description PDF

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V200R011C00
Product Description
Issue Date
02 2010-11-01
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China Website: Email: http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description
About This Document
About This Document

Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name OptiX OSN 3500 Version V200R011C00
Intended Audience
This document describes the OptiX OSN 3500 in the terms of network application, functions, hardware and software structure, and features. The intended audiences of this document are: Network Planning Engineer Data Configuration Engineer System Maintenance Engineer
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
iii
About This Document
Symbol
Description Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface > Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Chan e !istory
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains all updates made in previous issues.
Updates in Issue "# $#"%"&%%&"%' (ased on Product Version V#""R"%%C""

This document of the V200R011C00 version is of the second release. Compared with Issue 01, this version has the following new or optimized contents: The CQ1, MD12, and MD75 boards are deleted from the "Ethernet Processing Boards" section in the "Packet Features" chapter.
Updates in Issue "% $#"%"&")&#"' (ased on Product Version V#""R"%%C""

This document of the V200R011C00 version is of the first release. Compared with version V100R009C03, this version has the following new or optimized contents: The N2PSXCSA, N1PEG8, N1PEX2, N2PEX1, N1PEFF8, N1EDQ41, N1CQ1, N1MD75, N1MD12, N6GSCC, N1PIUB and N3SLH41 boards are added.
iv
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
About This Document
The following packet features are added: PWE3, MPLS OAM, HQoS, MPLS APS, PW APS, LAG, MC-LAG, , and MS-PW. The document structure is re-organized. The "Energy Conservation and Sustainable Development" chapter is added.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Contents
Contents
About This Document ******************************************************************************************************************* iii % Introduction*********************************************************************************************************************************%&%
1.1 Positioning .................................................................................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 Features ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.2.1 Dual-Core Architecture, Multi-Service Transmission .......................................................................... 1-4 1.2.2 Support for 3G Mobile Backhauling, Providing an Optimal Transmission Solution ........................... 1-4 1.2.3 Built-In WDM/Microwave, Flexible Networking ................................................................................ 1-4
# So+t,are Architecture and !ard,are Structure*******************************************************************#&%

2.1 Hardware Architecture .................................................................................................................................. 2-1 2.1.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................................. 2-1 2.1.2 Cabinet ................................................................................................................................................. 2-4 2.1.3 Subrack ................................................................................................................................................ 2-5 2.1.3.1 Structure ...................................................................................................................................... 2-5 2.1.3.2 Slot Allocation ............................................................................................................................ 2-6 2.1.4 Boards .................................................................................................................................................. 2-8 2.1.4.1 Classification of the Boards ...................................................................................................... 2-10 2.1.4.2 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards .............................................................................. 2-17 2.1.4.3 Packet Boards ........................................................................................................................... 2-17 2.1.4.4 EoD Boards............................................................................................................................... 2-19 2.1.4.5 CES Boards............................................................................................................................... 2-19 2.1.4.6 SDH Processing Boards ............................................................................................................ 2-20 2.1.4.7 PDH Processing Boards ............................................................................................................ 2-24 2.1.4.8 EoS Boards ............................................................................................................................... 2-26 2.1.4.9 ATM Boards .............................................................................................................................. 2-29 2.1.4.10 RPR Boards ............................................................................................................................ 2-29 2.1.4.11 SAN Boards ............................................................................................................................ 2-30 2.1.4.12 WDM Boards .......................................................................................................................... 2-31 2.1.4.13 Microwave Boards .................................................................................................................. 2-31
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
vii
Contents
OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 2.1.4.14 Optical Booster Amplifier Boards .......................................................................................... 2-32 2.1.4.15 Other Boards ........................................................................................................................... 2-33
2.2 Software Architecture .................................................................................................................................. 2-33 2.2.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................ 2-34 2.2.2 Communication Protocols .................................................................................................................. 2-34 2.2.3 Board Software .................................................................................................................................. 2-35 2.2.4 NE Software ....................................................................................................................................... 2-35 2.2.5 Network Management System ........................................................................................................... 2-36
- .unctions and .eatures *************************************************************************************************************-&%

3.1 Basic Functions on Packet Mode .................................................................................................................. 3-1 3.1.1 Capacity ............................................................................................................................................... 3-1 3.1.1.1 Switching Capability................................................................................................................... 3-2 3.1.1.2 Slot Access Capacity In Packet Mode......................................................................................... 3-2 3.1.2 Services ................................................................................................................................................ 3-3 3.1.2.1 Service Types .............................................................................................................................. 3-3 3.1.2.2 Service Interfaces ........................................................................................................................ 3-4 3.1.2.3 Service Access Capacity ............................................................................................................. 3-4 3.1.3 Clock Synchronization ......................................................................................................................... 3-5 3.1.3.1 Traditional Clock Synchronization ............................................................................................. 3-5 3.1.3.2 IEEE 1588 V2 Time and Clock Synchronization........................................................................ 3-6 3.1.3.3 Synchronous Ethernet ................................................................................................................. 3-7 3.1.3.4 CES ACR .................................................................................................................................... 3-7 3.1.4 Equipment Level Protection................................................................................................................. 3-8 3.1.4.1 LAG Protection ........................................................................................................................... 3-9 3.1.4.2 MC-LAG Protection ................................................................................................................. 3-10 3.1.4.3 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect and Timing Units ....................................................... 3-11 3.1.4.4 1+1 Hot Backup for the SCC Unit ............................................................................................ 3-12 3.1.4.5 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit .......................................................................... 3-12 3.1.4.6 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power Supply ................................................................. 3-13 3.1.4.7 Intelligent Fans ......................................................................................................................... 3-13 3.1.4.8 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions .......................................................... 3-13 3.1.5 Network Level Protection .................................................................................................................. 3-14 3.1.5.1 MPLS Tunnel APS Protection .................................................................................................. 3-14 3.1.5.2 PW APS Protection ................................................................................................................... 3-18 3.1.5.3 Packet-Based Linear MSP ........................................................................................................ 3-20
viii
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Contents
3.1.5.4 LPT ........................................................................................................................................... 3-21 3.2 Basic Functions on TDM Mode .................................................................................................................. 3-24 3.2.1 Capacity ............................................................................................................................................. 3-24 3.2.1.1 TDM Cross-Connect Capacity .................................................................................................. 3-24 3.2.1.2 Slot Access Capacity in TDM Mode......................................................................................... 3-25 3.2.2 Service ............................................................................................................................................... 3-26 3.2.2.1 Service Types ............................................................................................................................ 3-26 3.2.2.2 Service Interfaces ...................................................................................................................... 3-27 3.2.2.3 Service Access Capacity ........................................................................................................... 3-28 3.2.3 Clock Synchronization ....................................................................................................................... 3-29 3.2.3.1 Traditional Clock Synchronization ........................................................................................... 3-30 3.2.4 Equipment Level Protection............................................................................................................... 3-30 3.2.4.1 TPS Protection .......................................................................................................................... 3-31 3.2.4.2 1+1 Protection for Ethernet Boards .......................................................................................... 3-32 3.2.4.3 1+1 Protection for ATM Boards................................................................................................ 3-34 3.2.4.4 Protection for the Microwave Boards ....................................................................................... 3-35 3.2.4.5 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion Unit ....................................................................... 3-36 3.2.4.6 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect and Timing Units ....................................................... 3-36 3.2.4.7 1+1 Hot Backup for the SCC Unit ............................................................................................ 3-37 3.2.4.8 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit .......................................................................... 3-38 3.2.4.9 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power Supply ................................................................. 3-38 3.2.4.10 Intelligent Fans ....................................................................................................................... 3-38 3.2.4.11 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions ........................................................ 3-38 3.2.5 Network Level Protection .................................................................................................................. 3-39 3.2.5.1 Linear MSP ............................................................................................................................... 3-40 3.2.5.2 MSP Ring .................................................................................................................................. 3-40 3.2.5.3 SNCP ........................................................................................................................................ 3-42 3.2.5.4 DNI ........................................................................................................................................... 3-45 3.2.5.5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection ........................................................................................ 3-47 3.2.5.6 Optical-Path-Shared MSP ......................................................................................................... 3-47 3.2.5.7 RPR Protection ......................................................................................................................... 3-49 3.2.5.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring Protection ................................................................................................... 3-50 3.3 Packet Features............................................................................................................................................ 3-51 3.3.1 MPLS Overview ................................................................................................................................ 3-52
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
ix
Contents
OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 3.3.1.1 Background ............................................................................................................................... 3-52 3.3.1.2 Basic MPLS Concepts .............................................................................................................. 3-53 3.3.1.3 System Structure ....................................................................................................................... 3-54 3.3.1.4 MPLS Capability of the Equipment .......................................................................................... 3-54 3.3.2 Service Description ............................................................................................................................ 3-55 3.3.2.1 Service Models ......................................................................................................................... 3-55 3.3.2.2 Ethernet Services ...................................................................................................................... 3-58 3.3.2.3 CES Services ............................................................................................................................ 3-61 3.3.3 Introduction to Features ..................................................................................................................... 3-63 3.3.3.1 PWE3 ........................................................................................................................................ 3-63 3.3.3.2 MS-PW ..................................................................................................................................... 3-64 3.3.3.3 MPLS OAM.............................................................................................................................. 3-65 3.3.3.4 HQoS ........................................................................................................................................ 3-66 3.3.4 Protection ........................................................................................................................................... 3-66 3.3.5 Board Functions ................................................................................................................................. 3-67 3.3.5.1 Ethernet Processing Boards ...................................................................................................... 3-67 3.3.5.2 EoD Boards............................................................................................................................... 3-80 3.3.5.3 CES Service Processing Boards................................................................................................ 3-83
3.4 MSTP Data Features ................................................................................................................................... 3-86 3.4.1 Ethernet Features ............................................................................................................................... 3-87 3.4.1.1 Functions of Transparent Transmission Boards ........................................................................ 3-87 3.4.1.2 Functions of Switching Boards ................................................................................................. 3-94 3.4.1.3 Application .............................................................................................................................. 3-119 3.4.1.4 Protection ................................................................................................................................ 3-123 3.4.2 RPR Features ................................................................................................................................... 3-124 3.4.2.1 Functions ................................................................................................................................ 3-125 3.4.2.2 Application .............................................................................................................................. 3-134 3.4.2.3 Protection ................................................................................................................................ 3-136 3.4.3 ATM Features ................................................................................................................................... 3-137 3.4.3.1 Functions ................................................................................................................................ 3-137 3.4.3.2 Application .............................................................................................................................. 3-140 3.4.3.3 Protection ................................................................................................................................ 3-143 3.4.4 DDN Features .................................................................................................................................. 3-143 3.4.4.1 Functions ................................................................................................................................ 3-144
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Contents
3.4.4.2 Application .............................................................................................................................. 3-145 3.4.4.3 Protection ................................................................................................................................ 3-146 3.4.5 SAN Features ................................................................................................................................... 3-146 3.5 Built-in WDM Technology........................................................................................................................ 3-147 3.6 Microwave Technology ............................................................................................................................. 3-148 3.7 License Control ......................................................................................................................................... 3-149 3.7.1 Version License ................................................................................................................................ 3-149 3.7.2 Feature License ................................................................................................................................ 3-149
/ Products and Application Scenarios **************************************************************************************/&%

4.1 Networking Topologies ................................................................................................................................. 4-1 4.2 Typical Networking in Packet Mode ............................................................................................................. 4-1 4.2.1 Typical Networking Without Routers................................................................................................... 4-2 4.2.2 Hybrid Networking with Routers ......................................................................................................... 4-3 4.3 Networking with the Packet Domain Overlapping the TDM Domain .......................................................... 4-4 4.4 Hybrid Networking with Other Huawei Equipment...................................................................................... 4-5 4.4.1 Hybrid Networking with the PTN Equipment ..................................................................................... 4-6 4.4.2 Hybrid Networking with the RTN Equipment ..................................................................................... 4-7
0 1A2 *********************************************************************************************************************************************0&%
5.1 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces ....................................................................................................... 5-1 5.2 DCN Management Scheme ........................................................................................................................... 5-2 5.2.1 Outband DCN ...................................................................................................................................... 5-2 5.2.2 Inband DCN ......................................................................................................................................... 5-3 5.3 Network Management ................................................................................................................................... 5-4 5.4 Alarm and Performance Management ........................................................................................................... 5-4 5.5 ALS Function And Optical Power Management ........................................................................................... 5-4 5.6 Fault Locating and Equipment Maintenance ................................................................................................. 5-5 5.7 Board Replacement and Equipment Upgrade ............................................................................................... 5-6 5.7.1 Board Version Replacement ................................................................................................................. 5-7 5.7.2 Simulation Package Loading and Simulation Package Diffusion ........................................................ 5-7 5.7.3 Hot Patch.............................................................................................................................................. 5-8 5.7.4 NSF Function ....................................................................................................................................... 5-8 5.7.5 Smooth Upgrade .................................................................................................................................. 5-8
3 Security 2ana ement****************************************************************************************************************3&%

6.1 Authentication Management ......................................................................................................................... 6-1 6.2 Authorization Management ........................................................................................................................... 6-1 6.3 Network Security Management ..................................................................................................................... 6-2 6.4 System Security Management ....................................................................................................................... 6-2 6.5 Log Management .......................................................................................................................................... 6-3 6.5.1 NE Security Log Management ............................................................................................................. 6-3 6.5.2 Syslog Management ............................................................................................................................. 6-3
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
xi
Contents
) Technical Speci+ications ***********************************************************************************************************)&%

7.1 Overall Specifications of the Equipment ....................................................................................................... 7-1 7.1.1 Specifications of the Cabinet ............................................................................................................... 7-1 7.1.2 Specifications of the Subrack ............................................................................................................... 7-3 7.1.3 Power Supply Parameters .................................................................................................................... 7-5 7.1.4 Laser Safety Class ................................................................................................................................ 7-5 7.1.5 Electromagnetic Compatibility ............................................................................................................ 7-6 7.1.6 Environmental Specification ................................................................................................................ 7-7 7.2 Performance Specifications of Packet Switching .......................................................................................... 7-7 7.2.1 Packet System Performance ................................................................................................................. 7-8 7.2.2 Protection Performance of Packet Switching ....................................................................................... 7-9 7.2.3 IEEE 1588 V2 Synchronization Performance .................................................................................... 7-13 7.3 TDM Performance Specification ................................................................................................................. 7-14 7.3.1 Timing and Synchronization Performance ......................................................................................... 7-14 7.3.2 Transmission Performance ................................................................................................................. 7-14 7.3.3 Protection Performance ...................................................................................................................... 7-15 7.3.4 Timeslot Numbering .......................................................................................................................... 7-17 7.4 Microwave RF Performance ....................................................................................................................... 7-18 7.4.1 Radio Work Modes ............................................................................................................................ 7-19 7.4.2 IF Performance................................................................................................................................... 7-20 7.4.3 Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem .................................................................. 7-20 7.4.4 Equipment Reliability ........................................................................................................................ 7-20 7.4.5 SP ODU ............................................................................................................................................. 7-21 7.4.6 HP ODU ............................................................................................................................................. 7-28 7.5 Parameters Specified for the Optical Interfaces .......................................................................................... 7-36 7.5.1 STM-1 Optical Interfaces................................................................................................................... 7-37 7.5.2 STM-4 Optical Interfaces................................................................................................................... 7-38 7.5.3 STM-16 Optical Interfaces................................................................................................................. 7-38 7.5.4 STM-64 Optical Interfaces................................................................................................................. 7-40 7.5.5 Ethernet Optical Interfaces................................................................................................................. 7-42 7.5.6 Tunable-Wavelength Optical Interfaces ............................................................................................. 7-44 7.5.7 ATM Optical Interfaces ...................................................................................................................... 7-45 7.5.8 Colored Optical Interfaces ................................................................................................................. 7-46 7.5.9 Wavelength Allocation ....................................................................................................................... 7-48 7.6 Parameters Specified for Electrical Interfaces ............................................................................................ 7-50 7.6.1 PDH Electrical Interfaces................................................................................................................... 7-50 7.6.2 DDN Electrical Interfaces .................................................................................................................. 7-51 7.6.3 Ethernet Electrical Interfaces ............................................................................................................. 7-52 7.7 Parameters Specified for the Auxiliary Interfaces ....................................................................................... 7-52 7.7.1 Clock Interface Specifications ........................................................................................................... 7-53 7.7.2 64 kbit/s Interface Specifications ....................................................................................................... 7-53 7.7.3 RS-232 Interface Specifications ......................................................................................................... 7-53
xii
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Contents
7.7.4 RS-422 Interface Specifications ......................................................................................................... 7-54 7.7.5 Orderwire Phone Interface Specifications.......................................................................................... 7-54 7.8 Quick Reference of Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board ......................................................... 7-55 7.9 Safety Certification ..................................................................................................................................... 7-59 7.10 Environmental Conditions......................................................................................................................... 7-61 7.10.1 Environment for Storage .................................................................................................................. 7-61 7.10.2 Environment for Transportation ....................................................................................................... 7-63 7.10.3 Environment for Operation .............................................................................................................. 7-65
4 5ner y Savin and 5nvironment Protection*************************************************************************4&%

8.1 Energy Saving ............................................................................................................................................... 8-1 8.2 Environment Protection................................................................................................................................. 8-1
6 Compliant Standards *****************************************************************************************************************6&%

9.1 ITU-T Recommendations .............................................................................................................................. 9-1 9.2 IEEE Standards ............................................................................................................................................. 9-4 9.3 IETF Standards.............................................................................................................................................. 9-5 9.4 ANSI Standards ............................................................................................................................................. 9-7 9.5 Packet Standards ........................................................................................................................................... 9-7 9.6 Microwave Standards .................................................................................................................................... 9-9 9.7 Environment Related Standards .................................................................................................................. 9-11 9.8 EMC Standards ........................................................................................................................................... 9-12 9.9 Safety Compliance Standards ...................................................................................................................... 9-13 9.10 Protection Standards .................................................................................................................................. 9-13
A Glossary ************************************************************************************************************************************ A&%

A.1 Numerics ..................................................................................................................................................... A-2 A.2 A .................................................................................................................................................................. A-2 A.3 B .................................................................................................................................................................. A-6 A.4 C .................................................................................................................................................................. A-8 A.5 D ................................................................................................................................................................ A-12 A.6 E ................................................................................................................................................................ A-14 A.7 F ................................................................................................................................................................ A-16 A.8 G ................................................................................................................................................................ A-19 A.9 H ................................................................................................................................................................ A-20 A.10 I ............................................................................................................................................................... A-21 A.11 J ............................................................................................................................................................... A-23 A.12 L .............................................................................................................................................................. A-23 A.13 M ............................................................................................................................................................. A-25 A.14 N .............................................................................................................................................................. A-28 A.15 O .............................................................................................................................................................. A-29 A.16 P .............................................................................................................................................................. A-31 A.17 Q .............................................................................................................................................................. A-34 A.18 R .............................................................................................................................................................. A-34 Issue 02 (2010-11-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiii
Contents
A.19 S .............................................................................................................................................................. A-36 A.20 T .............................................................................................................................................................. A-41 A.21 U .............................................................................................................................................................. A-43 A.22 V .............................................................................................................................................................. A-44 A.23 W ............................................................................................................................................................. A-45
xiv
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Figures
.i ures
Figure 1-1 exterior of the OptiX OSN 3500 ....................................................................................................... 1-2 Figure 1-2 Network application of the OptiX OSN 3500 ................................................................................... 1-3 Figure 2-1 Structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 equipment ................................................................................... 2-2 Figure 2-2 System architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500 .................................................................................... 2-3 Figure 2-3 Exterior of an ETSI cabinet .............................................................................................................. 2-4 Figure 2-4 Structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack ....................................................................................... 2-5 Figure 2-5 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack..................................................................................... 2-6 Figure 2-6 Dual-slot layout of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack ............................................................................ 2-7 Figure 2-7 Software architecture with the ASON feature................................................................................. 2-34 Figure 3-1 Slot access capacity when the N1PSXCS board is used ................................................................... 3-2 Figure 3-2 Slot access capacity when the N2PSXCSA board is used (single slots) ........................................... 3-3 Figure 3-3 CES ACR application scenario ......................................................................................................... 3-8 Figure 3-4 Networking diagram of RNC dual-homing adopting the MC-LAG technology ............................ 3-10 Figure 3-5 MPLS Tunnel APS 1+1 protection ................................................................................................. 3-15 Figure 3-6 MPLS Tunnel APS 1:1 protection................................................................................................... 3-16 Figure 3-7 Typical networking of PW APS 1+1 protection .............................................................................. 3-19 Figure 3-8 Typical networking of PW APS 1:1 protection ............................................................................... 3-19 Figure 3-9 Point-to-point LPT .......................................................................................................................... 3-22 Figure 3-10 Point-to-multipoint LPT ............................................................................................................... 3-23 Figure 3-11 Access capacity of each slot when the N1PSXCS board is used .................................................. 3-25 Figure 3-12 Access capacity of slots when the N2PSXCSA is used ................................................................ 3-26 Figure 3-13 End-to-end conversion between an unprotected trail and an SNCP-protected trail ...................... 3-42 Figure 3-14 Principle of multipath protection .................................................................................................. 3-43 Figure 3-15 SNCMP networking ...................................................................................................................... 3-44 Figure 3-16 SNCMP service route in the case of single point failure .............................................................. 3-44 Figure 3-17 SNCMP service route in the case of multipoint failure ................................................................ 3-45
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
xv
Figures
Figure 3-18 DNI protection of two SNCP rings ............................................................................................... 3-46 Figure 3-19 Fiber-shared virtual trail protection .............................................................................................. 3-47 Figure 3-20 Optical-path-shared MSP .............................................................................................................. 3-48 Figure 3-21 One higher-rate line shared by two lower-rate lines ..................................................................... 3-48 Figure 3-22 One line shared by two lines at the same rate ............................................................................... 3-48 Figure 3-23 Example of bidirectional RPR ...................................................................................................... 3-49 Figure 3-24 RPR wrapping protection.............................................................................................................. 3-50 Figure 3-25 RPR steering protection ................................................................................................................ 3-50 Figure 3-26 VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection ....................................................................................................... 3-51 Figure 3-27 Label encapsulation structure ....................................................................................................... 3-53 Figure 3-28 Encapsulation location of labels in Ethernet frames ..................................................................... 3-53 Figure 3-29 PWE3 networking diagram ........................................................................................................... 3-56 Figure 3-30 MPLS-based PWE3 model ........................................................................................................... 3-56 Figure 3-31 Service model of the OptiX OSN equipment................................................................................ 3-58 Figure 3-32 E-Line service ............................................................................................................................... 3-59 Figure 3-33 E-LAN service .............................................................................................................................. 3-60 Figure 3-34 E-Aggr service .............................................................................................................................. 3-61 Figure 3-35 Networking diagram of the CES ................................................................................................... 3-62 Figure 3-36 Application scenario of PWE3 ...................................................................................................... 3-64 Figure 3-37 Networking diagram of SS-PW .................................................................................................... 3-64 Figure 3-38 Networking diagram of MS-PW ................................................................................................... 3-65 Figure 3-39 EPL service based on port........................................................................................................... 3-120 Figure 3-40 Port-shared EVPL services ......................................................................................................... 3-120 Figure 3-41 EVPL service based on VLAN ID .............................................................................................. 3-121 Figure 3-42 EVPL service based on MPLS .................................................................................................... 3-121 Figure 3-43 EVPL service based on QinQ ..................................................................................................... 3-121 Figure 3-44 EPLAN service ........................................................................................................................... 3-122 Figure 3-45 EVPLAN service ........................................................................................................................ 3-123 Figure 3-46 RPR ring ..................................................................................................................................... 3-125 Figure 3-47 Spatial reuse ................................................................................................................................ 3-133 Figure 3-48 Fairness algorithm when the weight is 1 ..................................................................................... 3-134 Figure 3-49 Fairness algorithm when the weights are different ..................................................................... 3-134 Figure 3-50 EVPL service accessing, forwarding and stripping .................................................................... 3-135
xvi
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Figures
Figure 3-51 EVPL service convergence ......................................................................................................... 3-135 Figure 3-52 RPR EVPLAN service ................................................................................................................ 3-136 Figure 3-53 Application of bandwidth exclusive ATM services..................................................................... 3-141 Figure 3-54 VP-Ring/VC-Ring ...................................................................................................................... 3-142 Figure 3-55 IMA service networking ............................................................................................................. 3-143 Figure 3-56 DDN networking and application ............................................................................................... 3-145 Figure 3-57 Processing flow of the service signals ........................................................................................ 3-148 Figure 4-1 Typical networking diagram (without any routers) ........................................................................... 4-2 Figure 4-2 Hybrid networking with routers ........................................................................................................ 4-3 Figure 4-3 The access layer overlaid with the GE ring and the convergence/core layer overlaid with the 10GE ring ...................................................................................................................................................................... 4-4 Figure 4-4 Using the EoS service dividing board to overlay the convergence/core layer with the 10GE ring... 4-5 Figure 4-5 Hybrid networking with Huawei MSTP and PTN equipment .......................................................... 4-6 Figure 4-6 Hybrid networking with Huawei MSTP and RTN equipment .......................................................... 4-7 Figure 6-1 Schematic diagram of Syslog protocol transmitting ......................................................................... 6-4
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
xvii
Tables
Tables
Table 2-1 Units supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 ........................................................................................... 2-3 Table 2-2 Mapping relation between slots for the interface boards and slots for the processing boards ............ 2-8 Table 2-3 Paired slots.......................................................................................................................................... 2-8 Table 2-4 SDH boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports .............................................................................. 2-10 Table 2-5 PDH boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports .............................................................................. 2-11 Table 2-6 Packet boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports ............................................................................ 2-12 Table 2-7 EoD boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 ............................................................................... 2-13 Table 2-8 CES boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 ............................................................................... 2-13 Table 2-9 EoS boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 ............................................................................... 2-13 Table 2-10 ATM boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 ............................................................................ 2-14 Table 2-11 RPR boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 ............................................................................. 2-14 Table 2-12 SAN boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 ............................................................................ 2-15 Table 2-13 Cross-connect boards and system control boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports ................... 2-15 Table 2-14 Auxiliary boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports ..................................................................... 2-15 Table 2-15 WDM boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports .......................................................................... 2-16 Table 2-16 Microwave boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports .................................................................. 2-16 Table 2-17 Optical amplifier boards and dispersion compensation boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports ........................................................................................................................................................................... 2-16 Table 2-18 Power boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports .......................................................................... 2-17 Table 2-19 Cross-connect and system control boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 .............. 2-17 Table 2-20 Valid slots and interfaces of the packet boards ............................................................................... 2-18 Table 2-21 Valid slots and interfaces of the EoD boards .................................................................................. 2-19 Table 2-22 Valid slots and interfaces of the CES boards .................................................................................. 2-19 Table 2-23 SDH processing boards, their valid slots and their interface for the OptiX OSN 3500 .................. 2-20 Table 2-24 PDH processing boards and their valid slots in the OptiX OSN 3500............................................ 2-24 Table 2-25 PDH processing boards and their valid slots in the OptiX OSN 3500............................................ 2-25 Table 2-26 Valid slots and interfaces of the EoS boards ................................................................................... 2-26
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
xix
Tables
OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Table 2-27 Valid slots and interfaces of the mapping interface boards of the EoS boards ............................... 2-28 Table 2-28 Valid slots and interfaces of the ATM boards ................................................................................. 2-29 Table 2-29 Valid slots and interfaces of the RPR boards .................................................................................. 2-29 Table 2-30 Mapping interface boards of the RPR boards and their valid slots ................................................. 2-30 Table 2-31 Valid slots and interfaces of the SAN boards.................................................................................. 2-30 Table 2-32 WDM boards, their valid slots and their interface for the OptiX OSN 3500 .................................. 2-31 Table 2-33 Microwave boards, their valid slots and their interface for the OptiX OSN 3500 .......................... 2-32 Table 2-34 Optical booster amplifier boards, their valid slots and their interface for the OptiX OSN 3500 .... 2-32 Table 2-35 Mapping relation between the valid slots and connectors of the power boards and auxiliary boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 ................................................................................................................... 2-33 Table 3-1 Switching capability of the OptiX OSN 3500 .................................................................................... 3-2 Table 3-2 Ethernet service interfaces on the OptiX OSN equipment ................................................................. 3-4 Table 3-3 CES service interfaces on the OptiX OSN equipment........................................................................ 3-4 Table 3-4 Service access capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500 (in packet mode) .................................................... 3-4 Table 3-5 Equipment level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 .......................................... 3-8 Table 3-6 Parameters for 1+1 LAG protection of Ethernet boards (in packet mode) ......................................... 3-9 Table 3-7 MC-LAG parameters ........................................................................................................................ 3-11 Table 3-8 1+1 hot backup parameters of the cross-connect and timing units ................................................... 3-11 Table 3-9 1+1 hot backup parameters of the SCC unit ..................................................................................... 3-12 Table 3-10 Network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 .......................................... 3-14 Table 3-11 MPLS Tunnel APS protection parameters ...................................................................................... 3-17 Table 3-12 Parameters of PW APS ................................................................................................................... 3-20 Table 3-13 Parameters of linear MSP supported by CES boards ...................................................................... 3-21 Table 3-14 Parameters of point-to-point LPT ................................................................................................... 3-22 Table 3-15 Parameters of point-to-multipoint LPT........................................................................................... 3-23 Table 3-16 Cross-connect capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500 ............................................................................ 3-25 Table 3-17 Service type supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 ............................................................................ 3-27 Table 3-18 Service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 ..................................................................................... 3-28 Table 3-19 Maximum service access capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500 in TDM mode ................................... 3-29 Table 3-20 Equipment level protection ............................................................................................................. 3-30 Table 3-21 TPS protection schemes and supported boards ............................................................................... 3-32 Table 3-22 TPS protection parameters .............................................................................................................. 3-32 Table 3-23 1+1 protection parameters of Ethernet boards ................................................................................ 3-33 Table 3-24 Parameters for 1+1 LAG and DLAG protection of Ethernet boards (in TDM mode) .................... 3-34
xx
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Tables
Table 3-25 1+1 protection parameters of ATM boards ..................................................................................... 3-35 Table 3-26 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection for the microwave boards .................................................................. 3-35 Table 3-27 N+1 protection for the microwave boards ...................................................................................... 3-36 Table 3-28 1+1 inter-board protection parameters of N1LWX ......................................................................... 3-36 Table 3-29 1+1 hot backup parameters of the cross-connect and timing units ................................................. 3-37 Table 3-30 1+1 hot backup parameters of the SCC unit ................................................................................... 3-37 Table 3-31 Network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 .......................................... 3-39 Table 3-32 Maximum number of MSP rings supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 ............................................ 3-41 Table 3-33 MPLS features supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 ........................................................................ 3-54 Table 3-34 MPLS performance specifications of the OptiX OSN 3500 ........................................................... 3-55 Table 3-35 Functions and features of the PEX1 ............................................................................................... 3-67 Table 3-36 Functions and features of the PEX2 ............................................................................................... 3-70 Table 3-37 Functions and features of the PEG8 ............................................................................................... 3-73 Table 3-38 Functions and features of the PEG16 ............................................................................................. 3-76 Table 3-39 Functions and features of the PETF8.............................................................................................. 3-78 Table 3-40 Functions and features of the PEFF8 .............................................................................................. 3-79 Table 3-41 Functions and features of the EDQ41 ............................................................................................. 3-80 Table 3-42 Packet features of the EDQ41......................................................................................................... 3-82 Table 3-43 EoS data features of the EDQ41 ..................................................................................................... 3-83 Table 3-44 Functions and features of the CQ1 ................................................................................................. 3-83 Table 3-45 Functions and features of the MD12............................................................................................... 3-84 Table 3-46 Functions and features of the MD75............................................................................................... 3-85 Table 3-47 Functions and features of the EFT8 ................................................................................................ 3-87 Table 3-48 Functions and features of the EFT8A ............................................................................................. 3-90 Table 3-49 Functions and features of the EGT2 ............................................................................................... 3-91 Table 3-50 Functions and features of the EFS0 ................................................................................................ 3-94 Table 3-51 Functions and features of the EFS0A ............................................................................................. 3-97 Table 3-52 Functions and features of the EFS4 .............................................................................................. 3-100 Table 3-53 Functions and features of the EGS2 ............................................................................................. 3-104 Table 3-54 Functions and features of the EMS2 ............................................................................................. 3-107 Table 3-55 Functions and features of the EMS4 ............................................................................................. 3-110 Table 3-56 Functions and features of the EGS4 ............................................................................................. 3-114 Table 3-57 Functions and features of the EAS2 board ................................................................................... 3-117
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
xxi
Tables
OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Table 3-58 Functions and features of the EMR0 ............................................................................................ 3-126 Table 3-59 Functions and features of the EGR2 ............................................................................................. 3-129 Table 3-60 RPR service class ......................................................................................................................... 3-132 Table 3-61 Functions of ADL4 and ADQ1 ..................................................................................................... 3-138 Table 3-62 Functions of IDL4 and IDQ1 ........................................................................................................ 3-139 Table 3-63 ATM service types and traffic types ............................................................................................. 3-140 Table 3-64 Functions and features of the DX1 ............................................................................................... 3-144 Table 3-65 Functions and features of the DXA .............................................................................................. 3-145 Table 3-66 Functions and features of the MST4 ............................................................................................. 3-146 Table 3-67 Service types service rates supported by the MST4 ..................................................................... 3-147 Table 3-68 Microwave capacity of the equipment .......................................................................................... 3-148 Table 5-1 Administration and auxiliary interfaces .............................................................................................. 5-1 Table 5-2 DCC allocation modes of the OptiX OSN 3500 ................................................................................. 5-2 Table 7-1 Technical specifications of the ETSI cabinet ...................................................................................... 7-2 Table 7-2 Technical specifications of the PDU ................................................................................................... 7-2 Table 7-3 Dimensions and weight of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack .................................................................. 7-3 Table 7-4 Maximum power consumption of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack ....................................................... 7-4 Table 7-5 Power supply parameters .................................................................................................................... 7-5 Table 7-6 Laser safety class ................................................................................................................................ 7-6 Table 7-7 EMC test results ................................................................................................................................. 7-6 Table 7-8 Environment specifications for long-term operation .......................................................................... 7-7 Table 7-9 System performance specifications .................................................................................................... 7-8 Table 7-10 MPLS Tunnel APS 1+1 and 1:1 protection parameters .................................................................. 7-10 Table 7-11 PW APS 1+1/1:1 protection parameters ......................................................................................... 7-11 Table 7-12 Parameters for point-to-point LPT protection................................................................................. 7-12 Table 7-13 Parameters for point-to-multipoint LPT protection ........................................................................ 7-12 Table 7-14 Parameters for LAG protection of Ethernet boards (packet mode) ................................................ 7-13 Table 7-15 Timing and synchronization performance of the IEEE 1588 V2 high precision clock ................... 7-13 Table 7-16 Timing and synchronization performance of the synchronous Ethernet ......................................... 7-14 Table 7-17 Timing and synchronization performance ...................................................................................... 7-14 Table 7-18 Transmission performance .............................................................................................................. 7-15 Table 7-19 Linear MSP parameters .................................................................................................................. 7-15 Table 7-20 MSP ring parameters ...................................................................................................................... 7-16
xxii
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Tables
Table 7-21 SNCP parameters ............................................................................................................................ 7-17 Table 7-22 TU-12 numbering in a VC-4 (sequential) ....................................................................................... 7-18 Table 7-23 TU-12 numbering in a VC-4 (interleaved) ..................................................................................... 7-18 Table 7-24 Radio work modes .......................................................................................................................... 7-19 Table 7-25 IF performance ............................................................................................................................... 7-20 Table 7-26 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem ................................................................ 7-20 Table 7-27 Link reliability per hop ................................................................................................................... 7-21 Table 7-28 Modulation Mode (SP ODU).......................................................................................................... 7-21 Table 7-29 Frequency Band (SP ODU) ............................................................................................................ 7-21 Table 7-30 Transceiver Performance (SP ODU) ............................................................................................... 7-22 Table 7-31 IF Performance ............................................................................................................................... 7-22 Table 7-32 Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption (SP ODU) ............................................................ 7-23 Table 7-33 Frequency information of the 7 GHz frequency band (SP ODU) ................................................... 7-23 Table 7-34 Frequency information of the 8 GHz frequency band (SP ODU) ................................................... 7-24 Table 7-35 Frequency information of the 11 GHz frequency band (SP ODU) ................................................. 7-25 Table 7-36 Frequency information of the 13 GHz frequency band (SP ODU) ................................................. 7-25 Table 7-37 Frequency information of the 15 GHz frequency band (SP ODU) ................................................. 7-26 Table 7-38 Frequency information of the 18 GHz frequency band (SP ODU) ................................................. 7-26 Table 7-39 Frequency information of the 23 GHz frequency band (SP ODU) ................................................. 7-27 Table 7-40 Frequency information of the 26 GHz frequency band (SP ODU) ................................................. 7-27 Table 7-41 Frequency information of the 38 GHz frequency band (SP ODU) ................................................. 7-27 Table 7-42 Modulation Mode (HP ODU) ......................................................................................................... 7-28 Table 7-43 Frequency band (HP ODU) ............................................................................................................ 7-28 Table 7-44 Transceiver performance (HP ODU) .............................................................................................. 7-29 Table 7-45 IF Performance ............................................................................................................................... 7-30 Table 7-46 Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption (HP ODU) ........................................................... 7-30 Table 7-47 Frequency information of the 7 GHz frequency band (HP ODU) .................................................. 7-30 Table 7-48 Frequency information of the 8 GHz frequency band (HP ODU) .................................................. 7-32 Table 7-49 Frequency information of the 11 GHz frequency band (HP ODU) ................................................ 7-32 Table 7-50 Frequency information of the 13 GHz frequency band (HP ODU) ................................................ 7-33 Table 7-51 Frequency information of the 15 GHz frequency band (HP ODU) ................................................ 7-33 Table 7-52 Frequency information of the 18 GHz frequency band (HP ODU) ................................................ 7-34 Table 7-53 Frequency information of the 23 GHz frequency band (HP ODU) ................................................ 7-34
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
xxiii
Tables
OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Table 7-54 Frequency information of the 26 GHz frequency band (HP ODU) ................................................ 7-35 Table 7-55 Frequency information of the 32 GHz frequency band (HP ODU) ................................................ 7-35 Table 7-56 Frequency information of the 38 GHz frequency band (HP ODU) ................................................ 7-35 Table 7-57 Parameters specified for the STM-1 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 ............................ 7-37 Table 7-58 Parameters specified for the STM-4 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN equipment ................... 7-38 Table 7-59 Parameters specified for the STM-16 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 .......................... 7-38 Table 7-60 Parameters specified for the STM-16 (FEC) optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN equipment ...... 7-39 Table 7-61 Parameters specified for the STM-64 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 .......................... 7-40 Table 7-62 Parameters specified for the STM-64 (FEC) optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 ............... 7-41 Table 7-63 Parameters specified for the Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 .......................... 7-42 Table 7-64 Parameters specified for the Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 .......................... 7-43 Table 7-65 Parameters specified for the tunable-wavelength optical interface................................................. 7-44 Table 7-66 Parameters specified for the STM-1 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 ................... 7-45 Table 7-67 Parameters specified for the STM-4 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 ................... 7-46 Table 7-68 Parameters specified for the STM-16 and STM-64 colored optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 ........................................................................................................................................................................... 7-46 Table 7-69 Parameters specified for the GE colored optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 ..................... 7-47 Table 7-70 Parameters specified for the 10GE colored optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 ................. 7-47 Table 7-71 Wavelength allocation information of the STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces ....................... 7-48 Table 7-72 Wavelength allocation information of the GE colored optical interfaces ....................................... 7-49 Table 7-73 Wavelength allocation information of the 10GE colored optical interfaces ................................... 7-49 Table 7-74 Parameters specified for the PDH electrical interfaces ................................................................... 7-50 Table 7-75 Parameters specified for the DDN electrical interfaces .................................................................. 7-51 Table 7-76 Parameters specified for electrical interfaces ................................................................................. 7-52 Table 7-77 Specifications of the clock interface ............................................................................................... 7-53 Table 7-78 Specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface .......................................................................................... 7-53 Table 7-79 Specifications of the RS-232 interface ........................................................................................... 7-53 Table 7-80 Specifications of the RS-422 interface ........................................................................................... 7-54 Table 7-81 Specifications of the orerwire phone interface ............................................................................... 7-54 Table 7-82 Power consumption and weight of each board ............................................................................... 7-55 Table 7-83 Safety certifications that the OptiX OSN 3500 has received .......................................................... 7-60 Table 7-84 Climatic conditions for storage ....................................................................................................... 7-61 Table 7-85 Requirements for the density of the mechanically active substances during storage ..................... 7-62 Table 7-86 Requirements for the density of the chemically active substances during storage ......................... 7-62
xxiv
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Tables
Table 7-87 Requirements for mechanical stress during storage........................................................................ 7-63 Table 7-88 Climatic conditions for transportation ............................................................................................ 7-63 Table 7-89 Requirements for the density of the mechanically active substances during transportation ........... 7-64 Table 7-90 Requirements for the density of the chemically active substances during transportation ............... 7-64 Table 7-91 Requirements for mechanical stress during transportation ............................................................. 7-64 Table 7-92 Requirements for temperature and humidity .................................................................................. 7-65 Table 7-93 Requirements for the density of the mechanically active substances during operation .................. 7-66 Table 7-94 Requirements for the density of the chemically active substances during operation ...................... 7-66 Table 7-95 Requirements for mechanical stress during operation .................................................................... 7-67 Table 9-1 ITU-T recommendations .................................................................................................................... 9-1 Table 9-2 IEEE standards ................................................................................................................................... 9-4 Table 9-3 IETF standards.................................................................................................................................... 9-5 Table 9-4 ANSI related standards ....................................................................................................................... 9-7 Table 9-5 Packet related standards...................................................................................................................... 9-7 Table 9-6 Microwave related standards .............................................................................................................. 9-9 Table 9-7 Environment related standards ......................................................................................................... 9-11 Table 9-8 EMC related standards...................................................................................................................... 9-12 Table 9-9 Safety compliance related standards ................................................................................................. 9-13 Table 9-10 Protection related standards ............................................................................................................ 9-13
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
xxv
1 Introduction
%
%*% Positionin
Introduction
The OptiX OSN 3500 intelligent optical transmission system (hereinafter referred to as the OptiX OSN 3500) developed by Huawei is the next-generation intelligent optical transmission switching equipment. The OptiX OSN 3500 is of a "dual core" architecture. That is, the OptiX OSN 3500 can be used in packet mode or in TDM mode. When used with the other equipment of Huawei, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports various networking applications, such as the pure packet mode application, hybrid networking application (overlay networking of the packet mode and TDM mode), and pure TDM mode application. By using a proper networking solution, the data service and conventional SDH service can be processed in the optimal manner. The OptiX OSN 3500 transmits voice and data services on the same platform with high efficiency. It integrates the following technologies: In packet mode, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports the following technologies: Multi-Protocol Label Switch (MPLS) Ethernet Circuit Emulation Service (CES) In TDM mode, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports the following technologies: Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH) Ethernet Asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) Storage area network (SAN) Wavelength division multiplexing (WDM) Digital data network (DDN) Microwave technology Figure 1-1 shows the exterior of the OptiX OSN 3500.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
1-1
1 Introduction
Figure 1-1 exterior of the OptiX OSN 3500
The OptiX OSN 3500 is mainly used at the convergence layer and backbone layer of the metropolitan area network (MAN). In TDM mode, the OptiX OSN 3500 can be networked with the other OptiX transmission equipment (the OptiX OSN 9500, OptiX OSN 7500, OptiX OSN 3500 II, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 2500 REG, OptiX OSN 1500, OptiX 2500+(Metro 3000), and OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000)) to optimize the carrier's investment. Meanwhile, with the packet switching technology, the OptiX OSN 3500 can constitute a packet data transmission network with the other OptiX transmission equipment (OptiX OSN 7500, OptiX OSN 1500, OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000), OptiX PTN 910, OptiX PTN 950, OptiX PTN 1900, OptiX PTN 3900, OptiX RTN 900) to meet the requirement for bearing the IP service.
1-2
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
1 Introduction
Figure 1-2 Network application of the OptiX OSN 3500

OptiX OSN 3500 II OptiX OSN 3500
OptiX OSN 9500
OptiX OSN 7500
Backbone layer
OptiX OSN 3500 II
OptiX OSN 2500
OptiX OSN 3500
Convergence layer
OptiX OSN 1500
OptiX OSN 2500
Access layer
GSM/CDMA/ WCDMA/TDSCDMA
PSTN
Ethernet
...
ATM
SAN
Microwave Technology
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WDMA) Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA) Public Switched Telephony Network (PSTN) Storage Area Network (SAN) Ethernet Microwave Technology
%*# .eatures
This topic describes the features of the OptiX OSN equipment in the aspects of system architecture, networking, and technologies. 1.2.1 Dual-Core Architecture, Multi-Service Transmission With a dual-core architecture, the OptiX OSN equipment can meet the current requirement for bearing the conventional service and the growing requirement for bearing the packet service. 1.2.2 Support for 3G Mobile Backhauling, Providing an Optimal Transmission Solution Huawei equipment provides an optimal transmission solution based in packet domain, implementing service convergence and scheduling at the core layer of the entire wireless network. In this manner, Huawei equipment meets the requirements for 3G mobile backhauling. 1.2.3 Built-In WDM/Microwave, Flexible Networking The OptiX OSN equipment uses the built-in WDM technology to transmit several wavelengths over one optical fiber. In this manner, the OptiX OSN equipment can be interconnected with the WDM equipment.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
1-3
1 Introduction
%*#*% Dual&Core Architecture7 2ulti&Service Transmission

With a dual-core architecture, the OptiX OSN equipment can meet the current requirement for bearing the conventional service and the growing requirement for bearing the packet service. The dual-core architecture refers to the packet mode networking based on the SDH networking (TDM mode networking) implemented through replacing the single-mode (TDM-mode) cross-connect and GSCC boards with the dual-mode (TDM and packet modes) cross-connect and GSCC boards. In this manner, SDH services and packet services can coexist. The following part describes the specifications supported by the OptiX OSN equipment. Capacity Services Equipment Level Protection Network Level Protection
%*#*# Support +or -G 2obile (ac8haulin 7 Providin an 1ptimal Transmission Solution

Huawei equipment provides an optimal transmission solution based in packet domain, implementing service convergence and scheduling at the core layer of the entire wireless network. In this manner, Huawei equipment meets the requirements for 3G mobile backhauling. The packet mode combines the following technologies for efficient and reliable end-to-end signal transmission on 3G base stations. As a result, the packet domain reduces the maintenance workload and improves the network performance. TDM PWE3 ETH PWE3 MPLS Tunnel OAM PW OAM MPLS Tunnel APS PW APS MS-PW HQoS LAG MC-LAG
%*#*- (uilt&In 9D2:2icro,ave7 .le;ible Net,or8in

The OptiX OSN equipment uses the built-in WDM technology to transmit several wavelengths over one optical fiber. In this manner, the OptiX OSN equipment can be interconnected with the WDM equipment. The OptiX OSN equipment supports the radio technologies to transmit the conventional SDH service over radio. In this manner, the radio equipment can be used as a substitute to access the SDH service. The following sections describe the 3.5 Built-in WDM Technology and 3.6 Microwave Technology.
1-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
2 Software Architecture and Hardware Structure
So+t,are Architecture and !ard,are Structure
#*% !ard,are Architecture

The equipment can house several types of boards and can reside in several types of cabinets. 2.1.1 Overview The OptiX OSN 3500 consists of the cabinet, subrack and boards. 2.1.2 Cabinet The cabinet that complies with the ETSI standards is used for the OptiX OSN 3500. A power supply box is installed on the top of the cabinet to access -48 V or -60 V power. 2.1.3 Subrack The subrack consists of slots and boards that can be configured. 2.1.4 Boards The equipment supports different types of boards.
#*%*% 1vervie,
The OptiX OSN 3500 consists of the cabinet, subrack and boards. Figure 2-1 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 equipment.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
2-1
Figure 2-1 Structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 equipment

1 4
7 7
7 H D W
1. DC PDU 5. Subrack
2. Side panel 6. Cabinet
3. Cable distribution plate 7. fiber management tray
4. Orderwire phone fixing frame 8. Front door
The OptiX OSN 3500 uses various boards and thus forms the system frame where the cross-connect matrix is the core. As provided in Table 2-1, the system frame of the OptiX OSN 3500 has the following units.
2-2
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Table 2-1 Units supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 Supported 2ode TDM domain Supported Unit SDH interface unit PDH interface unit DDN interface unit Ethernet interface unit RPR unit ATM interface unit SAN interface unit WDM unit SDH cross-connect matrix unit Optical amplifier unit and dispersion compensation unit Packet domain Ethernet interface unit Packet cross-connect matrix unit TDM domain and packet domain Synchronous timing unit System control and communication unit Overhead processing unit Auxiliary interface unit Power interface unit
Figure 2-2 shows the system architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500. Figure 2-2 System architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500
SDH/PDH/Ethernet/ ATM/DDN interface unit
STM-N optical signal Ethernet signal
SDH/Ethernet interface unit
TDM & Packet Switch Fabric
PDH signal SDH signal Ethernet signal ATM signal DDN signal
Synchronous timing unit
Interface unit Auxiliary
Overhead processing
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
SCC unit
unit
2-3
#*%*# Cabinet
The cabinet that complies with the ETSI standards is used for the OptiX OSN 3500. A power supply box is installed on the top of the cabinet to access -48 V or -60 V power. Figure 2-3 shows the appearance of an ETSI cabinet. Figure 2-3 Exterior of an ETSI cabinet
T63 Cabinet
N63E Cabinet
2-4
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
#*%*- Subrac8
The subrack consists of slots and boards that can be configured. 2.1.3.1 Structure The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack has a two-layer structure. The subrack consists of the processing board area, interface board area, fan area, and cable routing area. 2.1.3.2 Slot Allocation The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack consists of the upper layer and the lower layer. The upper layer, where 19 slots are available, is the slot area for interface boards. The lower layer, where 18 slots are available, is the slot area for processing boards.
#*%*-*% Structure
The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack has a two-layer structure. The subrack consists of the processing board area, interface board area, fan area, and cable routing area. Figure 2-4 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack. Figure 2-4 Structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack
5 4 H W D
1. Interface board area 3. Processing board area 5. Mounting ear
2. Fan area 4. Cable routing area -
The functions of the areas are as follows: Interface board area: This area houses the interface boards of the OptiX OSN 3500.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
2-5
Fan area: This area houses three fan modules, which dissipate heat generated by the equipment. Processing board area: These areas house the processing boards of the OptiX OSN 3500. Cable routing area: This area houses the fiber jumpers in the subrack.
The interface board is also called the access board or transit board. The interface board provides physical interfaces for optical signals and electrical signals, and transmits the optical signals or electrical signals to the corresponding processing board.
#*%*-*# Slot Allocation

The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack consists of the upper layer and the lower layer. The upper layer, where 19 slots are available, is the slot area for interface boards. The lower layer, where 18 slots are available, is the slot area for processing boards. Figure 2-5 shows the slot layout of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack. Figure 2-5 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack
S L O T 1 9
S L O T 2 0
S L O T 2 1
S L O T 2 2
S L O T 2 3
S L O T 2 4
S L O T 2 5
S L O T 2 6
S L O T 2 7
S L O T 2 8
S L O T 2 9
S L O T 3 0
S L O T 3 1
S L O T 3 2
S L O T 3 3
S L O T 3 4
S L O T 3 5
S L O T 3 6
S L O T 3 7
P I U FAN SLOT 38
P I U FAN SLOT 39 FAN SLOT 40
A U X
S S S S L L L L O O O O T T T T 1 2 3 4
S L O T 9
S L O T 1 0 P S X C S A
S L O T 1 1
S L O T 1 2
S L O T 1 3
S S S S L L L L O O O O T T T T 1 1 1 1 4 5 6 7
S L O T 1 8
P S X C S A
G G S S C C C C
Fiber Routing
Figure 2-6 shows the dual-slot layout of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.
2-6
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Figure 2-6 Dual-slot layout of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack
S L O T 1 9
S L O T 2 0
S L O T 2 1
S L O T 2 2
S L O T 2 3
S L O T 2 4
S L O T 2 5
S L O T 2 6
S L O T 2 7
S L O T 2 8
S L O T 2 9
S L O T 3 0
S L O T 3 1
S L O T 3 2
S L O T 3 3
S L O T 3 4
S L O T 3 5
S L O T 3 6
S L O T 3 7
P I U FAN SLOT 38
P I U FAN SLOT 39 FAN SLOT 40
A U X
S L O T 1
S L O T 3
S L O T 5
S L O T 7
S L O T 9
S L O T 1 0
S L O T 1 1
S L O T 1 3
S L O T 1 5
S L O T 1 7
S L O T 1 8
P S X C S
P S X C S
G G S S C C C C
Fiber Routing
Slot Area +or Inter+ace (oards

Slots for the interface boards: slots 19-26 and 29-36
Slot Area +or Processin (oards

Slots for the processing boards: slots 1-8 and 11-17
1ther Slots
Slots for the cross-connect and timing boards: slots 9-10 Slots for the SCC boards: slots 17-18 (slot 17 can also house a processing board) Slots for the PIU boards: slots 27-28 Slot for the auxiliary interface board: slot 37 Slots for the fan boards: slots 38-40
In the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack, dual-slots and single-slots cannot house boards at the same time.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
2-7
2appin Relation (et,een Slots +or Inter+ace (oards and Slots +or Processin (oards
Table 2-2 lists the mapping relation between slots for the interface boards and slots for the processing boards. Table 2-2 Mapping relation between slots for the interface boards and slots for the processing boards Slots +or Processi n (oards Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Dual&Slots +or Processin (oards Slot 3 Slot 5 Slots +or Correspondin Inter+ace (oards Slots 19 and 20 Slots 21 and 22 Slots 23 and 24 Slots 25 and 26 Slots +or Processin (oards Slot 13 Slot 14 Slot 15 Slot 16 Dual&Slots +or Processin (oards Slot 13 Slot 15 Slots +or Correspondi n Inter+ace (oards Slot 29 and 30 Slot 31 and 32 Slot 33 and 34 Slot 35 and 36
Paired Slots
If the overhead bytes pass through the backplane bus between two slots, the two slots are paired slots. When an NE is configured with an orderwire phone, realizes the service protection in DPS mode, the two boards that form a ring must be inserted into the paired slots. Table 2-3 lists the paired slots. Table 2-3 Paired slots Cross&Connect Capacity 200 Gbit/s Paired Slots (Slot 2, Slot 17) (Slot 3, Slot 16) (Slot 4, Slot 15) (Slot 5, Slot 14) (Slot 6, Slot 13) (Slot 7, Slot 12) (Slot 8, Slot 11)
#*%*/ (oards
The equipment supports different types of boards. 2.1.4.1 Classification of the Boards
2-8
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
By function, the boards can be classified into SDH boards, PDH processing boards, packet boards, EoD boards, CES boards, EoS The boards are functionally classified into cross-connect and system control boards, packet processing boards, packet interface boards (including CES interface boards), SDH boards, PDH boards, EoS boards, ATM boards, RPR boards, SAN boards, WDM boards, microwave boards, and optical amplifier boards. 2.1.4.2 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards The OptiX OSN equipment supports several cross-connect and system control boards. 2.1.4.3 Packet Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports packet boards. 2.1.4.4 EoD Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports EoD boards. 2.1.4.5 CES Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports CES boards. 2.1.4.6 SDH Processing Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the SDH processing boards. 2.1.4.7 PDH Processing Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the PDH processing boards. 2.1.4.8 EoS Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports EoS boards. 2.1.4.9 ATM Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports ATM boards. 2.1.4.10 RPR Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports RPR boards. 2.1.4.11 SAN Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports SAN boards. 2.1.4.12 WDM Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports WDM boards. 2.1.4.13 Microwave Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports Microwave boards. 2.1.4.14 Optical Booster Amplifier Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports several optical amplifier boards. 2.1.4.15 Other Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the power boards and auxiliary boards.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
2-9
#*%*/*% Classi+ication o+ the (oards

By function, the boards can be classified into SDH boards, PDH processing boards, packet boards, EoD boards, CES boards, EoS The boards are functionally classified into cross-connect and system control boards, packet processing boards, packet interface boards (including CES interface boards), SDH boards, PDH boards, EoS boards, ATM boards, RPR boards, SAN boards, WDM boards, microwave boards, and optical amplifier boards.
For details on the board version replacement relation between boards, refer to the table of board version replacement relations in the Parts Replacement.
SD! (oards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the SDH boards that operate at the STM-64, STM-16, STM-4, and STM-1 rates. Table 2-4 lists the SDH boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports. Table 2-4 SDH boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports (oard N1SL64, N2SL64 N1SF64, N1SF64A Description 1xSTM-64 optical interface board 1xSTM-64 optical interface board (with the forward error correction (FEC) function) 2xSTM-64 optical interface board 1xSTM-16 optical interface board 1xSTM-16 optical interface board 2xSTM-16 optical interface board 4xSTM-16 optical interface board 1xSTM-16 optical interface board (with the out-band FEC function) (oard N1SLD4, N2SLD4 N1SLD4A Description 2xSTM-4 optical interface board 2xSTM-4 optical interface board
N1SLD64 N1SL16, N2SL16, N3SL16 N1SL16A, N2SL16A, N3SL16A N1SLD16 N1SLQ16, N2SLQ16 N1SF16
N1SLT1 N1SLQ1, N2SLQ1 N1SLQ1A
12xSTM-1 optical interface board 4xSTM-1 optical interface board 4xSTM-1 optical interface board 1xSTM-1 optical interface board 1xSTM-1 optical interface board 16xSTM-1 signal processing board
N1SL1, N2SL1 N1SL1A N1SLH1
2-10
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
(oard N1SLO16
Description 8xSTM-16 optical interface board
(oard N1SEP1
Description 2xSTM-1 line processing board when the interfaces are available on the front panel 8xSTM-1 line processing board when the interfaces are available on the corresponding interface board
N1SL4, N2SL4, N1SL4A N1SLQ4, N2SLQ4, N1SLQ4A N1EU08 N2OU08
1xSTM-4 optical interface board 4xSTM-4 optical interface board 8xSTM-1 electrical signal interface board 8xSTM-1 optical signal interface board (LC)
N2SLO1, N3SLO1 N3SLQ41
8xSTM-1 optical interface board 4xSTM-4/STM-1 optical interface board 8xSTM-1 optical signal interface board (LC) 4xSTM-1 electrical signal interface board
N1OU08 N1EU04
PD! (oards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the PDH boards that operate at different rates and have different impedances. Table 2-5 lists the PDH boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports. Table 2-5 PDH boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports (oard N1PQ1, N2PQ1 N1PQM N1PL3, N2PL3 N1PL3A, N2PL3A N1D12S N1D75S Description 63xE1 service processing board 63xE1/T1 service processing board 3xE3/T3 service processing board 3xE3/T3 service processing board (The interfaces are available on the front panel.) 32xE1/T1 electrical switching interface board (120 ohms) 32xE1 electrical switching interface board (75 ohms) (oard N2PQ3 N1DX1 N1DXA N1SPQ4, N2SPQ4 N1D12B N1MU04 Description 12xE3/T3 service processing board DDN service accessing and converging board DDN service converging and processing board 4xE4/STM-1 electrical processing board 32xE1/T1 electrical switching interface board (120 ohms) 4xE4/STM-1 electrical signal interface board
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
2-11
(oard N1D34S N1C34S N1PD3, N2PD3
Description 6xE3/T3 electrical switching interface board 3xE3/T3 electrical switching interface board 6xE3/T3 service processing board
(oard N1DM12 N1TSB8 N1TSB4
Description DDN service interface board 8-port electrical switching interface board 4-port electrical switching interface board
Pac8et (oards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the processing boards and electrical interface boards that operate at various rates and provide the packet feature. Table 2-6 lists the packet boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports. Table 2-6 Packet boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports (oard N1PEG16 Description 16xGE processing board (oard In the case of the N1PEX1, the mapping NMS version is as follows: N1PEX2 Description 1x10GE processing board
N1PETF8 N1PEG8
8xFE electrical interface board 8xGE Ethernet switching and processing board 1x10GE processing board
2x10 GE Ethernet switching and processing board 8-port Fast Ethernet optical interface board
N2PEX1
N1PEFF8
5oD (oards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports multiple EoD boards. Table 2-7 lists the name and description of the EoD boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500.
2-12
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Table 2-7 EoD boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 (oard N1EDQ41 Description 4-port 622M/155M SDH optical interface Ethernet double domain multiple function processing board (oard Description -
C5S (oards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports multiple CES boards. Table 2-8 lists the name and description of the CES boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 2-8 CES boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 (oard N1CQ1 N1MD12 Description 4-port channelized STM-1 optical interface board Multi-protocol 32xE1 interface board (120 ohms) (oard N1MD75 Description Multi-protocol 32xE1 interface board (75 ohms) -
5oS (oards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports EoS boards with the transparent transmission and switching functions. Table 2-9 lists the name and description of the EoS boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 2-9 EoS boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 (oard N1EFT8 Description 8xGE or 16xGE Ethernet transparent transmission board 8xFE Ethernet transparent transmission board 2xGE Ethernet transparent transmission board 16xFE Ethernet switching and processing board (oard N1EMS2 Description 2xGE and 16xFE Ethernet transparent transmission and convergence board 4xGE Ethernet switching and processing board 8xFE Ethernet switching and processing board 4xFE Ethernet switching and processing board
N1EFT8 A N1EGT2, N2EGT2 N1EFS0 A
N1EGS4, N3EGS4, N4EGS4 N1EFS0, N2EFS0, N4EFS0, N5EFS0 N1EFS4, N2EFS4, N3EFS4
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
2-13
(oard N2EGS2, N3EGS2 N1EMS4
Description 2xGE Ethernet switching and processing board 4xGE and 16xFE Ethernet switching and processing board 8-port 100M Ethernet optical interface board 4xGE Ethernet processing board
(oard N1ETS8
Description 8-port 10M/100M Ethernet twisted-pair cable switching board 2x10GE Ethernet Layer 2 switching and processing board 8-port 100M Ethernet twisted-pair cable interface board -
N1EAS2
N1EFF8, N1EFF8 A N2EGS4 A
N1ETF8, N1ETF8A
AT2 (oards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports multiple ATM boards. Table 2-10 lists the name and description of the ATM boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 2-10 ATM boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 (oard N1ADQ1 N1IDL4 Description 4xSTM-1 ATM service processing board 1xSTM-4 ATM service processing board (oard N1ADL4 N1IDQ1 Description 1xSTM-4 ATM service processing board 4xSTM-1 ATM service processing board
RPR (oards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports multiple RPR boards. Table 2-11 lists the name and description of the RPR boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 2-11 RPR boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 (oard N2EGR2 Description 2xGE Ethernet ring processing board (oard N2EMR0 Description 12xFE and 1xGE Ethernet ring processing board
2-14
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
SAN (oards
Table 2-12 lists the name and description of the SAN boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 2-12 SAN boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 (oard N1MST4 Description 4-port multi-service transparent transmission board
Cross&Connect (oards and System Control (oards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports multiple system control boards and cross-connect boards that have different cross-connect capacities. Table 2-13 lists the cross-connect boards and system control boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports. Table 2-13 Cross-connect boards and system control boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports (oard N1PSXCS N4GSCC, N6GSCC N2PSXCSA Description Cross-connect and timing board (supporting the packet feature) Intelligent system control and communication board Super cross-connect and timing board
Au;iliary (oards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports auxiliary boards such as the system auxiliary interface board and fan board. Table 2-14 lists the auxiliary boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports. Table 2-14 Auxiliary boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports (oard N1AUX N1FAN Description System auxiliary interface board Fan board
9D2 (oards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports WDM boards such as the optical add/drop multiplexing board and optical amplifier board. Table 2-15 lists the WDM boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
2-15
Table 2-15 WDM boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports (oard TN11CMR2 TN11CMR4 TN11MR2 TN11MR4 Description 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board (oard N1MR2C N1LWX N1MR2A N1FIB Description 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board Arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion board 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board Filter isolating board
2icro,ave (oards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports microwave boards such as the microwave IF board and microwave power board. Table 2-16 lists the microwave boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports. Table 2-16 Microwave boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports (oard N1IFSD1 N1RPWR Description Dual-port IF board 6-channel ODU power board
1ptical Ampli+ier (oards and Dispersion Compensation (oards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports multiple optical amplifier boards and dispersion compensation boards. Table 2-17 lists the optical amplifier boards and dispersion compensation boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports. Table 2-17 Optical amplifier boards and dispersion compensation boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports (oard N1BPA and N2BPA N1BA2 N1RPC01 Description Optical booster and pre-amplifier board Optical booster amplifier board Forward Raman driving board (external) (oard N1COA, 61COA, and 62COA N1DCU, N2DCU N1RPC02 Description Case-shaped optical amplifier Dispersion compensation board Backward Raman driving board (external)
2-16
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
(oard TN12OBU1
Description Optical booster amplifier board
(oard -
Description -
Po,er (oards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports power boards such as the UPM and power interface board. Table 2-18 lists the power boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports. Table 2-18 Power boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports (oard UPM N1PIU N1PIUA N1PIUB Description Uninterruptible power module Power interface board Power interface board (This board can be used in the enhanced subrack that consumes 1100 W high power.) Power interface board (This board can be used in the enhanced subrack that consumes 2300 W high power.)
#*%*/*# Cross&Connect and System Control (oards

The OptiX OSN equipment supports several cross-connect and system control boards. Table 2-19 lists the cross-connect and system control boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 2-19 Cross-connect and system control boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 (oard N1PSXCS, N2PSXCSA N4GSCC, N6GSCC Valid Slot Slots 9 and 10 slot 17 and 18 Inter+acin 2ode Inter+ace Type Connector -
#*%*/*- Pac8et (oards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports packet boards. Table 2-20 provides the valid slots and interfaces of the packet boards on the OptiX OSN 3500.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
2-17
Table 2-20 Valid slots and interfaces of the packet boards (oard N1PEG16 Valid Slot Valid slots when the N1PSXCS is installed: slots 1, 3, 5, 13, and 15 Inter+acin 2ode Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available with two N1PETF8/N 1PEFF8 (8 x 100M Ethernet electric/opti cal interface board) N1PEX1 Valid slots when the N1PSXCS is installed: slots 1, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13, and 15 Valid slots when the N2PSXCSA is installed: slots 1-3 and 16 (2.5 Gbit/s bandwidth); slots 4-6 and 13-15 (5 Gbit/s bandwidth); slots 7 and 12 (10 Gbit/s bandwidth); slots 8 and 11 (20 Gbit/s bandwidth) Valid slots when the N2PSXCSA is installed: slots 1-3 and 16 (2.5 Gbit/s bandwidth); slots 4-6 and 13-15 (5 Gbit/s bandwidth) Valid slots when the N2PSXCSA is installed: slots 1-3 and 16 (2.5 Gbit/s bandwidth); slots 4-6 and 13-15 (5 Gbit/s bandwidth) Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Inter+ace Type 1000BASE-SX/L X/ZX/VX Conn ector LC
10GBase-SR/SW /LR/LW/ER/EW/ ZR/ZW 10GBase-SR/LR/ ER/ZR
LC
N2PEX1
LC
N1PEX2
Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available with two N1PETF8/N 1PEFF8 (8 x 10/100M Ethernet electric/opti cal interface board)
10GBase-SR/LR/ ER/ZR
LC
N1PEG8
1000BASE-SX/L X/ZX/VX
LC
2-18
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
(oard N1PETF8
Valid Slot Valid slots when the N1PEG16/N1PEG8 is installed: slots 21, 22, 25, 26, 29, 30, 33, and 34 Valid slots when the N1PEG16 is installed: slots 19, 20, 23, 24, 29, 30, 33, 34 Valid slots when the N1PEG8 is installed: slots 19-26, 29-36
Inter+acin 2ode -
Inter+ace Type 100BASE-TX
Conn ector RJ-45
N1PEFF8
100BASE-FX
LC
#*%*/*/ 5oD (oards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports EoD boards. Table 2-21 provides the valid slots and interfaces of the EoD boards on the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 2-21 Valid slots and interfaces of the EoD boards (oard N1EDQ41 Valid Slot Used with the N1PSXCS board: slots 4, 6, 8, 12 and 14 Used with the N2PSXCSA board: slots 4-8 and 11-14 Inter+acin 2ode Interfaces available on the front panel Inter+ace Type S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 Conn ector LC
#*%*/*0 C5S (oards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports CES boards. Table 2-22 provides the valid slots and interfaces of the CES boards on the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 2-22 Valid slots and interfaces of the CES boards (oard N1MD75 Valid Slot Valid slots when the N1PEG8 is installed: slots 19-26 and 29-36 Valid slots when the N1PEG8 is installed: slots 19-26 and 29-36 Inter+acin 2ode Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Inter+ace Type 75-ohm E1 interface Conn ector DB44
N1MD12
120-ohm E1 interface
DB44
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
2-19
(oard N1CQ1
Valid Slot Valid slots when the N1PEG8 is installed: slots 19-26 and 29-36
Inter+acin 2ode Interfaces available on the front panel
Inter+ace Type S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2
Conn ector LC
#*%*/*3 SD! Processin (oards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the SDH processing boards. Table 2-23 lists the SDH processing boards, their valid slots and their interface for the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 2-23 SDH processing boards, their valid slots and their interface for the OptiX OSN 3500 (oard N1SLD64 Valid Slot Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 7-8 and 11-12 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 7-8 and 11-12 Inter+acin 2ode Interfaces available on the front panel Inter+ace Type I-64.1, S-64.2b Connect or LC
N1SL64, N2SL64
Interfaces available on the front panel
I-64.1, I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, V-64.2b Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, Ue-64.2e I-16, S-16.2, L-16.1, L-16.2
LC
N1SF64, N1SF64A
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 7-8 and 11-12 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-4 and 15-16 (for the board housed in any of slots 1-4 and 15-16, two optical interfaces can be configured), and slots 5-8 and 11-14 (for the board housed in any of slots 5-8 and 11-14, four optical interfaces can be configured)
LC
N1SLQ16, N2SLQ16
LC
2-20
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
(oard N1SLD16
Valid Slot Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 7-8 and 11-12 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 5-8 and 11-14 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 5-8 and 11-14 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 7-8 and 11-12 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 5-8 and 11-14 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-4 and 15-16 (for the board housed in any of slots 1-4 and 15-16, two optical interfaces can be configured), and slots 5-8 and 11-14 (for the board housed in any of slots 5-8 and 11-14, four optical interfaces can be configured) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-8 and 11-17 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-8 and 11-17
Inter+ace Type I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2
Connect or LC
N1SL16A, N2SL16A
I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2
LC
N1SL16, N2SL16, N3SL16 N1SLO16
L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je , U-16.2Je I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2
LC
LC
N1SF16
Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
LC
N1SLQ4, N2SLQ4, N1SLQ4A
LC
N1SLD4, N2SLD4, N2SLD4A N1SL4, N2SL4, N1SL4A
I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
LC
LC
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
2-21
(oard N1SLH1
Valid Slot Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 2-5 and 13-16 (16 optical interfaces can be configured)
Inter+acin 2ode Interfaces available on the 8-port optical interface board N1OU08 Interfaces available on the 8-port optical interface board N2OU08 Interfaces available on the 8xSTM-1 electrical interface board N1EU08
Inter+ace Type -
Connect or -
N3SLH41 N1SLT1
Slots 5-8 and 11-16 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-4 and 15-16 (for the board housed in any of slots 1-4 and 15-16, 1-8 optical interfaces can be configured), and slots 5-8 and 11-14 (for the board housed in any of slots 5-8 and 11-14, 1-12 optical interfaces can be configured) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-8 and 11-17 (for the board housed in any of slots 1-8 and 11-17, eight optical interfaces can be configured) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-8 and 11-17 (for the board housed in any of slots 1-8 and 11-17, eight optical interfaces can be configured)
Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel
S-1.1, L-1.1, S-4.1 S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2
LC LC
N2SLO1
I-1.1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
LC
N3SLO1
I-1.1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
LC
2-22
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
(oard N3SLQ41
Valid Slot Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-8 and 11-16 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-8 and 11-17 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-8 and 11-17 Slots 1-6 and 13-16
Inter+ace Type I-1.1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2, I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 75-ohm E4/STM-1 electrical interface -
Connect or LC
N1SLQ1, N2SLQ1, N1SLQ1A N1SL1, N2SL1, N1SL1A N1SEP1 (without the interface board) N1SEP1 (with the interface board)
LC
LC
SMB
Slots 2-5 and 13-16
Interfaces available on the 4 x STM-1 line processing board N1EU04 Interfaces available on the 8 x STM-1 line processing board N1OU08 Interfaces available on the 8 x STM-1 line processing board N2OU08 Interfaces available on the 8 x STM-1 line processing board N1EU08
N1EU04
Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33 and 35 Slots 19-26 and 29-36 Slots 19-26 and 29-36 Slots 19-26 and 29-36
Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel
75-ohm STM-1 electrical interface I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1 I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1 75-ohm STM-1 electrical interface
SMB
N1OU08 N2OU08 N1EU08
LC SC SMB
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
2-23
#*%*/*) PD! Processin (oards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the PDH processing boards.
Valid Slots
Table 2-24 lists the PDH processing boards and their valid slots in the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 2-25 lists the PDH interface boards and their valid slots in the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 2-24 PDH processing boards and their valid slots in the OptiX OSN 3500 (oard N1SPQ4, N2SPQ4 Valid Slot Slots 2-5 and 13-16 Inter+acin 2ode Interfaces available on the 4 x electrical interface board N1MU04 Interfaces available on the 3 x electrical interface switching board N1C34S Interfaces available on the front panel Inter+ace Type Connect or -
N1PL3, N2PL3
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 2-5, 13-16 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-8, 11-17
N1PL3A, N2PL3A (without the interface board) N1PD3, N2PD3
75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface
SMB
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 2-5, 13-16 Slots 2-5 and 13-16
Interfaces available on the 6 x electrical interface switching board N1D34S Interfaces available on the 6 x electrical interface switching board N1D34S Interfaces available on the 32 x electrical interface switching board N1D75S, N1D12S, or N1D12B Interfaces available on the 32-channel electrical interface switching board N1D12S and N1D12B
N2PQ3
N1PQ1(A /B), N2PQ1(A /B) N1PQM
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-5 and 13-16 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-5, 13-16
2-24
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
(oard N1DX1
Valid Slot Slots 1-5 and 13-16
Inter+acin 2ode Interfaces available on the N x 64 kbit/s interface board N1DM12 -
Inter+ace Type -
Connect or -
N1DXA
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-8 and 11-17
Table 2-25 PDH processing boards and their valid slots in the OptiX OSN 3500 (oard N1DM12 Valid Slot Slots 19-26 and 29-36 Inter+ace Type RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24, X.21, or Framed E1 interface 75-ohm E4/STM-1 electrical interface 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface Connector DB28, DB44
N1MU04 N1C34S
Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, and 35 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, and 35 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 19-26 and 29-36 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 19-26 and 29-36 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 19-26 and 29-36 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 19-26 and 29-36 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 19, 20, 35, and 36 slot 19, 35
SMB SMB
N1D34S
75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface
SMB
N1D75S
75-ohm E1 interface
DB44
N1D12S
120-ohm E1 interface
DB44
N1D12B
100-ohm T1 interface
DB44
N1TSB8
N1TSB4
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
2-25
#*%*/*4 5oS (oards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports EoS boards. Table 2-26 provides the valid slots and interfaces of the EoS boards on the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 2-27 provides the mapping interfaces boards of the EoS interface boards and their valid slots on the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 2-26 Valid slots and interfaces of the EoS boards (oard N1EAS2 Valid Slot Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 5-8 and 11-14 (10 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-4 and 15-16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 5-8 and 11-14 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-4 and 15-16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 5-8 and 11-14 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-4 and 15-17 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 5-8 and 11-14 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-4 and 15-16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 5-8 and 11-14 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-8 and 11-17 (2.5 Gbit/s) Inter+acin 2ode Interfaces available on the front panel Inter+ace Type 10GBASE-LW/ LR Connect or LC
N3EGS4
1000BASE-SX/ LX/ZX/VX
LC
N1EGS4
1000BASE-SX/ LX/ZX/VX 1000BASE-TX
LC RJ-45
N4EGS4
LC RJ-45
N2EGS2
1000BASE-SX/ LX/ZX/VX
LC
N3EGS2
1000BASE-SX/ LX/ZX/VX 1000BASE-T
LC RJ-45
2-26
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
(oard N1EGT2
Valid Slot Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-4 and 15-16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 5-8 and 11-14 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-8 and 11-17 (2.5 Gbit/s) Slots 1-6 and 13-16 (622 Mbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 2-5 and 13-16 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Inter+ace Type 1000BASE-SX/ LX/ZX/VX
Connect or LC
N2EGT2
LC RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45
N1EFT8 N1EFT8
Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet electrical interface board N1ETF8 Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board N1EFF8
10/100BASE-T X 10/100BASE-T X
100BASE-FX
LC
N1EFT8A N1EFS4
Slots 1-8 and 11-16 (622 Mbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-8 and 11-17 (622 Mbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-8 and 11-17 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel
10/100BASE-T X 10/100BASE-T X
RJ-45 RJ-45
N2EFS4, N3EFS4 (without the interface board) N1EFS0
10/100BASE-T X
RJ-45
Slots 2-5 and 13-16 (622 Mbit/s)
Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet electrical interface board N1ETF8 Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board, N1EFF8
10/100BASE-T X
RJ-45
100BASE-FX
LC
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
2-27
(oard N1EFS0A
Valid Slot Slots 2-5 and 13-16
Inter+acin 2ode Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet electrical interface board N1ETF8 Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board, N1EFF8
Inter+ace Type 10/100BASE-T X
Connect or RJ-45
100BASE-FX
LC
N2EFS0, N4EFS0
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 2-5 and 13-16 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet electrical interface board N1ETF8 Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board N1EFF8
10/100BASE-T X
RJ-45
100BASE-FX
LC
N5EFS0
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 2-5 and 13-16 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet electrical interface board N1ETF8A and N1ETF8 Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board N1EFF8A and N1EFF8
10/100BASE-T X
RJ-45
100BASE-FX
LC
Table 2-27 Valid slots and interfaces of the mapping interface boards of the EoS boards (oard N1EFF8, N1EFF8A N1ETF8, N1ETF8A N1ETS8 Valid Slot Slots 19-26 and 29-36 Slots 19-26 and 29-36 Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, and 35
2-28
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
#*%*/*6 AT2 (oards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports ATM boards. Table 2-28 provides the valid slots and interfaces of the ATM boards on the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 2-28 Valid slots and interfaces of the ATM boards (oard N1ADL4 Valid Slot Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-8 and 11-17 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-8 and 11-17 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-8 and 11-17 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-8 and 11-17 (1.25 Gbit/s) Inter+acin 2ode Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Inter+ace Type S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 Connector LC
N1IDL4
LC
N1ADQ1
LC
N1IDQ1
LC
#*%*/*%" RPR (oards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports RPR boards. Table 2-29 provides the valid slots and interfaces of the RPR boards on the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 2-30 provides the mapping interface boards of the RPR boards and their valid slots on the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 2-29 Valid slots and interfaces of the RPR boards (oard N2EMR0 Valid Slot Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 2-4, 15, and 16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 5, 13, and 14 (2.5 Gbit/s) Inter+acin 2ode Interfaces available on the 8x10/100M Ethernet electrical interface board N1ETF8 Inter+ace Type 10/100BAS E-TX Connector RJ-45
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
2-29
(oard
Valid Slot
Inter+acin 2ode Interfaces available on the 8x10/100M Ethernet optical interface board N1EFF8
Inter+ace Type 100BASE-F X
Connector LC
N2EMR0
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-4, 15, and 16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 5, 6, 13, and 14 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-4, 15, and 16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 5-8 and 11-14 (2.5 Gbit/s)
1000BASESX/LX/ZX
LC
N2EGR2
1000BASESX/LX/ZX
LC
Table 2-30 Mapping interface boards of the RPR boards and their valid slots (oard N1EFF8 N1ETF8 Valid Slot Slots 19-26 and 29-36 Slots 19-26 and 29-36
#*%*/*%% SAN (oards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports SAN boards. Table 2-31 provides the valid slots and interfaces of the SAN boards on the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 2-31 Valid slots and interfaces of the SAN boards (oard N1MST4 Valid Slot Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-4, 15, and 16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 5-8 and 11-14 (2.5 Gbit/s) Inter+acin 2ode Interfaces available on the front panel Inter+ace Type X3.296/(DVBASI) EN50083-9, 200-M5-SN-I, 200-SM-LC-I Connector LC
2-30
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
#*%*/*%# 9D2 (oards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports WDM boards. Table 2-32 lists the WDM boards, their valid slots and their interface for the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 2-32 WDM boards, their valid slots and their interface for the OptiX OSN 3500 (oard N1LWX Valid Slot Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-8, 11-17 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-8, 11-17 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-8, 11-17 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 19-26, 29-36 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-8, 11-17 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-8, 11-17 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-8, 11-17 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-8, 11-17 Inter+acin 2ode Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Connector LC
N1FIB
LSH/LC
N1MR2A
LC
N1MR2C
LC
TN11MR2
LC
TN11MR4
LC
TN11CMR2
LC
TN11CMR4
LC
#*%*/*%- 2icro,ave (oards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports Microwave boards. Table 2-33 list the microwave boards, their valid and their interface slots for the OptiX OSN 3500.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
2-31
Table 2-33 Microwave boards, their valid slots and their interface for the OptiX OSN 3500 (oard N1IFSD1 Valid Slot Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-8 and 11-17 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-8 and 11-17 Inter+acin 2ode Interfaces available on the front panel Connector IF
N1RPWR
Power supply interface
#*%*/*%/ 1ptical (ooster Ampli+ier (oards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports several optical amplifier boards. Table 2-34 lists the optical booster amplifier boards, their valid slots and their interface nfor the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 2-34 Optical booster amplifier boards, their valid slots and their interface for the OptiX OSN 3500 (oard N1BA2 Valid Slot Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-8, 11-17 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-8, 11-17 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-8, 11-17 Slots 101 and 102 Slots 101 and 102 Slot 103 Slot 104 Slot 105 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-8, 11-17 Inter+acin 2ode Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Connector LC
N1BPA, N2BPA N1DCU, N2DCU N1COA, 61COA 62COA ROP N1RPC01 N1RPC02 TN11OBU1
LC
LC
SC/PC LSH/SC LC LSH/APC, LC/PC LSH/APC, LC/PC LC
2-32
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
(oard
Valid Slot
Inter+acin 2ode
Connector
NOTE The slots of the N1COA, 61COA, 62COA, and ROP that are displayed on the NMS are logical slots rather than physical slots.
#*%*/*%0 1ther (oards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the power boards and auxiliary boards. Table 2-35 lists the mapping relation between the valid slots and connectors of the power boards and auxiliary boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 2-35 Mapping relation between the valid slots and connectors of the power boards and auxiliary boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 (oard N1AUX N1PIU, N1PIUA, N1PIUB N1FAN Valid Slot Slot 37 Slots 27-28 Slots 38-40 Connector SMB, RJ-45 Four-phase socket -
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the 110 V/220 V power supply through an uninterrupted power modules (UPM). The UPM is used to convert 110 V/220 V AC into -48/-60 V DC, and to provide power supply for the OptiX OSN 3500. A UPM consists of five power boxes and thus realizes the protected power supply. The output power of each UPM is 5 x 800 W. The dimensions of the power box are 436 mm (W) x 255 mm (D) x 130 mm (H).
#*# So+t,are Architecture

2.2.1 Overview The software system is of a modular design. Each module provides specific functions and works with other modules. 2.2.2 Communication Protocols Complete protocol stack and messages of Qx interface are described in ITU-T G.773, Q.811 and Q.812. 2.2.3 Board Software The board software runs on each board and it manages, monitors and controls the operation of the board. 2.2.4 NE Software
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
2-33
The NE software manages, monitors and controls the board operations in the NE. In addition, the NE software functions as a communication service unit between the T2000 and the boards, so that the T2000 can control and manage the NE. 2.2.5 Network Management System The NM system implements a unified management over the optical transmission network, and maintains all OSN, SDH, Metro, DWDM NE equipment in the network.
#*#*% 1vervie,
The software system is of a modular design. Each module provides specific functions and works with other modules. The entire software is distributed in three modules including board software, NE software and NM system. The software resides respectively on functional boards, the SCC, and NM computer. Hierarchical structure ensures that it is highly reliable and efficient. Each layer performs specific functions and provides service for the upper layer. The system software architecture is shown in Figure 2-7. In the diagram, all modules are NE software except "Network Management System" and "Board Software". Figure 2-7 Software architecture with the ASON feature
Network Management System
NE software High Level Communication Module Real-time multi-task operating system Network side Module Equipment Management Module Communication Module Database Management Module
Board Software
#*#*# Communication Protocols

Complete protocol stack and messages of Qx interface are described in ITU-T G.773, Q.811 and Q.812.
2-34
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Qx interface is mainly used to connect mediation device (MD), Q adaptation (QA) and NE (NE) equipment through local communication network (LCN). At present, QA is provided by NE management layer. MD and operating system (OS) are provided by NM layer. They are connected to each other through Qx interface. According to the Recommendations, Qx interface provided by the system is developed on the basis of TCP/IP connectionless network layer service (CLNS1) protocol stack. In addition, to support remote access of the NM through Modem, IP layer uses serial line internet protocol (SLIP).
#*#*- (oard So+t,are

The board software runs on each board and it manages, monitors and controls the operation of the board. It receives the command issued from the NE software and reports the board status to the NE software through performance events and alarm. The specific functions include: Alarm management Performance management Configuration management Communication management It directly controls the functional circuits in corresponding boards and implements ITU-T compliant specific functions of the NE.
#*#*/ N5 So+t,are
The NE software manages, monitors and controls the board operations in the NE. In addition, the NE software functions as a communication service unit between the T2000 and the boards, so that the T2000 can control and manage the NE. According to ITU-T M.3010, NE software is at unit management layer in telecom management network, performing NE function (NEF), partial mediation function (MF) and OS function at network unit layer. Data communication function (DCF) provides communication channel between NE and other equipment (including NM and other NEs). Real-time multi-task operating system The NE software offers real-time multi-task operating system to manage public resources and support application programs. It isolates the application programs from the processor and provides an application program execution environment, which is independent of the processor hardware. Communication module The communication module is the interface module between NE software and board software. According to related protocol, communication function between the NE software and the board software is for information exchange and maintenance of the equipment.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
2-35
Through the communication, board maintenance and operation commands from the NE software are sent to the boards. On the other hand, the state, alarm and performance events of the board are reported to the NE software. Network Side (NS) Module The NS module is between the communication module and the equipment management module. It converts the data format between the user operation side (at the application layer) and the NE equipment management layer, and provides security control for the NE layer. Functionally, the NS module is divided into the following three submodules:

Qx interface module Command line interface module Security management module
Equipment management module The equipment management module is the core of the NE software for the NE management. It includes administrator and agent. Administrator can send NM operation commands and receive events. Agent can respond to the NM operation commands sent by the administrator, implement the operations of the managed object, and send up events according to the change of status of the managed object. High-level communication module The high-level communication module exchanges management information among NEs and between the NM system and the NE. It consists of network communication module, serial communication module and ECC communication module. Database management module The database management module is a part of the NE software. It includes two independent parts: data and program. The data are organized in the form of database, including network database, alarm database, performance database and equipment database. The program manages and accesses the data in the database.
#*#*0 Net,or8 2ana ement System

The NM system implements a unified management over the optical transmission network, and maintains all OSN, SDH, Metro, DWDM NE equipment in the network. In compliance with ITU-T Recommendations, it is an NM system that integrates standard management information model as well as object-oriented management technology. It exchanges information with the NE software through the communication module to monitor and manage the network equipment. The NM software runs on a workstation or PC, managing the equipment and the transmission network to help to operate, maintain and manage the transmission equipment. The management functions of the NM software include: Alarm management: collects, prompts, filters, browses, acknowledges, checks, clears, and counts in real time; fulfills alarm insertion, alarm correlation analysis and fault diagnosis.
2-36
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Performance management: sets performance monitoring; browses, analyzes and prints performance data; forecasts medium-term and long-term performance; and resets performance register. Configuration management: configures and manages interfaces, clocks, services, trails, subnets and time. Security management: provides NM user management, NE user management, NE login management, NE login lockout, NE setting lockout and local craft terminal (LCT) access control of the equipment. Maintenance management: provides loopback, board resetting, automatic laser shutdown (ALS) and optical fiber power detection, and collects equipment data to help the maintenance personnel in troubleshooting. Querying service alarm: queries the current real alarms on the service path; determines the connectivity or degrade status of the service, according to the current alarm; analyzes the faulty node and locates the faulty board. Detecting the MS protection channel: detects the VC-4 channel alarms on the VC-4 channel that maps the MS protection channel.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
2-37
3 Functions and Features
3.1.1 Capacity 3.1.2 Services
.unctions and .eatures
-*% (asic .unctions on Pac8et 2ode

This topic describes the capacity, services, clock, and protection schemes of the OptiX OSN equipment in packet mode.
This topic describes the switching capacity and slot access capacity of the OptiX OSN equipment in packet mode.
This topic describes the service types, interfaces, and maximum access capacity of each service type supported by the OptiX OSN equipment in packet mode. 3.1.3 Clock Synchronization The OptiX OSN equipment supports multiple synchronization technologies: traditional clock synchronization, high precision time (IEEE 1588 V2) and clock synchronization, synchronous Ethernet and CES ACR. 3.1.4 Equipment Level Protection In packet mode, the equipment supports various equipment level protection schemes. 3.1.5 Network Level Protection The OptiX OSN equipment supports various network level protection schemes.
-*%*% Capacity
This topic describes the switching capacity and slot access capacity of the OptiX OSN equipment in packet mode. 3.1.1.1 Switching Capability The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the packet-based service switching by using the N1PSXCS/N2PSXCSA. 3.1.1.2 Slot Access Capacity In Packet Mode When the cross-connect board is N1PSXCS or N2PSXCSA, the access capacity of each slot on the OptiX OSN 3500 is different.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-1
-*%*%*% S,itchin Capability

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the packet-based service switching by using the N1PSXCS/N2PSXCSA. Table 3-1 provides the maximum switching capability of the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 3-1 Switching capability of the OptiX OSN 3500 (oard N1PSXCS N2PSXCSA 2a;imum S,itchin Capability 80 Gbit/s 160 Gbit/s Access Capacity o+ a Sin le Subrac8 60 Gbit/s 100 Gbit/s
-*%*%*# Slot Access Capacity In Pac8et 2ode

When the cross-connect board is N1PSXCS or N2PSXCSA, the access capacity of each slot on the OptiX OSN 3500 is different. When the N1PSXCS board is used to support packet services, one service processing board occupies two slots. In this case, the neighboring two slots function as one slot, as shown in Figure 3-1. Figure 3-1 Slot access capacity when the N1PSXCS board is used
FAN S L O T 1 S L O T 3 S L O T 5 S L O T 7 S L O T 9
FAN S L O T 1 0 S L O T 1 1 S L O T 1 3
FAN S L O T 1 5 S L O T 1 7 S L O T 1 8
N1PSXCS
N1PSXCS
7.5Gbit/s
10Gbit/s
10Gbit/s
10Gbit/s
10Gbit/s
5Gbit/s
7.5Gbit/s
GSCC
Cable routing
Figure 3-2shows the slot access capacity when the N2PSXCSA board is used to support packet services.
3-2
GSCC
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Figure 3-2 Slot access capacity when the N2PSXCSA board is used (single slots)
FAN
FAN
FAN
S L O T 9
S L O T 1 0 N2PSXCSA
S S S S S S S S L L L L L L L L O O O O O O O O T T T T T T T T 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2.5Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s
N2PSXCSA
2.5Gbit/s
10Gbit/s
20Gbit/s
20Gbit/s
10Gbit/s
5Gbit/s
5Gbit/s
5Gbit/s
5Gbit/s 5Gbit/s
5Gbit/s
GSCC
Cable routing
-*%*# Services
This topic describes the service types, interfaces, and maximum access capacity of each service type supported by the OptiX OSN equipment in packet mode. 3.1.2.1 Service Types OptiX OSN equipment supports Ethernet services and CES services. 3.1.2.2 Service Interfaces This topic provides the Ethernet and CES service interfaces supported by the OptiX OSN equipment in packet mode. 3.1.2.3 Service Access Capacity The capacity of services that the OptiX OSN equipment can access vary according to the type and quantity of the configured boards.
-*%*#*% Service Types

OptiX OSN equipment supports Ethernet services and CES services. Types of Ethernet services: E-Line service E-LAN service E-Aggr service Types of CES services: E1 CES service Channelized STM-1 service
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
GSCC
3-3
-*%*#*# Service Inter+aces

This topic provides the Ethernet and CES service interfaces supported by the OptiX OSN equipment in packet mode. Table 3-2 lists the Ethernet service interfaces on the OptiX OSN equipment. Table 3-2 Ethernet service interfaces on the OptiX OSN equipment Type o+ Inter+ace FE electrical interface FE optical interface GE electrical interface GE optical interface 10GE optical interface Description 10/100BASE-TX 100BASE-FX 1000BASE-TX 1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX, 1000BASE-ZX, 1000BASE-VX 10GBase-SR, 10GBase-SW, 10GBase-LR, 10GBase-LW, 10GBase-ER, 10GBase-EW, 10GBase-ZR, 10GBase-ZW
Table 3-3 lists the CES service interfaces on the OptiX OSN equipment. Table 3-3 CES service interfaces on the OptiX OSN equipment Type o+ Inter+ace E1 CES interface Channelized STM-1 interface Description 75/120-ohm E1 electrical interface: DB44 connector STM-1 optical interfaces: S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2
-*%*#*- Service Access Capacity

The capacity of services that the OptiX OSN equipment can access vary according to the type and quantity of the configured boards. Table 3-4 lists the maximum capacity of different services that the OptiX OSN equipment can access. The maximum capacity refers to the maximum number of services when a single subrack accesses only this specific type of service. Table 3-4 Service access capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500 (in packet mode) Service Type Fast Ethernet (FE electrical interface) services Fast Ethernet (FE optical interface) services Gigabit Ethernet (GE optical interface) services 2a;imum Number o+ Services Supported (y a Sin le Subrac8 128 128 80
3-4
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Service Type 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10GE optical interface) services CES (E1) services CES (channelized STM-1) services
2a;imum Number o+ Services Supported (y a Sin le Subrac8 28 504 64
-*%*- Cloc8 Synchroni<ation

The OptiX OSN equipment supports multiple synchronization technologies: traditional clock synchronization, high precision time (IEEE 1588 V2) and clock synchronization, synchronous Ethernet and CES ACR. 3.1.3.1 Traditional Clock Synchronization The OptiX OSN equipment provides multiple traditional clock functions. 3.1.3.2 IEEE 1588 V2 Time and Clock Synchronization To meet the requirement of synchronization between equipment, the OptiX OSN equipment adopts the high precision time and clock synchronization technologies. 3.1.3.3 Synchronous Ethernet The Ethernet physical layer frequency synchronization technology that is realized by using data boards on the OptiX OSN equipment is called the synchronous Ethernet. 3.1.3.4 CES ACR The OptiX OSN equipment supports CES ACR, which helps achieve clock synchronization of the transmitter and receiver of a CES service on the PSN.
-*%*-*% Traditional Cloc8 Synchroni<ation

The OptiX OSN equipment provides multiple traditional clock functions. SSM clock protocol Tributary retiming Two 75-ohm/120-ohm external clock output and input External clock output shutdown Line clock source Tributary clock source Three working modes are as follows:

Tracing mode Holdover mode Free-run mode
For details on the traditional clock synchronization, see SDH Clock Synchronization of the Feature Description.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-5
-*%*-*# I555 %044 V# Time and Cloc8 Synchroni<ation

To meet the requirement of synchronization between equipment, the OptiX OSN equipment adopts the high precision time and clock synchronization technologies.
!i h Precision Time
The high precision time is achieved based on the frequency synchronization. Only in packet modes, the equipment can support the high precision time function. In packet modes, with IEEE 1588 V2, the OptiX OSN equipment supports the access and transit of high precision time. When the OptiX OSN 3500 is used to access high precision time signals, the Ethernet data board accesses the external high precision time signals. Then, working with the SCC board (N4GSCC/N6GSCC) and cross-connect board (N1PSXCS/N2PSXCSA), the Ethernet line board transfers the accessed external time signals downward layer by layer through the packet network. Finally, the time signals arrive at the equipment that requires the precise time, such as 3G base station equipment. When the OptiX OSN 3500 is used to transfer high precision time signals only, the Ethernet line board on the local NE needs to access the high precision time signals from another OptiX OSN equipment. Then, working with the SCC board (N4GSCC/N6GSCC) and cross-connect board (N1PSXCS/N2PSXCSA), the Ethernet line board transfers the time signals to the downstream. Finally, the time signals arrive at the equipment that requires the precise time, such as 3G base station equipment. In packet mode, the boards that support the high precision time function are as follows: Cross-connect board: N1PSXCS and N2PSXCSA Packet processing board: N1PEG8, N1PEX2 and N2PEX1 Packet interface board: N1PETF8 and N1PEFF8 SCC board: N4GSCC and N6GSCC
The interface board, N1PETF8 supports the high precision time function only when working with the N1PEG8. The interface board, N1PEFF8 supports the high precision time function only when working with the N1PEG8.
For details on the high precision time, see IEEE 1588 V2 Time Synchronization and Clock Synchronization in the Feature Description.
!i h Precision Cloc8
The high precision clock synchronization technology is a frequency synchronization technology. The traditional frequency synchronization technology extracts clock signals from the port of the line board, compares the clock signals, and chooses the best frequency information that is sent to the downstream node; however, the high precision clock technology uses the time stamp function to record several key time points, chooses the best frequency signal through the internal algorithm, and sends the best frequency signal to the downstream node. In packet mode, the equipment can support the time and frequency synchronization functions at the same time. The equipment cannot support the traditional clock synchronization
3-6
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
technology when it supports the high precision clock synchronization technology in packet mode. The boards that support the high precision clock synchronization technology are as follows: Cross-connect board: N1PSXCS and N2PSXCSA Packet processing board: N1PEG8, N1PEX2 and N2PEX1 Packet interface board: N1PETF8 and N1PEFF8 SCC board: N4GSCC and N6GSCC
-*%*-*- Synchronous 5thernet

The Ethernet physical layer frequency synchronization technology that is realized by using data boards on the OptiX OSN equipment is called the synchronous Ethernet. The synchronous Ethernet technology forwards the clock signal at the Ethernet physical layer. At the receive end, the equipment extracts the best clock signals from the physical layer and uses it for the local frequency synchronization. At the same time, the best clock signals are distributed through the physical layer and accessed to every set of equipment on the entire Ethernet.
In the synchronous Ethernet clock path, the frequency synchronization of the synchronous Ethernet is performed only when all the NEs in the path house the data boards that support the synchronous Ethernet function and the synchronous Ethernet function of these data boards is enabled on the NMS. At the receive end, the equipment chooses the best frequency signals through the cross-connect board and distributes these signals to the entire Ethernet. For details on the synchronous Ethernet, see the Feature Description.
-*%*-*/ C5S ACR

The OptiX OSN equipment supports CES ACR, which helps achieve clock synchronization of the transmitter and receiver of a CES service on the PSN. In the packet mode, traditional TDM services need to be accessed and transported in the same way. An operator can transparently transport TDM E1 services over a packet switching network by using the CES circuit emulation technology. TDM E1 services and channelized STM-1 services are mainly voice services and require synchronization of the transmit end and receive end. If the clocks at both ends of the bearer network are inconsistent, slide codes may occur in a long term, BER may rise sharply, and the services may be interrupted. When CES ACR is applied on an asynchronous network, CES service packets can carry clock information and the sink equipment can recover the clock to maintain clock synchronization between the source equipment and sink equipment. As shown in Figure 3-3, a TDM voice service is transmitted between BSC and BTS through an asynchronous network. To ensure the quality of the voice service, BTS and BSC must maintain synchronization.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-7
Figure 3-3 CES ACR application scenario

PRC / GPS Recover the clock from service packets.
Extract the clock from a TDM interface.
Asynchronous network Slave BTS Master BSC
Transmission direction of the CES ACR clock
BSC accesses the reference clock PRC/GPS. The master equipment extracts the clock information from the E1 service port. On the asynchronous network, CES service packets are transparently transmitted. When receiving the CES service packets, the slave equipment recovers the service and also recovers the clock in time stamp mode. Then, the slave equipment transfers the recovered TDM clock to BTS. In this manner, BTS and BSC maintain synchronization. The OptiX OSN equipment does not support ACR clock protection.
-*%*/ 5=uipment >evel Protection

In packet mode, the equipment supports various equipment level protection schemes. Table 3-5 lists the equipment level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 3-5 Equipment level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 Service Type Ethernet (in packet mode) Protection Scheme LAG MC-LAG
3.1.4.1 LAG Protection In packet mode, packet boards provides 1+1 protection through LAGs. 3.1.4.2 MC-LAG Protection On a Layer 2 network, the MC-LAG technology helps to provide RNC dual-homing. 3.1.4.3 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect and Timing Units With the 1+1 protection for the cross-connect and timing units, the equipment can run in a safe manner. 3.1.4.4 1+1 Hot Backup for the SCC Unit
With the 1+1 protection for the SCC unit, the equipment can run in a secure manner. 3.1.4.5 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit The equipment supports 1+1 backup for the PIU. 3.1.4.6 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power Supply The equipment supports 1:N protection for the +3.3 V board power supply. With this protection, the board can be supplied with power in a reliable manner. 3.1.4.7 Intelligent Fans Intelligent fans can automatically adjust the rotating speed according to the temperature of the equipment. 3.1.4.8 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions The protection schemes under abnormal conditions include undervoltage protection and overvoltage protection.
-*%*/*% >AG Protection

In packet mode, packet boards provides 1+1 protection through LAGs. Table 3-6 lists the parameters of the LAG protection. Table 3-6 Parameters for 1+1 LAG protection of Ethernet boards (in packet mode) Parameter Switching condition (any of the conditions triggers the switching) >AG The links of the interconnected equipment are directly connected to each other through the static LAG or manual LAG, no intermediate equipment exists, and the fiber is cut in both directions. Switching time is equal to or less than 500 ms. The links of the interconnected equipment are directly connected to each other through the static LAG or manual LAG, no intermediate equipment exists, and the fiber is cut in one direction. In addition, the ports of the interconnected equipment are set to the auto-negotiation mode. Switching time is equal to or less than 500 ms. The links of the interconnected equipment are directly connected to each other through the static LAG, no intermediate equipment exists, and the fiber is cut in both directions. Switching time is equal to or less than 3.5 s. Revertive mode Revertive (default) Non-revertive Load sharing mode Load sharing Load non-sharing
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-9
Parameter
>AG
NOTE If a LAG is manually aggregated and the ports work in full-duplex mode, successful switching cannot be ensured for a fiber cut in one direction. In the other cases, the switching can be performed successfully within a period of 3 to 6 seconds. The system provides intra-board port LAG protection and inter-board LAG protection, which comply with IEEE 802.3ad. The applicable ports include FE and GE ports.
In packet mode, LAG can realize intra-board link aggregation and inter-board link aggregation.
-*%*/*# 2C&>AG Protection

On a Layer 2 network, the MC-LAG technology helps to provide RNC dual-homing. As shown in Figure 3-4, the FE service coming from the base station is first accessed to the Layer 2 network through the access node and then transmitted to the RNC. MC-LAG provides protection for the networking as follows: The RNC is connected to the two sets of the OptiX OSN equipment at the convergence layer. In this manner, reliable transmission of large-capacity 3G services from mobile base stations to the RNC/BSC is guaranteed. Figure 3-4 Networking diagram of RNC dual-homing adopting the MC-LAG technology
MC-LAG RNC FE NodeB L2 networking Packet ring
Table 3-7 lists the MC-LAG parameters.
3-10
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Table 3-7 MC-LAG parameters S,it chin Type Revert ive 2ode S,it chin Prot ocol S,itchi n 2ode S,itc hin Durat ion S,itchin !old&1++ Time De+ault 9TR Time S,itchin Condition $Any o+ the .ollo,in Conditions Tri ers the S,itchin ' Network side: dServer dLOCV dTTSI_Mis match dTTSI_Mis merge dExcess User side: ETH_LOS LINK_DO WN
1+1 1:1
Reverti ve Non-re vertive
LAC P proto col
Lockout of protectio n Forced switching Automati c switching Manual switching
Net work side: 50 ms User side: 3s
0s to 10s
1 minute to 12 minutes
MC-LAG complies with the following standards and protocols: IEEE 802.3ad Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications
-*%*/*- %?% !ot (ac8up +or the Cross&Connect and Timin Units
With the 1+1 protection for the cross-connect and timing units, the equipment can run in a safe manner. For the OptiX OSN equipment, the cross-connect and timing units are integrated in the cross-connect and timing board. The cross-connect and timing board adopts a 1+1 hot backup mechanism so that the cross-connect and timing units are protected. Table 3-8 lists the 1+1 hot backup parameters of the cross-connect and timing units. Table 3-8 1+1 hot backup parameters of the cross-connect and timing units Parameter Slots for working and protection boards Switching condition Description Slot 9 and slot 10 Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: The working board is offline. The working board is cold reset. The hardware of the working board fails. A switching command is issued.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-11
Parameter Revertive mode
Description Non-revertive After successful switching, the original protection board becomes the working board. After the original working board is recovered, the current working board continues to be the original protection board.
-*%*/*/ %?% !ot (ac8up +or the SCC Unit

With the 1+1 protection for the SCC unit, the equipment can run in a secure manner. For the OptiX OSN 3500, the GSCC board provides the system control and communication (SCC) functions. The active and standby GSCC boards form a 1+1 hot backup mechanism. When the active GSCC is working, the standby GSCC is in the protection state. Table 3-9 lists the 1+1 hot backup parameters of the SCC unit. Table 3-9 1+1 hot backup parameters of the SCC unit Parameter Slots for working and protection boards Switching condition Description Sot 18 and slot 17 Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: The working board is offline. The working board is under a hot reset. The working board is under a cold reset. The hardware of the working board fails. A switching command is issued. Revertive mode Non-revertive. After successful switching, the original protection board becomes the working board, and the original working board becomes the protection board.
-*%*/*0 %?% !ot (ac8up +or the Po,er Inter+ace Unit

The equipment supports 1+1 backup for the PIU. The OptiX OSN 3500 can access two -48/-60 V DC power supplies by using two N1PIU, N1PIUA, N1PIUB boards. These two power supplies provide a mutual backup for each other. When either of them fails, the other power supply provides a backup to ensure normal operation of the equipment. If the voltage of the two external power supplies of the equipment is the same, the two PIU boards of mutual backup separately share half of the current. If the voltage offset value of the two external power supplies of the equipment is more than 0.7 V, all the current pass the PIU board of the external power supply that has high voltage,
3-12
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
and no current pass the PIU board of the external power supply that has low voltage. When only one PIU board is working, the power supply of the subrack is not affected.
If different boards are configured, the total power consumption and current of the equipment are different, and the current value of the PIU boards is also different. The current values of the PIU boards are computed according to the actual configuration.
-*%*/*3 %@N Protection +or the ?-*- V (oard Po,er Supply

The equipment supports 1:N protection for the +3.3 V board power supply. With this protection, the board can be supplied with power in a reliable manner. The OptiX OSN 3500 provides reliable power backup for the +3.3 V power supply of other boards, including the SCC and service boards by using the power backup unit on the N1AUX board. When the power supply of a board fails, the backup power supply immediately provides backup to ensure the normal operation of the board.
-*%*/*) Intelli ent .ans

Intelligent fans can automatically adjust the rotating speed according to the temperature of the equipment. The OptiX OSN 3500 uses three intelligent fan modules to realize heat dissipation. The power supplies of the three fan modules are of mutual backup. The intelligent fans provide the functions of intelligent speed regulation and failure detection. When one fan module becomes faulty, the other fan modules operate at the full speed. The running status of the fans is indicated by the corresponding indicators on the front panel of the fan module.
-*%*/*4 (oard Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions

The protection schemes under abnormal conditions include undervoltage protection and overvoltage protection.
Po,er&Do,n Protection Durin So+t,are >oadin

The verification function is provided for applications and data. After software loading is interrupted, the basic input/output system (BIOS) does not boot any applications or data that are not successfully or completely loaded. Instead, the BIOS waits for the loading to be resumed, until the software is successfully and completely loaded.
1vervolta e or Undervolta e Protection +or Po,er Supply

The power board provides a lightning protection component to effectively avoid the damage that may be caused by transient high voltages such as lightning. When a board is in undervoltage, the board automatically resets its CPU so that the software can re-initialize the chip. When a board is in undervoltage, the power system also automatically turns off the power supply on the main loop so that the system is protected.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-13
(oard Temperature Detection

Temperature detection circuits are built in boards (for example, the cross-connect and timing board) that generates a large amount of heat. When the board detects a high temperature, an alarm is generated to prompt the maintenance personnel about cleaning the fans.
-*%*0 Net,or8 >evel Protection

The OptiX OSN equipment supports various network level protection schemes. Table 3-10 lists the network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN equipment. Table 3-10 Network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 Net,or8 >evel Packet mode Protection Scheme MPLS Tunnel APS PW APS Packet-based linear MSP LPT
3.1.5.1 MPLS Tunnel APS Protection The equipment supports the MPLS Tunnel APS protection only in packet mode. In the MPLS Tunnel APS protection, the protection path protects the service that is transported in the working path. When the working path is faulty, the service is switched to the protection path. The 1+1 protection adopts the dual fed and selective receiving mechanism, and the 1:1 protection adopts the single fed and single receiving mechanism. 3.1.5.2 PW APS Protection PW APS is a type of network-level protection scheme. To be specific, when the working PW fails, the protection PW protects services in the failed working PW. PW APS is available in two types: PW APS 1+1 and PW APS 1:1. 3.1.5.3 Packet-Based Linear MSP The OptiX OSN equipment supports the CES function and therefore can directly transmit E1 services on the packet ring. 3.1.5.4 LPT LPT can detect the faults that occur at the service access node or on the intermediate transmission network, and then can instruct the equipment at both ends of the transmission network to start the backup network immediately for communication. In this manner, LPT ensures normal transmission of the important data.
-*%*0*% 2P>S Tunnel APS Protection

The equipment supports the MPLS Tunnel APS protection only in packet mode. In the MPLS Tunnel APS protection, the protection path protects the service that is transported in the working path. When the working path is faulty, the service is switched to the protection path.
3-14
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
The 1+1 protection adopts the dual fed and selective receiving mechanism, and the 1:1 protection adopts the single fed and single receiving mechanism. The APS protocol in MPLS Tunnel APS protection is transmitted on the protection path. The equipment at the two ends transmits the protocol state and switching state to each other. In addition, the equipment at the two ends switches the services according to the protocol state and switching state.
2P>S Tunnel APS %?% Protection

Figure 3-5 shows the MPLS Tunnel APS 1+1 protection supported by the equipment. Figure 3-5 MPLS Tunnel APS 1+1 protection
Service detection point Working path
Ethernet board
Service detection point
Subnetwork
Ethernet board
Access
Switching
Switching
Access
Ethernet board
Ethernet board
Subnetwork Protection/Protocol path
The MPLS Tunnel APS 1+1 protection adopts the dual fed and selective receiving mechanism for services. When the working path is faulty, the receive end selects the service from the protection path. In this way, the service switching is realized. Detection method:
Physical layer check: At the physical layer, the loss of signal is detected in microseconds. Link layer check: The link layer check is performed to check the MPLS OAM. The system provides seven check intervals, that is, 3.33ms, 10 ms, 100 ms, 1s, 10s, 1 m, and 10 m. If the MPLS OAM check interval is 3.33 ms, it ensures that the automatic MPLS switching time is less than 50 ms.
Switching process: The receive end selects the service channel according to the link status.
2P>S Tunnel APS %@% Protection

Figure 3-6 shows the MPLS Tunnel APS protection supported by the equipment.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-15
Figure 3-6 MPLS Tunnel APS 1:1 protection

Service detection point Working path Ethernet board Access Switching Subnetwork Ethernet board Switching Access Service detection point
Ethernet board Subnetwork
Ethernet board Protection/Protocol path
In the MPLS Tunnel APS 1:1 protection, the accessed service is transported in the working path. When the working path is faulty, the service is switched to the protection path. The single fed and single receiving mechanism is used for the service. The APS protocol information is transported through the protection path. The equipment at the two ends exchanges the protocol state information and the switching state information. According to the protocol state and switching state, the equipment at the two ends performs the service switching. Detection method:
Physical layer check: At the physical layer, the loss of signal is detected in microseconds. Link layer check: The link layer check is performed through the MPLS OAM. If the MPLS OAM check time is 3.3 ms, it ensures that the MPLS automatic switching time is less than 50 ms.
Switching process: After a negotiation using the APS protocol, the transmit end switches the service to the protection path, and the receive end selects the service from the protection path.
Protection Parameters
Table 3-11 lists the parameters of the MPLS Tunnel APS protection.
3-16
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Table 3-11 MPLS Tunnel APS protection parameters S,it chin Type 1+1 single -ende d switc hing Non-re vertive Revert ive 2ode S,it chin Prot ocol APS Locked switching Forced switching Manual switching Exercise switching 1+1 dualended switc hing Non-re vertive APS Locked switching Forced switching Manual switching Exercise switching 1+1 single -ende d switc hing Reverti ve APS Locked switching Forced switching Manual switching Exercise switching 1+1 dualended switc hing Reverti ve APS Locked switching Forced switching Manual switching Exercise switching 50 ms 0 to 100ms (0 by default) 300s 50 ms 0 to 100ms (0 by default) 300s 50 ms 0 to 100ms (0 by default) 50 ms 0 to 100ms (0 by default) S,itchi n 2ode S,itc hin Time S,itchin Delay Time De+ault 9TR Time Any o+ the +ollo,in conditions tri ers the s,itchin @ The board has a hardware or software failure. The board is in a cold reset. A switching command is manually issued. Tunnel faulty is detected by MPLS OAM.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-17
S,it chin Type 1:1 dualended switc hing
Revert ive 2ode
S,it chin Prot ocol
S,itchi n 2ode
S,itc hin Time
S,itchin Delay Time
De+ault 9TR Time
Any o+ the +ollo,in conditions tri ers the s,itchin @
Non-re vertive
APS
Locked switching Forced switching Manual switching Exercise switching
50 ms
0 to 100ms (0 by default)
1:1 dualended switc hing
Reverti ve
APS
Locked switching Forced switching Manual switching Exercise switching
50 ms
300s
The MPLS protection complies with ITU-T G.8031 and ITU-T Y.1720.
-*%*0*# P9 APS Protection

PW APS is a type of network-level protection scheme. To be specific, when the working PW fails, the protection PW protects services in the failed working PW. PW APS is available in two types: PW APS 1+1 and PW APS 1:1.
P9 APS %?% Protection

Generally, services are transmitted to the working PW and protection PW at the source end and are received from the working PW at the sink end. When the working PW is faulty, services are received from the protection PW. Figure 3-7 shows the typical networking of PW APS 1+1 protection.
3-18
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Figure 3-7 Typical networking of PW APS 1+1 protection

Service detection point NE1 Data board Accessing services at base stations Working channel Service detection point NE2 Data board Conver gence
Subnet
Accessing
Switching
Switching
Data board Subnet Protection channel/ protocol channel
Data board
P9 APS %@% Protection

Generally, services are transmitted to the working PW at the source end and are received from the working PW at the sink end. When the working PW is faulty, services are transmitted to the protection PW at the source end and are received form the protection PW at the sink end. Figure 3-8 shows the typical networking of PW APS 1:1 protection. Figure 3-8 Typical networking of PW APS 1:1 protection
Service detection point NE1 Data board Assessing services at base stations Working channel Service detection point NE2 Data board
Subnet
Accessing
Switching
Switching
Converging
Data board Subnet Protection channel/ protocol channel
Data board
Table 3-12 provides the parameters of PW APS.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-19
Table 3-12 Parameters of PW APS S,it chin Type Revert ive 2ode S,it chin Prot ocol S,itchi n 2ode S,itc hin Durat ion S,itchin !old&1++ Time 9TR Time S,itchin Condition $Any o+ the .ollo,in Conditions Tri ers the S,itchin ' The board has a hardware or software failure. A cold reset occurs on the board. A switching command is manually issued. The PW OAM mechanism detects a PW failure.
1+1 1:1
Reverti ve Non-re vertive
APS proto col
Locked switching Forced switching Automati c switching Manual switching Exercise switching
50 ms
0s to 10s
1 minute to 12 minutes
The PW APS complies with the following standards and protocols: ITU-T Recommendation Y.1720 Protection switching for MPLS networks ITU-T Recommendation G.8131 Protection switching for transport MPLS (T-MPLS) networks For details on PW APS, see PW APS in the Feature Description.
-*%*0*- Pac8et&(ased >inear 2SP

The OptiX OSN equipment supports the CES function and therefore can directly transmit E1 services on the packet ring. Packet-based linear MSP protects SDH links between adjacent nodes. The linear MSP scheme uses the K1 and K2 bytes in the MSOH to transfer switching requests and thus to implement automatic protection switching. Table 3-13 provides the parameters of linear MSP supported by CES boards.
3-20
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Table 3-13 Parameters of linear MSP supported by CES boards Protecti on Type Revertive 2ode S,itchi n Protocol S,itchin Duration 9TR Time S,itchin Condition $Any o+ the Conditions Tri ers the S,itchin ' R_LOS R_LOF MS_AIS Revertive Not required 500 ms 600s B2_EXC B2_SD (optional) Forced switching Manual switching Non-reverti ve APS protocol 500 ms Exercise switching
1+1 single-en ded switching 1+1 single-en ded switching 1+1 dual-end ed switching 1+1 dual-end ed switching 1:1 dual-end ed switching
Non-reverti ve
Not required
500 ms
Revertive
APS protocol
500 ms
600s
Revertive
APS protocol
500 ms
600s
-*%*0*/ >PT
LPT can detect the faults that occur at the service access node or on the intermediate transmission network, and then can instruct the equipment at both ends of the transmission network to start the backup network immediately for communication. In this manner, LPT ensures normal transmission of the important data. In actual engineering application, data of users is accessed to the service network through the access equipment so that the users can exchange their data. Based on the networking mode, LPT can be classified into point-to-point LPT and point-to-multipoint LPT. For details on the LPT feature, see LPT in the Feature Description.
Point&to&Point >PT
Figure 3-9 shows the engineering application of point-to-point LPT. When the access link 1 becomes faulty, LPT helps to notify the opposite equipment RS-B of the fault information. In this process, the link state is passed through. After disconnecting the link between NE2 and RS-B, RS-B starts the backup network and sets up a new connection with RS-A.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-21
Figure 3-9 Point-to-point LPT
Backup Network
Service Network
RS - A
Access Node Link 1
NE1 NE2
RS - B
Access Node Link 2
Table 3-14 provides the parameters of point-to-point LPT. Table 3-14 Parameters of point-to-point LPT S,itchin Per+ormance 3s Instance 16 S,itchin Condition LinkDown ETH_LOS 500 ms 16 Network side: dServer dLOCV dTTSI_Mismatch dTTSI_Mismerge dExcess User side: ETH_LOS LINK_DOWN None S,itchin 2ode None
Point&to&2ultipoint >PT
Figure 3-10 shows the engineering application of point-to-multipoint LPT. When the link between RS-A and NE1 becomes faulty, LPT helps to notify the opposite equipment (NE2, NE3, and NE4) of the fault information. In this process, the link state is passed through. After disconnecting the links between NE2, NE3, NE4, and RS-B, RS-B starts the backup network and sets up a new connection with RS-A. Two modes are available for NE1: strict mode and non-strict mode. When LPT is set to the strict mode, the services on the working network are switched to the backup network if the
3-22
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
links between NE1 and NE2, NE1 and NE3, NE1 and NE4 are all faulty. When LPT is set to the non-strict mode, the services on the working network are switched to the backup network if the links between NE1 and NE2, or NE1 and NE3, or NE1 and NE4 is faulty, and the services on the working network are switched to the backup network immediately. Figure 3-10 Point-to-multipoint LPT
Backup network
NE2
Service network
RS - A
Access link 1 NE1
NE3
RS - B
Access link 2
NE4
Table 3-15 provides the parameters of point-to-multipoint LPT. Table 3-15 Parameters of point-to-multipoint LPT S,itchin Per+ormance 3s Instance 16 S,itchin Condition LinkDown ETH_LOS 500 ms 16 Network side: dServer dLOCV dTTSI_Mismatch dTTSI_Mismerge dExcess User side: ETH_LOS LINK_DOWN S,itchin 2ode Strict mode Non-strict mode Strict mode Non-strict mode
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-23
-*# (asic .unctions on TD2 2ode

The equipment has many functions and features. 3.2.1 Capacity The capacity covers the cross-connect capacity and slot access capacity. 3.2.2 Service The supported services are SDH services, PDH services and many other services. 3.2.3 Clock Synchronization In TDM mode, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports only the traditional clock synchronization technology. 3.2.4 Equipment Level Protection The OptiX OSN 3500 provides several equipment level protection schemes. 3.2.5 Network Level Protection The OptiX OSN equipment supports several network level protection schemes.
-*#*% Capacity
The capacity covers the cross-connect capacity and slot access capacity. 3.2.1.1 TDM Cross-Connect Capacity Different cross-connect boards have different cross-connect capacities. 3.2.1.2 Slot Access Capacity in TDM Mode This topic describes the slots supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 when the cross-connect board is N1PSXCS or N2PSXCSA.
-*#*%*% TD2 Cross&Connect Capacity

Different cross-connect boards have different cross-connect capacities. The OptiX OSN 3500 uses the following cross-connect boards: N1PSXCS, which is a dual-mode cross-connect and synchronous timing board N2PSXCSA, which is a dual-mode cross-connect and synchronous timing board Table 3-16 provides the cross-connect capacities of the OptiX OSN 3500.
3-24
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Table 3-16 Cross-connect capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500 (oard !i her 1rder Cross&Connec t Capacity 200 Gbit/s (1280x1280 VC-4) >o,er 1rder Cross&Connect Capacity 20 Gbit/s (128x128 VC-4s, which are equivalent to 384x384 VC-3s or 8064x8064 VC-12s) 20 Gbit/s (128x128 VC-4s, which are equivalent to 384x384 VC-3s or 8064x8064 VC-12s) Access Capacity o+ a Sin le Subrac8 155 Gbit/s (992x992 VC-4) Remar8s
N1PSXCS
N2PSXCS A
200 Gbit/s (1280x1280 VC-4)
155 Gbit/s (992x992 VC-4)
If a label that contains "Enhanced Subrack" is affixed to the equipment, it indicates that the subrack uses the new backplane.
-*#*%*# Slot Access Capacity in TD2 2ode

This topic describes the slots supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 when the cross-connect board is N1PSXCS or N2PSXCSA. When the cross-connect board is N1PSXCS, as shown in Figure 3-11. When the cross-connect board is N2PSXCSA, as shown in Figure 3-12. Figure 3-11 Access capacity of each slot when the N1PSXCS board is used
FAN S S S S L L L L O O O O T T T T 1 2 3 4 S S S S L L L L O O O O T T T T 5 6 7 8 S L O T 9
FAN S L O T 1 0
FAN S S S S S S S S L L L L L L L L O O O O O O O O T T T T T T T T 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5Gbit/s or GSCC
N1PSXCS
N1PSXCS
20Gbit/s
20Gbit/s
10Gbit/s
20Gbit/s
10Gbit/s
10Gbit/s
20Gbit/s
10Gbit/s 5Gbit/s
5Gbit/s
5Gbit/s
5Gbit/s
5Gbit/s
5Gbit/s
Cable routing
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
GSCC
3-25
Figure 3-12 Access capacity of slots when the N2PSXCSA is used
FAN
FAN
FAN
S L O T 9
S L O T 1 0 N2PSXCSA
S S S S S S S S L L L L L L L L O O O O O O O O T T T T T T T T 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 GSCC or 5Gbit/s
N2PSXCSA
10Gbit/s
10Gbit/s
20Gbit/s
20Gbit/s
20Gbit/s
20Gbit/s
10Gbit/s 10Gbit/s
5Gbit/s
5Gbit/s
5Gbit/s
5Gbit/s
5Gbit/s
5Gbit/s
Cable routing
-*#*# Service
The supported services are SDH services, PDH services and many other services. 3.2.2.1 Service Types The OptiX OSN 3500 can process following types of services: SDH, PDH, Ethernet, RPR, ATM, DDN, and SAN services. 3.2.2.2 Service Interfaces Service interfaces include SDH service interfaces, PDH service interfaces and many other service interfaces. 3.2.2.3 Service Access Capacity The capacity of services that the OptiX OSN 3500 can access varies according to the type and quantity of the configured boards.
-*#*#*% Service Types

The OptiX OSN 3500 can process following types of services: SDH, PDH, Ethernet, RPR, ATM, DDN, and SAN services. For details about supported service types, refer to Table 3-17.
3-26
GSCC
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Table 3-17 Service type supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 Service Type SDH services Description Standard SDH services: STM-1/STM-4/STM-16/STM-64 Standard SDH concatenated services: VC-4-4c/VC-4-16c/VC-4-64c Standard SDH virtual concatenation services: VC-4-Xv (X8), VC-3-Xv (X24) SDH services with FEC: 10.709 Gbit/s, 2.666 Gbit/s PDH services E1/T1 service E3/T3 service E4 service
NOTE With the E13/M13 function, the equipment can perform multiplexing and demultiplexing between E1/T1 signals and E3/T3 signals.
Ethernet services
Ethernet private line (EPL) service Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) service Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) service Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN) service
RPR services
EVPL service EVPLAN service
ATM services
Constant bit rate (CBR) service Real-time variable bite rate (rt-VBR) service Non real-time variable bite rate (nrt-VBR) service Unspecified bit rate (UBR) service
DDN services
N x 64 kbit/s (N=1-31) service Framed E1 service
SAN services
Fiber channel (FC) service Fiber connection (FICON) service Enterprise systems connection (ESCON) service Digital video broadcast-asynchronous serial interface (DVB-ASI) service
-*#*#*# Service Inter+aces

Service interfaces include SDH service interfaces, PDH service interfaces and many other service interfaces. Table 3-18 lists the service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-27
Table 3-18 Service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 Inter+ace SDH service interface Description STM-1 electrical interfaces: SMB connectors STM-1 optical interfaces: I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 STM-4 optical interfaces: I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 STM-16 optical interfaces: I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je STM-16 optical interfaces (FEC): Ue-16.2.2c, Ue-16.2.2d, and Ue-16.2.2e STM-64 optical interfaces: I-64.1, I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, V-64.2b STM-64 optical interfaces (FEC): Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and Ue-64.2e STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces that comply with ITU-T G.692 can output fixed wavelength from 191.1 THz to 196.0 THz, and can be directly interconnected with the WDM equipment. PDH service interface 75/120-ohm E1 electrical interfaces: DB44 connectors 100-ohm T1 electrical interfaces: DB44 connectors 75-ohm E3, T3 and E4 electrical interfaces: SMB connectors Ethernet service interface DDN service interface ATM service interface 10/100BASE-TX, 100BASE-FX, 1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX, 1000BASE-ZX, 10GBASE-LW, 10GBASE-LR RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24, X.21 and Framed E1 interface STM-1 optical interfaces: Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 STM-4 optical interfaces: S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 E3 interfaces: E3 services are accessed by the N1PD3, N1PL3, or N1PL3A board. IMA E1 interfaces: IMA E1 services are accessed by the N1PQ1, N1PQM, or N2PQ1 board. Storage area network (SAN) service interface FC100, FICON, FC200, ESCON, DVB-ASI service optical interfaces
Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je, Ve-1.2, and Ve-4.2 are optical technical specifications defined by Huawei.
-*#*#*- Service Access Capacity

The capacity of services that the OptiX OSN 3500 can access varies according to the type and quantity of the configured boards. Table 3-19lists the maximum capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500 for accessing different services. The maximum capacity refers to the maximum number of services that is supported, when only one specific type of service is accessed.
3-28
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Table 3-19 Maximum service access capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500 in TDM mode Service Type STM-64 standard or concatenated services STM-64 (FEC) services STM-16 standard or concatenated services STM-16 (FEC) services STM-4 standard or concatenated services STM-1 standard services STM-1 (electrical) services E4 services E3/T3 services E1 services T1 services FE services GE services 10GE services STM-4 ATM services STM-1 ATM services N x 64 kbit/s services (N: 1-31) Framed E1 services ESCON services FICON/FC100 services FC200 services DVB-ASI services 2a;imum Number o+ Services Supported by a Sin le Subrac8 8 4 60 8 142 224 132 32 117 504 504 180 56 16 15 60 64 64 44 22 8 44
-*#*- Cloc8 Synchroni<ation

In TDM mode, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports only the traditional clock synchronization technology. 3.2.3.1 Traditional Clock Synchronization The OptiX OSN equipment provides multiple traditional clock functions.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-29
-*#*-*% Traditional Cloc8 Synchroni<ation

The OptiX OSN equipment provides multiple traditional clock functions. SSM clock protocol Tributary retiming Two 75-ohm/120-ohm external clock output and input External clock output shutdown Line clock source Tributary clock source Three working modes are as follows:

Tracing mode Holdover mode Free-run mode
For details on the traditional clock synchronization, see SDH Clock Synchronization of the Feature Description.
-*#*/ 5=uipment >evel Protection

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides several equipment level protection schemes. Table 3-20 shows the equipment level protection supported by the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 3-20 Equipment level protection 1bAect Protected PDH DDN Ethernet processing unit ATM Cross-connect and timing unit SCC unit Arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion unite Protection for the Microwave unit Power interface unit Intelligent fans unit Under abnormal conditions Protection Scheme TPS TPS TPS, PPS, BPS, DLAG, and LAG 1+1 hot backup 1+1 hot backup 1+1 hot backup Intra-board protection (dual-fed and selective receiving) and inter-board protection (1+1 hot backup) 1+1 HSB/FD/SD and N+1 hot backup 1+1 hot backup, 1:N centralized backup The power supply modules are of mutual backup for the three fan modules. Power-down protection during software loading, overvoltage or undervoltage protection for power supply and board temperature detection
3-30
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
1bAect Protected
Protection Scheme
NOTE The OptiX OSN 3500 supports coexistence of three TPS protection groups of different types.
3.2.4.1 TPS Protection The equipment supports TPS protection of many service types. 3.2.4.2 1+1 Protection for Ethernet Boards In TDM mode, the 1+1 protection schemes supported by Ethernet boards include BPS, PPS, LAG and DLAG. 3.2.4.3 1+1 Protection for ATM Boards The OptiX OSN equipment support board-level 1+1 protection with ATM boards. 3.2.4.4 Protection for the Microwave Boards The OptiX OSN equipment provides the microwave boards that support the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection and the N+1 (N3) protection. 3.2.4.5 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion Unit The WDM board that supports the 1+1 protection is the N1LWX. 3.2.4.6 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect and Timing Units With the 1+1 protection for the cross-connect and timing units, the equipment can run in a safe manner. 3.2.4.7 1+1 Hot Backup for the SCC Unit With the 1+1 protection for the SCC unit, the equipment can run in a secure manner. 3.2.4.8 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit The equipment supports 1+1 backup for the PIU. 3.2.4.9 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power Supply The equipment supports 1:N protection for the +3.3 V board power supply. With this protection, the board can be supplied with power in a reliable manner. 3.2.4.10 Intelligent Fans
Intelligent fans can automatically adjust the rotating speed according to the temperature of the equipment. 3.2.4.11 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions The protection schemes under abnormal conditions include undervoltage protection and overvoltage protection.
-*#*/*% TPS Protection

The equipment supports TPS protection of many service types. Table 3-21 lists the supported TPS protection schemes and boards. Table 3-22 lists the TPS protection parameters.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-31
Table 3-21 TPS protection schemes and supported boards Service Type E1/T1 E3/T3/E4/S TM-1 Protection Scheme One 1:N protection(N 8) Two 1:N (N 3) protections Supported (oards N1PQM, N1PQ1, N2PQ1a N1PD3, N1PL3, N2PQ3, N2PD3, N2PL3, N1SPQ4, N2SPQ4, N1SEP1 N2EFS0, N4EFS0, N5EFS0, N1EFS0A N1DX1 Revertive 2ode Revertive
Ethernet DDN
Two 1:1 protections One 1:N protection (N 8)
a: The N1PQ1 and N2PQ1 boards do not support T1 services.
Table 3-22 TPS protection parameters Parameter Priority Switching type Switching condition Description 1-X: X is equal to the number of working boards. Priority 1 is the highest priority. Forced switching, manual switching, lockout of switching and automatic switching. Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: The clock of the working board is lost. The working board is offline. The working board is cold reset. The hardware of the working board fails. A switching command is issued. Switching time Revertive mode WTR time 50 ms Revertive 300s to 720s. The WTR time of 600s is recommended.
-*#*/*# %?% Protection +or 5thernet (oards

In TDM mode, the 1+1 protection schemes supported by Ethernet boards include BPS, PPS, LAG and DLAG.
(PS:PPS
Table 3-23 lists the 1+1 protection parameters.
3-32
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Table 3-23 1+1 protection parameters of Ethernet boards Parameter Slots for working and protection boards Switching condition (PS7 PPS The bandwidth of the protection board is not less than the bandwidth of the working board. Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: The port status of the working board is Link Down. The clock of the working board is lost. The hardware of the working board is faulty. The working board is off-line. A switching command is issued. Switching time Revertive mode 350 ms Non-revertive mode
When a protection group needs to perform the BPS or PPS protection switching, the following conditions must be met. The equipment interconnected with the protection group must have the same working mode as the protection group. The transmit end and the receive end should be connected directly through optical fibers or network cables. No intermediate equipment should be present between the two ends. The working mode should not be modified. Otherwise, the protection group becomes abnormal.
The equipment cannot detect the modification of the working mode at the receive end of the protection group.
>AG:D>AG
Table 3-24 lists the related parameters for the LAG and DLAG protection.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-33
Table 3-24 Parameters for 1+1 LAG and DLAG protection of Ethernet boards (in TDM mode) Parameter Switching condition >AG Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: The links of the interconnected equipment are directly connected to each other through static LAG or manual LAG, no intermediate equipment exists, and the fiber is cut in both directions. Switching time 500 ms. The links of the interconnected equipment are directly connected to each other through static LAG or manual LAG, no intermediate equipment exists, and the fiber is cut in one direction. In addition, the ports of the interconnected equipment are set to the auto-negotiation mode. Switching time 500 ms. The links of the interconnected equipment are directly connected to each other through static LAG, no intermediate equipment exists, and the fiber is cut in both directions. Switching time 3.5 s. Revertive mode Revertive (default) Non-revertive LAG Type Static Manual Load sharing mode Load sharing Load non-sharing Load non-sharing Static D>AG Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: The links of the interconnected equipment are directly connected to each other through static LAG, no intermediate equipment exists, and the fiber is cut in both directions. Switching time 500 ms. The links of the interconnected equipment are directly connected to each other through static LAG, no intermediate equipment exists, and the fiber is cut in one direction. In addition, the ports of the interconnected equipment are set to the auto-negotiation mode. Switching time 500 ms. The links of the interconnected equipment are directly connected to each other through static LAG, no intermediate equipment exists, and the fiber is cut in both directions. Switching time 3.5 s. The clock of the working board is lost. The hardware of the working board is faulty. The working board is off-line. Non-revertive
-*#*/*- %?% Protection +or AT2 (oards

The OptiX OSN equipment support board-level 1+1 protection with ATM boards. Table 3-25 lists the 1+1 protection parameters of ATM boards.
3-34
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Table 3-25 1+1 protection parameters of ATM boards Parameter Slots for working and protection boards Switching condition Description Configured as required. Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: A manual switching command is issued. The working board is offline. The working board is under a cold reset. The power supply of the working board fails. The clock of the working board fails. The hardware of the working board fails. Revertive mode Switching time Non-revertive 50 ms
-*#*/*/ Protection +or the 2icro,ave (oards

The OptiX OSN equipment provides the microwave boards that support the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection and the N+1 (N3) protection. Table 3-26 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection for the microwave boards Parameter Switching condition (the switching occurs if one condition is met) Description The hardware of the IF board or the IF unit is faulty. The hardware of the ODU is faulty. POWER_FAIL VOLT_LOS (IF board) RADIO_TSL_HIGH RADIO_TSL_LOW RADIO_RSL_HIGH IF_INPWR_ABN CONFIG_NOSUPPORT R_LOC R_LOF R_LOS MW_LOF MW_RDI The board is offline. Switching time Revertive mode WTR time 500 ms Revertive 300-720 seconds (generally, set it to 600 seconds)
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-35
Table 3-27 N+1 protection for the microwave boards Parameter Switching condition (the switching occurs if one condition is met) Description R_LOS R_LOF R_LOC MS_AIS B2_EXC B2_SD(Optional condition) MW_LOF The board is offline. Switching time Revertive mode WTR time 50 ms Revertive 300-720 seconds (generally, set it to 600 seconds)
-*#*/*0 Protection +or the 9avelen th Conversion Unit

The WDM board that supports the 1+1 protection is the N1LWX. In the OptiX OSN equipment, the arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion unit N1LWX has two types: One is single fed and single receiving, and the other is dual fed and selective receiving. A dual fed and selective receiving N1LWX board supports intra-board protection, and one board of this type can realize optical channel protection. The single fed and single receiving LWX boards support inter-board protection, that is, 1+1 inter-board hot backup protection. Table 3-28 lists the 1+1 inter-board protection parameters of the N1LWX board. Table 3-28 1+1 inter-board protection parameters of N1LWX Parameter Slots for working and protection boards Switching condition Description Configurable as required. Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: The hardware of the working board fails. A switching command is issued. Revertive mode Switching time Non-revertive 50 ms
-*#*/*3 %?% !ot (ac8up +or the Cross&Connect and Timin Units
With the 1+1 protection for the cross-connect and timing units, the equipment can run in a safe manner.
For the OptiX OSN equipment, the cross-connect and timing units are integrated in the cross-connect and timing board. The cross-connect and timing board adopts a 1+1 hot backup mechanism so that the cross-connect and timing units are protected. Table 3-29 lists the 1+1 hot backup parameters of the cross-connect and timing units. Table 3-29 1+1 hot backup parameters of the cross-connect and timing units Parameter Slots for working and protection boards Switching condition Description Slot 9 and slot 10 Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: The working board is offline. The working board is cold reset. The hardware of the working board fails. A switching command is issued. Revertive mode Non-revertive After successful switching, the original protection board becomes the working board. After the original working board is recovered, the current working board continues to be the original protection board.
-*#*/*) %?% !ot (ac8up +or the SCC Unit

With the 1+1 protection for the SCC unit, the equipment can run in a secure manner. For the OptiX OSN 3500, the GSCC board provides the system control and communication (SCC) functions. The active and standby GSCC boards form a 1+1 hot backup mechanism. When the active GSCC is working, the standby GSCC is in the protection state. Table 3-30 lists the 1+1 hot backup parameters of the SCC unit. Table 3-30 1+1 hot backup parameters of the SCC unit Parameter Slots for working and protection boards Switching condition Description Sot 18 and slot 17 Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: The working board is offline. The working board is under a hot reset. The working board is under a cold reset. The hardware of the working board fails. A switching command is issued.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-37
Parameter Revertive mode
Description Non-revertive. After successful switching, the original protection board becomes the working board, and the original working board becomes the protection board.
-*#*/*4 %?% !ot (ac8up +or the Po,er Inter+ace Unit

The equipment supports 1+1 backup for the PIU. The OptiX OSN 3500 can access two -48/-60 V DC power supplies by using two N1PIU, N1PIUA, N1PIUB boards. These two power supplies provide a mutual backup for each other. When either of them fails, the other power supply provides a backup to ensure normal operation of the equipment. If the voltage of the two external power supplies of the equipment is the same, the two PIU boards of mutual backup separately share half of the current. If the voltage offset value of the two external power supplies of the equipment is more than 0.7 V, all the current pass the PIU board of the external power supply that has high voltage, and no current pass the PIU board of the external power supply that has low voltage. When only one PIU board is working, the power supply of the subrack is not affected.
If different boards are configured, the total power consumption and current of the equipment are different, and the current value of the PIU boards is also different. The current values of the PIU boards are computed according to the actual configuration.
-*#*/*6 %@N Protection +or the ?-*- V (oard Po,er Supply

The equipment supports 1:N protection for the +3.3 V board power supply. With this protection, the board can be supplied with power in a reliable manner. The OptiX OSN 3500 provides reliable power backup for the +3.3 V power supply of other boards, including the SCC and service boards by using the power backup unit on the N1AUX board. When the power supply of a board fails, the backup power supply immediately provides backup to ensure the normal operation of the board.
-*#*/*%" Intelli ent .ans

Intelligent fans can automatically adjust the rotating speed according to the temperature of the equipment. The OptiX OSN 3500 uses three intelligent fan modules to realize heat dissipation. The power supplies of the three fan modules are of mutual backup. The intelligent fans provide the functions of intelligent speed regulation and failure detection. When one fan module becomes faulty, the other fan modules operate at the full speed. The running status of the fans is indicated by the corresponding indicators on the front panel of the fan module.
-*#*/*%% (oard Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions

The protection schemes under abnormal conditions include undervoltage protection and overvoltage protection.
3-38
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Po,er&Do,n Protection Durin So+t,are >oadin

The verification function is provided for applications and data. After software loading is interrupted, the basic input/output system (BIOS) does not boot any applications or data that are not successfully or completely loaded. Instead, the BIOS waits for the loading to be resumed, until the software is successfully and completely loaded.
1vervolta e or Undervolta e Protection +or Po,er Supply

The power board provides a lightning protection component to effectively avoid the damage that may be caused by transient high voltages such as lightning. When a board is in undervoltage, the board automatically resets its CPU so that the software can re-initialize the chip. When a board is in undervoltage, the power system also automatically turns off the power supply on the main loop so that the system is protected.
(oard Temperature Detection

Temperature detection circuits are built in boards (for example, the cross-connect and timing board) that generates a large amount of heat. When the board detects a high temperature, an alarm is generated to prompt the maintenance personnel about cleaning the fans.
-*#*0 Net,or8 >evel Protection

The OptiX OSN equipment supports several network level protection schemes. Table 3-31 lists the network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN equipment. Table 3-31 Network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 Net,or8 >evel Protection SDH protection Protection Scheme Linear MSP MSP ring Subnetwork connection protection (SNCP), subnetwork connection multi-protection (SNCMP) and subnetwork connection tunnel protection (SNCTP) Dual-node interconnection (DNI) protection Fiber-shared virtual trail protection Optical-path-shared MSP Ethernet protection ATM protection Resilient packet ring (RPR) protection VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection
3.2.5.1 Linear MSP
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-39
The linear MSP supported by the equipment are 1+1 single-ended switching, 1+1 dual-ended switching and 1:N dual-ended switching MSP. 3.2.5.2 MSP Ring The MSP rings supported by the equipment are four-fiber MSP ring and two-fiber MSP ring. 3.2.5.3 SNCP The subnet connection protection schemes are SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP. 3.2.5.4 DNI The DNI network topology protection scheme effectively enhances the reliability of inter-ring services. The DNI realizes the protection of services between two rings, which are networked by the equipment from different vendors and adopt different protection schemes. The DNI provides protection in the case of fiber failure and node failure. 3.2.5.5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection When the fiber-shared virtual trail protection is used, an STM-64, STM-16, STM-4 or even STM-1 optical channel is logically divided into several lower order or higher order channels. These channels are then connected to other links at the channel layer to form rings. In the case of the rings at the channel layer, protection schemes such as the MSP, SNCP and non-protection can be set accordingly. 3.2.5.6 Optical-Path-Shared MSP In the optical-path-shared MSP scheme, an optical interface can be configured into multiple MSP groups, so multiple MSP rings can share the same fiber and optical interface. 3.2.5.7 RPR Protection The RPR protection schemes are Wrapping and Steering. 3.2.5.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring Protection The protection scheme at the ATM layer is VP-Ring/VC-Ring.
-*#*0*% >inear 2SP

The linear MSP supported by the equipment are 1+1 single-ended switching, 1+1 dual-ended switching and 1:N dual-ended switching MSP. The linear MSP is mainly used in a chain network. The OptiX OSN 3500 provides 1+1 and 1:N (N14) protection schemes, and supports a maximum of 40 linear MSPs. In the 1:N protection scheme, extra services are supported to be transmitted on the protection system. The switching time of linear MSP is less than 50 ms, as required in ITU-T G.841.
-*#*0*# 2SP Rin

The MSP rings supported by the equipment are four-fiber MSP ring and two-fiber MSP ring. The OptiX OSN equipment supports the hybrid application of two-fiber and four-fiber MSP rings, with the switching time less than 50 ms, as required in ITU-T G.841. Table 3-32 lists the maximum number of MSP rings supported by the OptiX OSN 3500.
3-40
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Table 3-32 Maximum number of MSP rings supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 Protection Scheme STM-64 four-fiber MSP ring STM-64 two-fiber MSP ring STM-16 four-fiber MSP ring STM-16 two-fiber MSP ring 2a;imum Number o+ 2SP Rin s Supported 2 4 11 12
The MSP supported by the OptiX OSN equipment has the following features.
AdAustable 2S (and,idth
The MS bandwidth refers to the number of VC-4s used by an MSP ring or chain. In the case of the MSP, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports bandwidth adjustment by VC-4 without interrupting services. For an STM-16 bidirectional MSP ring, the MS bandwidth ranges from one VC-4 to eight VC-4s. For an STM-64 bidirectional MSP ring, the MS bandwidth ranges from one VC-4 to 32 VC-4s.
Up radeable 2S (and,idth
The OptiX OSN equipment supports in-service upgrade of the MS bandwidth without interrupting services. For example, an STM-4 MSP ring can be upgraded to an STM-16 MSP ring without interrupting services.
T,o Sets o+ B (ytes at the 2ultiple; Section

For STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces, the OptiX OSN 3500 is able to process two sets of K bytes at the multiplex section. In this case, two MSP rings can be set up on one optical interface.
2S S=uelchin
The OptiX OSN equipment supports the squelching of misconnected services at the VC-4 level. In an MSP ring, each protection timeslot is shared by different spans or occupied by extra traffic. When there is no extra traffic in the ring, and a multipoint failure causes a node to be isolated from the ring, traffics that occupy the same timeslot may try to preempt this timeslot. As a result, the misconnection of services occurs. When extra traffic is transmitted in the protection path, the traffic on the working path may preempt the protection timeslot that is being used by extra traffic, even if only one point fails in the ring. As a result, the misconnection also occurs. To prevent service misconnection, each OptiX OSN equipment node sets up a detailed list of connections. Each node knows the source and the sink of any AU-4. With the automatic protection switching (APS) commands, each node can detect in advance the possibility of misconnection. By inserting the AU-AIS alarm, each node then discards these services that may be misconnected.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-41
The equipment supports the function of querying the MSP squelching. After the MS protocol module triggers the MS squelching function and delivers the squelching status information to a line board, the cross-connect board initiates a command to query the current MS squelching status of the handshake detection board. Then, the cross-connect board compares the squelching status with the relevant information stored on the cross-connect board. If the squelching status is inconsistent with each other, the cross-connect board issues a command to correct the MS squelching status.
-*#*0*- SNCP
The subnet connection protection schemes are SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP. The OptiX OSN equipment supports the SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP of the VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, and AU-3 services.
SNCP
The OptiX OSN equipment supports the end-to-end conversion between an unprotected trail and an SNCP-protected trail. See Figure 3-13. Figure 3-13 End-to-end conversion between an unprotected trail and an SNCP-protected trail
The unprotected trail
NE2 NE1 NE4 NE3 NE5
NE6 NE7 NE8
Convert to an unprotected trail The working trail
Convert to an SNCP-protected trail
NE2 NE1 NE4 NE3 NE5
NE6 NE7 NE8
The protction trail
The SNCP function of the OptiX OSN equipment is compliant with ITU-T G.841 and G.842. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports a maximum of 1184 SNCP protection pairs. In the trail management window of the NMS, you can convert an exiting unprotected trail to an SNCP-protected trail. In the opposite way, you can also convert an SNCP-protected trail to an unprotected trail. In addition, the following trail-level operations are supported: Manual switching to protection path Manual switching to working path
3-42
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Forced switching to protection path Forced switching to working path Wait-to-restore (WTR) time setting Revertive mode setting
SNC2P
The SNCMP is an N+1 (which means multiple protection paths protect a working path) protection scheme. The SNCMP is different from the SNCP in that the SNCP is a 1+1 protection scheme. The SNCMP of the OptiX OSN 3500 supports a maximum of 3+1 multichannel SNCP schemes. In addition, it supports a maximum of 592 SNCMP protection groups. The SNCMP provides multiple protection paths for a service. In this case, the service protection is implemented by a mechanism of multiple fed at the source and selective receiving at the sink. The SNCMP is supplementary to the SNCP. Figure 3-14 illustrates the principle of multipath protection. The source broadcasts services to multiple paths, and the sink determines which service to receive according to the service priority and then the service quality. When services are correctly received on both the working and protection paths, the sink selects the service from the working path. Figure 3-14 Principle of multipath protection
A Working Source Protection 1 Protection 2 Protection 3 Intermediate subnetworks Sink B
In the SNCMP networking shown in Figure 3-15, two protection paths protect a working path, and Protection 2 is a protection path that uses microwave as the transmission media. Under normal conditions, NE3 receives the service from the working path.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-43
Figure 3-15 SNCMP networking
NE 3
NE 4
NE 2 Working Microware Radio
Protection 1
NE 1
Protection 2
Microware Radio
When the transmission between NE1 and NE2 becomes faulty, as shown in Figure 3-16, NE3 receives the service from the higher priority protection path Protection 1. Figure 3-16 SNCMP service route in the case of single point failure
NE 3
NE 4
Protection 1
NE 1
Protection 2
Microware Radio
3-44
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
When the transmissions between NE1 and NE2, and between NE1 and NE4, both become faulty, as shown in Figure 3-17, NE3 receives the service from the second protection path Protection 2. Figure 3-17 SNCMP service route in the case of multipoint failure
NE 3
NE 4
Protection 1
NE 1
Protection 2
Microware Radio
SNCTP
The SNCTP provides protection paths at the VC-4 level. When the working path is faulty, all its services can be switched to the protection path. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports a maximum of 512 SNCTP groups. The SNCTP is different from the SNCP in that the SNCTP checks the status of only the entire VC-4 path, and such a check is irrelevant to the levels of services in the path. When the working path is faulty, relevant higher order alarms are raised, and then all services in the working path are switched to the protection path. If the fault is relevant only to lower order services, lower order alarms are raised, and the switching does not occur.
-*#*0*/ DNI
The DNI network topology protection scheme effectively enhances the reliability of inter-ring services. The DNI realizes the protection of services between two rings, which are networked by the equipment from different vendors and adopt different protection schemes. The DNI provides protection in the case of fiber failure and node failure. The OptiX OSN equipment supports the DNI protection, which is compliant with the ITU-T G.842. The DNI provides protection for services between the following rings:
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-45
Two SNCP rings An SNCP ring and an MSP ring Two MSP rings Figure 3-18 illustrates a DNI protection of two SNCP rings. Figure 3-18 DNI protection of two SNCP rings
NE A
SNCP Ring 1 NE C NE D
NE E SNCP Ring 2
NE F
NE G Selecting Point Forward Working Routing Reverse Working Routing
When any of the following faults occurs, the inter-ring services can be protected. A fiber cut occurs on SNCP Ring 1. A fiber cut occurs on SNCP Ring 2. A fiber cut occurs on the two SNCP rings. NE C (primary node) or NE D (secondary node) is faulty. NE E (primary node) or NE F (secondary node) is faulty. NE C and NE E are faulty. NE D and NE F are faulty.
The primary node and the secondary node protect each other. When one node is faulty, inter-ring services are not affected.
-*#*0*0 .iber&Shared Virtual Trail Protection

When the fiber-shared virtual trail protection is used, an STM-64, STM-16, STM-4 or even STM-1 optical channel is logically divided into several lower order or higher order channels. These channels are then connected to other links at the channel layer to form rings. In the case of the rings at the channel layer, protection schemes such as the MSP, SNCP and non-protection can be set accordingly. Figure 3-19 shows the fiber-shared virtual trail protection. Figure 3-19 Fiber-shared virtual trail protection
STM-64 STM-64
STM-16 SNCP
STM-16 MSP
-*#*0*3 1ptical&Path&Shared 2SP

In the optical-path-shared MSP scheme, an optical interface can be configured into multiple MSP groups, so multiple MSP rings can share the same fiber and optical interface. A prerequisite for this function is that the optical interface board must be able to process multiple sets of independent K bytes. The N1SL64, N1SLD64, N2SL64, N1SLO16, N1SL16, N2SL16, N3SL16, and N1SF16 boards of the OptiX OSN 3500 support the configuration of shared optical paths. An STM-64 or STM-16 optical interface supports a maximum of two sets of K bytes. Up to two MSP rings can be created for an optical interface if the SL64 board supports STM-64 optical interfaces. The two sets of K bytes are separately located in the first and seventeenth VC-4s. Up to two MSP rings can be created for an optical interface if the SF16 and SL16 boards support STM-16 optical interfaces. The two sets of K bytes are separately located in the first and fifth VC-4s. Figure 3-20 shows the networking of two-fiber optical-path-shared MSP supported by the OptiX OSN 3500.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-47
Figure 3-20 Optical-path-shared MSP
STM-4/16
STM-4/16 Optical-pathshared MSP ring STM-16/64
STM-4/16
STM-4/16 Optical-pathshared MSP ring STM-4/16 STM-4/16
For example, two lower-rate west line units share one higher-rate east line unit, as shown in Figure 3-21. Figure 3-21 One higher-rate line shared by two lower-rate lines
MSP ring 1 STM-16 STM-64 MSP ring 2 STM-16
The OptiX OSN 3500 also supports the line units at the same rate to form a shared protection group in both directions, as shown in Figure 3-22. In this case, the west STM-16 line units can only add part of their VC-4s into the MSP ring protection group. Figure 3-22 One line shared by two lines at the same rate
MSP ring 1 STM-16 STM-16 MSP ring 2 STM-16
3-48
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
-*#*0*) RPR Protection

The RPR protection schemes are Wrapping and Steering. Figure 3-23 shows a bidirectional RPR that is of a reverse dual-ring structure. The outer ring and the inner ring both transmit data packets and control packets. The control packets on the inner ring carry the control information on the outer ring, and the control packets on the outer ring carry the control information on the inner ring. The RPR has the following advantage: On the RPR, every node assumes that the packets added to the ring will finally reach their destination, regardless of which path is used. A node can only perform three types of operations on the packets, that is, insertion (adding a new packet onto the ring), forwarding (forwarding the packet), and stripping (dropping the packet locally). Compared with a mesh network, an Ethernet ring considerably decreases the communication traffic among nodes. This is because a mesh network determines the forwarding port on the basis of every single packet. Figure 3-23 Example of bidirectional RPR
Node 4 Outer ring
Inner ring Node 3 RPR Node 5
Node 1 Node 2
In the case of a fiber cut, the RPR provides the wrapping and steering functions for packets. The wrapping function connects the inner ring and the outer ring at the two nodes that are adjacent to the fiber cut point. See Figure 3-24.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-49
Figure 3-24 RPR wrapping protection

Node 4 Outer ring
Inner ring Node 3 RPR Node 5
Node 2
Node 1 Wapping
The steering function reversely transmits packets from the transmit node in the case of a fiber cut. See Figure 3-25. Figure 3-25 RPR steering protection
Node 4 Outer ring Inner ring Node 3 RPR Node 5
Node 1 Node 2 Steering
In both protection schemes, the packets can reach their destination in a reverse direction, and the service failure time is less than 50 ms. During the protection switching, the wrapping function is usually performed first. After the new topology and the new service trail are created, the steering function is then performed. Such a mechanism ensures that packets are not lost during the protection switching, and that the protection switching time is decreased.
-*#*0*4 VP&Rin :VC&Rin Protection

The protection scheme at the ATM layer is VP-Ring/VC-Ring.
3-50
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Figure 3-26 shows the principle of VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection at the ATM layer. The VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection scheme reserves the protection resources, and can be applied on any physical topology. The reserved protection resources include routes and bandwidths. Figure 3-26 VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection
NE2
Working path ATM service NE1 Protection path NE3 ATM service
NE4
The OptiX OSN equipment provides protection for virtual paths (VPs) and virtual channels (VCs), and protects ATM services through a dual fed and selective receiving mechanism. Two connections (VP/VC), which represent the working path and the protection path, are set up at the source node NE1 and the sink node NE3. In normal conditions, the receive end selects the service from the working path. When the primary ring becomes faulty, the receive end detects the failure and triggers the protection. In this way, the receive end selects the service from the protection path, and thus the ATM service is protected.
-*- Pac8et .eatures

The OptiX OSN equipment provides certain boards that have packet features. The TDM mode can be overlapped with the packet mode to transmit data on the two planes. Hence, the equipment can realize the smooth evolution from the multiservice transport platform (MSTP) network to the packet transmission network (PTN) network. 3.3.1 MPLS Overview The OptiX OSN equipment adopts the multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) technology to transmit Ethernet services in packet mode. This topic describes the MPLS concepts and the applications of the OptiX OSN equipment. 3.3.2 Service Description The OptiX OSN 3500 in packet mode supports Ethernet services and CES services. 3.3.3 Introduction to Features
This topic describes the features and applications of the OptiX OSN equipment in packet mode. 3.3.4 Protection
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-51
In packet mode, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports multiple protection schemes, such as link aggregation, MPLS Tunnel APS protection, packet LPT, PW APS 1+1 protection, PW APS 1:1 protection, MC-LAG. 3.3.5 Board Functions The OptiX OSN equipment provides the data boards listed later to meet the requirements of packet features when the equipment uses the cross-connect boards that support the packet switching function.
-*-*% 2P>S 1vervie,

The OptiX OSN equipment adopts the multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) technology to transmit Ethernet services in packet mode. This topic describes the MPLS concepts and the applications of the OptiX OSN equipment. 3.3.1.1 Background The multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) was originally used to increase the forwarding speed of a router. Currently, the MPLS are evolving to the backbone routing and the VPN solution. 3.3.1.2 Basic MPLS Concepts Several basic MPLS concepts facilitate the understanding of the MPLS technology. These basic MPLS concepts include forwarding equivalence class (FEC), label switched path (LSP). 3.3.1.3 System Structure The MPLS system manages packet services through the forwarding plane. 3.3.1.4 MPLS Capability of the Equipment The OptiX OSN 3500 adopts the MPLS technology to greatly increase the packet forwarding rate and provide seamless integration with the Ethernet Layer 2 network. In this manner, the equipment provides better solutions for applications associated with the virtual private network (VPN) and quality of service (QoS).
-*-*%*% (ac8 round

The multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) was originally used to increase the forwarding speed of a router. Currently, the MPLS are evolving to the backbone routing and the VPN solution. The MPLS is integrated with the routing function of the IP network and the highly effective forwarding mechanism of the traditional Layer 2 network. Similar to the forwarding scheme of the existing Layer 2 network, the forwarding plane is connection-oriented. Hence, the MPLS can be seamlessly connected to Layer 2 networks such the ATM and Ethernet networks. In addition, the MPLS provides better solutions for the virtual private network (VPN) and quality of service (QoS). Hence, the MPLS becomes a criterion for expanding the data network and increasing the network operability. To better meet the requirements of the transport network for service quality, the connectionless feature of the standard MPLS should be simplified, and the OAM and protection capabilities should be enhanced. In compliance with the latest international standards, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports a series of MPLS features for the transport network.
3-52
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
-*-*%*# (asic 2P>S Concepts

Several basic MPLS concepts facilitate the understanding of the MPLS technology. These basic MPLS concepts include forwarding equivalence class (FEC), label switched path (LSP).
.or,ardin 5=uivalence Class

As a classification forwarding technology, the MPLS considers the packets of the same forwarding scheme as a class, which is called an FEC. In the MPLS network, the packets in the same FEC are processed in the same way.
>abel
A label is a short identifier of fixed length and is locally valid (only valid in the MPLS domain). The label is used to identify the FEC that one packet belongs to. On certain conditions, for example, when load sharing is required, several labels may correspond to one FEC, but one label just indicates one FEC. The packet headers carry labels and the labels do not contain any topology information. Labels are locally valid. A label has four bytes, which are encapsulated in the way illustrated in Figure 3-27. Figure 3-27 Label encapsulation structure
0 Label 19 Exp 22 23 S TTL 31
A label has the following four sections. Label: 20 bits. The label section indicates the label value and is used as the forwarding pointer. Exp: 3 bits. The Exp section is reserved for test and currently used for CoS. S: 1 bit. The S section is an identifier at the bottom of a stack. The MPLS supports the layered labels, or multiple labels. If S is 1, it indicates that the label is at the bottom. TTL: 8 bits. The TTL section has the same indication as the time to live (TTL) of IP packets. As a connection identifier, the label is similar to the VPI/VCI for ATM. The labels are encapsulated between the link layer and the network layer in an Ethernet frame. Figure 3-28 shows the encapsulation location of labels. Figure 3-28 Encapsulation location of labels in Ethernet frames
Ethernet/PPP header Label Ethernet/SDH packet Layer 3 data
>SP
In an MPLS network, the path involved in an FEC is called an LSP.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-53
The LSP is a unidirectional path from the ingress to egress. Each node on an LSP is a label switched router (LSR). According to the data transport direction, adjacent LSRs are upstream LSR and downstream LSR. The LSPs are classified into static LSPs and dynamic LSPs. The static LSPs are manually configured by the administrator. The dynamic LSPs are created dynamically by the RSVP-TE protocol. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports only the static LSP.
-*-*%*- System Structure

The MPLS system manages packet services through the forwarding plane. The forwarding plane is also called a data plane, which is connection-oriented and can use Layer 2 networks such as Ethernet. The MPLS uses short labels of fixed length to encapsulate packets. The forwarding plane then quickly forwards the encapsulated packets.
-*-*%*/ 2P>S Capability o+ the 5=uipment

The OptiX OSN 3500 adopts the MPLS technology to greatly increase the packet forwarding rate and provide seamless integration with the Ethernet Layer 2 network. In this manner, the equipment provides better solutions for applications associated with the virtual private network (VPN) and quality of service (QoS). The MPLS features of the OptiX OSN 3500 are listed in Table 3-33, and the MPLS performance specifications are listed in Table 3-34. Table 3-33 MPLS features supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 .eature Basic MPLS functions Description Supports basic MPLS functions and MPLS forwarding services. Adopts the LSP tunnel technology so that an MPLS network that accesses multiple services can be provided. Supports the static tunnel. MPLS Tunnel OAM Supports MPLS OAM, which complies with ITU-T Y.1711. Supports Ping command for the MPLS tunnel, and uses MPLS echo request and MPLS echo reply messages to check the availability of the LSP. Supports the MPLS tunnel 1+1 and 1:1 protection schemes. Supports PW Ping. Supports PW APS 1+1/1:1 protection. Supports HQoS.
MPLS Tunnel APS PW OAM PW APS Others
3-54
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Table 3-34 MPLS performance specifications of the OptiX OSN 3500 .eature Number of MPLS tunnels Number of PWs Description Supports 16K unidirectional/bidirectional MPLS tunnels. Supports 16K unidirectional/bidirectional PWs.
-*-*# Service Description

The OptiX OSN 3500 in packet mode supports Ethernet services and CES services. 3.3.2.1 Service Models The OptiX OSN equipment adopts different layered models on the UNI and NNI sides when it is interconnected with different devices on the two sides. 3.3.2.2 Ethernet Services The OptiX OSN equipment supports point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, and multipoint-to-point packet Ethernet services, that is, E-Line services, E-LAN services, and E-Aggr services. 3.3.2.3 CES Services The circuit emulation service (CES) helps to solve the problem of insufficient optical fiber resources in the access ring and allows TDM services to be transparently transmitted across the pure packet mode.
-*-*#*% Service 2odels

The OptiX OSN equipment adopts different layered models on the UNI and NNI sides when it is interconnected with different devices on the two sides. The OptiX OSN equipment adopts the MPLS-based PWE3 model to process Ethernet services and CES services.
The OptiX OSN equipment supports only static label allocation of PWE3.
(asic Concepts
The associated basic concepts are customer edge (CE), provider edge (PE), and provider (P), as shown in Figure 3-29.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-55
Figure 3-29 PWE3 networking diagram
PE CE PE P P PE CE CE
CE
CE: provides interfaces. A CE can be a router, an exchange, or a host. Generally, a CE need not support MPLS. PE: refers to an edge device of the SP network, which is directly connected to a CE. P: refers to a backbone router on the SP network, which is indirectly connected to a CE. A P provides only the MPLS forwarding function.
2P>S&(ased P95- 2odel

Figure 3-30 shows the MPLS-based PWE3 model adopted by the OptiX OSN equipment that functions as a PE. Figure 3-30 MPLS-based PWE3 model
UNI Forwarder NNI
Local service processing layer
Ethernet switching
TDM
TDM processing
Ethernet
Emulation service layer
PWE3
PWE3 encapsulation layer
Service interface layer
Ethernet
TDM
PW label Tunnel label
MPLS layer
802.2 802.3 Physical layer FE GE 10GE E1/ cSTM-1 GE/ 10GE

Ethernet
Data link layer and physical layer
Interconnected with CE
Transmitted to PSN
3-56
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
On the UNI side, a PE is interconnected with a CE and accesses services from users to the PSN. The layers of the MPLS-based PWE3 model have the following functions on the UNI side: Physical layer Provides the interfaces between the OptiX OSN equipment and transmission media (such as electrical cables and optical fibers).
In the CE-PE direction, the physical layer processes the physical signals (optical or electrical signals) from the CE, extracts information from the signals, and then sends the information to the service interface layer. In the PE-CE direction, the physical layer receives information from the service interface layer, converts the information to signals that can be transmitted over the transmission media, and then transmits the signals to the CE through physical channels. In the CE->PE direction, the service interface layer receives information from the physical layer, identifies service types, and then sends the services to the respective parts of the local service processing layer. In the PE->CE direction, the service interface layer receives service signals from the local service processing layer, chooses proper physical channels, and then sends the service signals to the physical layer.
Service interface layer
Local service processing layer The local service processing layer processes different services according to user requirements. On the NNI side, the OptiX OSN equipment is interconnected with the equipment on the PSN and transmits user services on the PSN. The layers of the MPLS-based PWE3 model have the following functions on the NNI side: Emulation service layer The emulation service layer corresponds to the payload to be encapsulated into PWs. One emulation service corresponds to one PW. This is a logical layer and the OptiX OSN equipment does not perform any operation at this layer. PWE3 encapsulation layer The PWE3 encapsulation layer uses different encapsulation modes for different emulation services. At this layer, emulation services are uniformly encapsulated into PWE3 packets, or different emulation services are decapsulated from PWE3 packets. MPLS layer The MPLS layer includes two layers of MPLS labels.
The outer MPLS label is a tunnel label, which identifies a tunnel that traverses an MPLS network between the two PE sites of a service. Such a tunnel carries PWs. The inner MPLS label is a PW label, which identifies a PW in a tunnel.
Data link layer and physical layer The data link layer and physical layer carry the MPLS layer and provide links for data transmission at the MPLS layer. The OptiX OSN equipment supports Ethernet links (GE/10GE interfaces) on the NNI side. The forwarder between the UNI and NNI forwards the services that are locally processed on the UNI side to the NNI side and forwards the emulation services on the NNI side to the UNI side.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-57
It is not recommended that the OptiX OSN equipment use Ethernet links connected to FE electrical interfaces on the NNI side.
Service 2odel o+ Ps
Figure 3-31 shows the service model adopted by the OptiX OSN equipment that functions as a P. Figure 3-31 Service model of the OptiX OSN equipment
UNI Forwarder NNI
MPLS layer
Tunnel label
Tunnel label
MPLS layer
802.2 802.3 GE/ 10GE Ethernet
802.2 802.3 GE/ 10GE Ethernet
Transmitted to the PSN
Transmitted to the PSN
On the NNI side, the OptiX OSN equipment is interconnected with the equipment on the PSN so that services can be transmitted on the PSN. The OptiX OSN equipment provides only the MPLS forwarding function. That is, the equipment forwards the MPLS packets according to the forwarding table of tunnel labels and the MPLS labels.
-*-*#*# 5thernet Services

The OptiX OSN equipment supports point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, and multipoint-to-point packet Ethernet services, that is, E-Line services, E-LAN services, and E-Aggr services.
5&>ine Service
Figure 3-32 illustrates the E-Line service provided by the OptiX OSN equipment. Company A has two branches in City 1 and City 3. Company B has two branches in City 2 and City 3. Company C has two branches in City 1 and City 2. The branches of Companies A, B, and C require data communication. The OptiX OSN equipment can separately provide a private line service for Companies A, B, and C to meet the communication requirement. In addition, the service data is completely isolated.
3-58
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Figure 3-32 E-Line service
Metro carrier Ethernet Company A
Nationwide/Global carrier Ethernet
Metro carrier Ethernet Company A
Company C City 1
Metro carrier Ethernet
Company B City 3
E-Line1 E-Line2 E-Line3
City 2 Company C Company B
5&>AN Service
Figure 3-33 illustrates the E-LAN service provided by the OptiX OSN equipment. Company Z is headquartered in City 3. Branch A of the company is located in City 1 and City 2, and Branch B of the company is located in City 1, City 2, and City 3. Branch A and Branch B do not communicate with each other, and the data of them should be separated from each other. The headquarters, however, need to communicate with all the branches and need to access the Internet. The OptiX OSN equipment can be used to provide the E-LAN service. Different VLAN tags are used to identify service data from different branches. In this manner, the headquarters can communicate with the branches and the data from different branches is isolated. In addition, the VLAN is used to isolate the Internet data accessed by the headquarters from the internal service data.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-59
Figure 3-33 E-LAN service
ISP
Metro carrier Ethernet Branch B
Nationwide/Global carrier Ethernet Headquarter
Metro carrier Ethernet Branch A City 1 Metro carrier Ethernet Branch B City 3
VLAN1 VLAN2 VLAN3
City 2 Branch A Branch B Branch A
5&A
r Service
As shown in Figure 3-34, a mobile carrier needs to build a 3G network to aggregate the services of each NodeB and then transmit the aggregated service to the radio network controller (RNC). In this case, the equipment processes the data between each NodeB and the RNC as one service. On the convergence node, the OptiX OSN equipment specifies the total bandwidth, QoS, and other parameters.
3-60
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Figure 3-34 E-Aggr service
Node B
FE
FE
RNC
Node B
GE
FE
Node B
-*-*#*- C5S Services

The circuit emulation service (CES) helps to solve the problem of insufficient optical fiber resources in the access ring and allows TDM services to be transparently transmitted across the pure packet mode. At the physical layer on the UNI side, the OptiX OSN equipment is interconnected with a CE through the following physical channels for accessing CES services: Channelized STM-1 E1
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-61
Figure 3-35 Networking diagram of the CES

NMS RNC GE STM-1 BSC GE
Simulation node 3
10GE Ring
Simulation node 2
MST
FE
ing
FE
R GE
R 1/4
GE R
ing
ing
NodeB
NodeB
Simulation node 1
E1 FE BTS BTS E1
NodeB
Packet ring TDM ring
MSTP equipment
As shown in Figure 3-35, the OptiX OSN equipment can gain access to CES services at emulation node 1, emulation node 2, or emulation node 3. At emulation node 1, the OptiX OSN 1500 transmits E1 services to the GE packet ring. At emulation node 2, the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 7500 or transmits E1 signals that are received from the BTS through TDM STM-1/STM-4 ring to the 10GE packet ring. At emulation node 3, the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 7500 or converts E1 CESs on the 10GE packet ring into STM-1 signals and then sends them to the BSC. The OptiX OSN equipment supports both structure-aware TDM circuit emulation service over packet switched network (CESoPSN) and structure-agnostic TDM over packet (SAToP). In the case of CESoPSN, the features are as follows: The equipment is aware of frame structures, frame alignment modes, and timeslots in TDM circuits. The equipment processes the overheads in and extracts the payloads from the TDM frames. Then, the equipment loads timeslots to the packet payload in a specific sequence. As a result, the services in each timeslot are fixed and visible in packets. In the case of SAToP, the features are as follows: The equipment is agnostic about the structures of the TDM signals. To be specific, the equipment treats TDM signals as constant bit-rate (CBR) flows, and emulates all the TDM signals in the same way.
3-62
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
The overheads and payloads in TDM signals are transparently transmitted.
-*-*- Introduction to .eatures

This topic describes the features and applications of the OptiX OSN equipment in packet mode. 3.3.3.1 PWE3 In a packet switched network (PSN), the pseudo wire emulation edge to edge (PWE3) is a Layer 2 service bearing technology that emulates as truly as possible the basic behaviors and characteristics of ATM/IMA services, Ethernet services, TDM services, and other services. 3.3.3.2 MS-PW If the equipment does not support multi-segment pseudo wire (MS-PW), you can use the static MPLS tunnel to bear Ethernet services for packet transmission. In this case, an intermediate node on the network can switch tunnel labels only. With an increase in base stations, the number of tunnels increases sharply. With MS-PW, the tangent node between a convergence node and an access ring, that is, the S-PE node, terminates the tunnels, making the number of tunnels on the convergence ring reduced. 3.3.3.3 MPLS OAM The MPLS OAM technology provides a defect detection tool and a defect correction mechanism for the MPLS network. You can perform the detection function of the forwarding plane through MPLS OAM and protection switching mechanism, and complete a protection switching in 50 ms after a defect occurs. In this way, the impact caused by the defect is minimized. 3.3.3.4 HQoS As an edge DS node, the OptiX OSN equipment provides multi-layer QoS function points to achieve the HQoS control function.
-*-*-*% P95In a packet switched network (PSN), the pseudo wire emulation edge to edge (PWE3) is a Layer 2 service bearing technology that emulates as truly as possible the basic behaviors and characteristics of ATM/IMA services, Ethernet services, TDM services, and other services. With the PWE3 technology, the traditional TDM network can be interconnected with the PSN. In this manner, the resources can be shared and the network can be expanded. Figure 3-36 shows the application of PWE3. The PWE3 emulation is performed for the Ethernet, ATM, and TDM services on NE1 and NE2 between NodeB and RNC. These services are transmitted through the pseudo wire (PW) between NE1 and NE2.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-63
Figure 3-36 Application scenario of PWE3

Ethernet, ATM, TDM Ethernet, ATM, TDM
PSN
NodeB
PW1 PW2
RNC NE2
NE1
MPLS tunnel
NodeB Ethernet, ATM, TDM
RNC Ethernet, ATM, TDM
Packet transmission equipment
-*-*-*# 2S&P9
If the equipment does not support multi-segment pseudo wire (MS-PW), you can use the static MPLS tunnel to bear Ethernet services for packet transmission. In this case, an intermediate node on the network can switch tunnel labels only. With an increase in base stations, the number of tunnels increases sharply. With MS-PW, the tangent node between a convergence node and an access ring, that is, the S-PE node, terminates the tunnels, making the number of tunnels on the convergence ring reduced. As shown in Figure 3-37, the OptiX OSN equipment does not support MS-PW. Between the Ingress node and the Transit node, there are four PWs and four tunnels; between the Transit node and the Egress node, there are four PWs and four tunnels. Figure 3-37 Networking diagram of SS-PW
FE NodeB
Ingress node
Transit node FE NodeB PSN2 FE NodeB PSN3 FE Tunnel NodeB PW PSN1 Egress node
GE RNC
3-64
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
As shown in Figure 3-38, the OptiX OSN equipment supports MS-PW. Between T-PE and S-PE, there are four PWs and four tunnels; between S-PE and RNC, there are four PWs and two tunnels. That is, the MS-PW feature aggregates four tunnels to two, thus saving network resources. Figure 3-38 Networking diagram of MS-PW
MS-PW FE NodeB T-PE FE NodeB T-PE S-PE S-PE T-PE PSN3 FE T-PE NodeB Tunnel PW GE PSN2 T-PE RNC PSN1
FE NodeB
-*-*-*- 2P>S 1A2

The MPLS OAM technology provides a defect detection tool and a defect correction mechanism for the MPLS network. You can perform the detection function of the forwarding plane through MPLS OAM and protection switching mechanism, and complete a protection switching in 50 ms after a defect occurs. In this way, the impact caused by the defect is minimized. Traditional SDH services have a complete OAM mechanism, whereas MPLS OAM provides a detection mechanism dedicated to the user layer of MPLS. MPLS supports service transmission at different server layers. The user layer of MPLS covers IP, FR, ATM, and Ethernet applications. MPLS OAM has the following advantages: Provides query-as-you-require and consecutive detection, which enable you to know whether the monitored LSP is defective at any time. Can detect whether the network is defective, analyze and locate the defect, and report the event to the NMS. Rapidly triggers protection switching when the link is defective or faulty. Monitors the performance events such as packet loss ratio, delay, and jitter in real time, and report the events to the NMS.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-65
MPLS OAM complies ITU-T Y.1711. For details, refer to MPLS OAM in Feature Description.
-*-*-*/ !CoS
As an edge DS node, the OptiX OSN equipment provides multi-layer QoS function points to achieve the HQoS control function. Compared with the traditional QoS, the HQoS has the following advantages: The hierarchical scheduling mechanism can be based on the port, service, PW, tunnel, or QinQ link. Hence, the granularity of the QoS control is further refined. The hierarchical flow control mechanism can be based on the port, service, PW, tunnel, or QinQ link. Hence, the QoS can be fully controlled. The WFQ and WRED policies can be configured to increase the flexibility of the QoS control. For details, refer to HQoS in Feature Description.
-*-*/ Protection
In packet mode, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports multiple protection schemes, such as link aggregation, MPLS Tunnel APS protection, packet LPT, PW APS 1+1 protection, PW APS 1:1 protection, MC-LAG. MPLS Tunnel APS protection
In MPLS Tunnel APS protection, the protection path protects the service that is transmitted in the working path. When the working path becomes faulty, the service is switched to the protection path. The 1+1 protection adopts the dual fed and selective receiving mechanism, and the 1:1 protection adopts the single fed and single receiving mechanism. For details on the MPLS tunnel 1+1 protection and MPLS tunnel 1:1 protection, see 3.1.5.1 MPLS Tunnel APS Protection. PW APS protects a working PW by using a protection PW. When the working PW becomes faulty, services are switched to the protection PW for transmission. PW APS is classified into two types, namely, PW APS 1+1 and PW APS 1:1. Ethernet link aggregation includes the link aggregation group (LAG). For details on the Ethernet LAG protection, see LAG in the Feature Description. Multi-chassis link aggregation group (MC-LAG) provides inter-NE link aggregation. It is a supplementary protection scheme of LAG. On a 3G bearer network, MC-LAG works with PW OAM, PW APS to provide equipment level protection when the RNC is dually homed to two convergence nodes. In this manner, reliability of the connections between the RNC and convergence nodes is improved. MC-LAG can aggregate several links on different NEs into a LAG. When a link or an NE fails, MC-LAG automatically switches the associated services to another available link IN the same LAG. The packet link state pass through (LPT) is used to detect and report the faults that occur at the service access node and on the intermediate transmission network. The
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
PW APS protection
Link aggregation group

MC-LAG
Packet LPT
3-66
packet LPT instructs the equipment at two ends on the transmission network to start the backup network at the earliest time for communication, therefore guaranteeing normal transmission of the important data. The backup network can be created in various manners. For example, the backup network can be a microwave network or used a leased link. Alternatively, wireless or satellite communication can be set up between access nodes.
For details on the packet LPT protection, see Introduction to LPT in the Feature Description.
-*-*0 (oard .unctions

The OptiX OSN equipment provides the data boards listed later to meet the requirements of packet features when the equipment uses the cross-connect boards that support the packet switching function. 3.3.5.1 Ethernet Processing Boards This topic provides the Ethernet processing boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500. 3.3.5.2 EoD Boards This topic describes the EoD boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500. 3.3.5.3 CES Service Processing Boards This topic describes the CES service processing boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500.
-*-*0*% 5thernet Processin (oards

This topic provides the Ethernet processing boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 3-35 lists the functions and features of the PEX1 board. Table 3-35 Functions and features of the PEX1 .unction and .eature Basic functions Functions when being used with the access board Specifications of the interface Description Provides one 10GE optical interface and can access and process 1x10 GE services independently. Does not support the access board, and one 10GE interface is available on the front panel of the board. (N1PEX1) Supports 10GBASE-SR, 10GBASE-SW, 10GBASE-LR, 10GBASE-LW, 10GBASE-ER, 10GBASE-EW, 10GBASE-ZR, and 10GBASE-ZW Ethernet optical interfaces. The optical interface uses the LC connector and supports the transmission distances of 0.3 km, 10 km, 40 km, and 80 km. (N2PEX1) Supports the 10GBASE-SR, 10GBASE-LR, 10GBASE-ER, and 10GBASE-ZR Ethernet optical interfaces. The optical interface uses the LC connector and supports the transmission distances of 10 km, 40 km, and 80 km. Supports the DWDM colored optical interfaces. The optical interface uses the LC connector. The DWDM optical interface supports the transmission distance of 40/80 km.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-67
.unction and .eature Characteristics of the interface
Description Supports the full-duplex mode for the port. Supports the setting of the MTU for the Ethernet port. Supports the setting of the following parameters for the port: flow control, loopback mode, state, and query of the type of optical interface. Supports the configuration of the LAN mode or WAN mode for the port on the N1PEX1. The default mode of the port is the LAN mode. The N2PEX1 supports only the LAN mode. Supports the measurement based on the RMON function. Supports the setting and query of the optical power threshold.
Processing capability Loopback function
Processes 10 Gbit/s services in full-duplex mode. N1PEX1: Supports inloops/outloops at the PHY layer of the Ethernet port. Supports inloops at the MAC layer of the Ethernet ports. N2PEX1: Supports inloops and outloops at the MAC layer of the Ethernet port.
Format of service frames
Supports the encapsulation in IEEE 802.3 format, Ethernet II format, or IEEE 802.1q/p format. Supports the Jumbo frame with a length not more than 9600 bytes.
Type of Ethernet services
Supports point-to-point E-Line services. Supports multipoint-to-multipoint E-LAN services. Supports multipoint-to-point E-AGGR services (only on the N1PEX1).
HQoS
Provides the HQoS function, including the scheduling function at multiple levels for the flow queue and port queue and the bandwidth restricting function, and provides the corresponding statistical information. Supports LAG protection. Supports the 1+1 (single-ended/dual-ended) and 1:1 (dual-ended) MPLS Tunnel APS. Supports the LAG. The N2PEX1 also supports the following protection schemes: 1+1 (single-ended/dual-ended) and 1:1 (dual-ended) MPLS PW APS MC-LAG
LAG Protection schemes
3-68
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
.unction and .eature Clock function
Description Supports one channel of the synchronous Ethernet clock and the extraction of the clock from the physical layer of the port. The quality of the clock meets the requirement of the clock source. Supports one channel of the IEEE 1588 V2 clock (only on the N2PEX1).
Maintenance features
Detects the fault at the physical layer of the board, the alarm reporting that the connection at the network port is lost, the alarm reporting that the interface fails, and the alarm reporting that the bit errors at the interface cross the threshold. Supports the hot-pluggable optical module and query of the information about the optical module. Supports the alarm detection function and reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.
ETH-OAM MPLS OAM
Supports the ETH-OAM function, which complies with IEEE 802.1ag, IEEE 802.3ah, and ITU-T Y.1731. Supports MPLS tunnel OAM and PW OAM, with MPLS OAM in compliance with ITU-T Y.1711.
NOTE N1PEX1 supports only the MPLS tunnel OAM function.
LPT for packet services Number of supported E-Line services Number of supported E-LAN services Number of supported E-AGGR services Number of MPLS tunnels
Supports P2P LPT and P2MP LPT for packet services. When working with the N4GSCC: 4k When working with the N6GSCC: 6k 1k
4, each of which supports 127 leaf ports only on the N1PEX1.
Number of unidirectional/bidirectional MPLS tunnels (with the tunnels shared): N1PEX1: 4k (unidirectional)/2k (bidirectional) N2PEX1: When working with the N4GSCC: 4k (unidirectional)/2k (bidirectional) When working with the N6GSCC: 16k (unidirectional)/8k (bidirectional)
Number of bidirectional static PWs
16k
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-69
.unction and .eature Number of QinQ links Number of static MAC addresses in E-LAN services Number of VLANs Number of MPLS tunnel APS protection groups Number of MPLS PW APS protection groups
Description 1k 2k
4k 1k
Supports a maximum of 1k MPLS PW APS protection groups, and a PW protection group can bind a maximum of 512 members (only on the N2PEX1).
NOTE MPLS PW APS and MPLS tunnel APS share the protection resources.
Number of MPLS tunnels that support OAM Number of MPLS PWs that support OAM MC-LAG protection MS-PW function
2k
2k (only on the N2PEX1)

NOTE MPLS PW OAM and MPLS tunnel OAM share the resources.
Supported only on the N2PEX1 Supports static switching of MS-PWs.
Table 3-36 lists the functions and features of the PEX2 board. Table 3-36 Functions and features of the PEX2 .unction and .eature Basic functions Functions when being used with the access board P5D# Provides two 10GE optical interfaces and can access and process 2x10 GE services. Does not support the access board, and two 10GE interfaces are available on the front panel of the board.
3-70
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
.unction and .eature Specifications of the interface
P5D# Supports the 10GBASE-SR, 10GBASE-LR, 10GBASE-ER, and 10GBASE-ZR Ethernet optical interfaces. The optical interface uses the LC connector and supports the transmission distances of 10 km, 40 km, and 80 km. Supports the 10GBASE-SR, 10GBASE-LR, 10GBASE-ER, and 10GBASE-ZR Ethernet optical interfaces. The optical interface uses the LC connector and supports the transmission distances of 0.3 km, 10 km, 40 km, and 80 km. Supports the DWDM colored optical interfaces. The optical interface uses the LC connector. The DWDM optical interface supports the transmission distance of 40/80 km.
Characteristics of the interface
Supports the full-duplex mode for the port. Supports the setting of the MTU for the Ethernet port. Supports the setting of the following parameters for the port: flow control, loopback mode, state, and query of the type of optical interface. Supports the RMON performance measurement function. Supports the setting and query of the optical power threshold.
Processing capability Loopback function Format of service frames
Processes 20 Gbit/s services in full-duplex mode. Supports inloops at the MAC layer of the Ethernet ports. Supports the encapsulation in IEEE 802.3 format, Ethernet II format, or IEEE 802.1q/p format. Supports the Jumbo frame with a length not more than 9000 bytes.
Type of Ethernet services HQoS
Supports point-to-point E-Line services. Supports multipoint-to-multipoint E-LAN services. Provides the HQoS function, including the scheduling function at multiple levels for the flow queue and port queue and the bandwidth restricting function, and provides the corresponding statistical information. Supports LAG protection. Supports the 1+1 (single-ended and dual-ended) and 1:1 (dual-ended) MPLS Tunnel APS. Supports LAG. Supports 1+1 (single-ended and dual-ended) and 1:1 (dual-ended) MPLS PW APS. Supports MC-LAG.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-71
.unction and .eature Clock function
P5D# Supports two channels of synchronous Ethernet clocks and the extraction of the clock from the physical layer of the port. The quality of the clock meets the requirement of the clock source. Supports two channels of IEEE 1588 V2 clocks.
Detects the fault at the physical layer of the board, the alarm reporting that the connection at the network port is lost, the alarm reporting that the interface fails, and the alarm reporting that the bit errors at the interface cross the threshold. Supports the hot-pluggable optical module and query of the information about the optical module. Supports the alarm detection function and reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates management and maintenance of the equipment.
ETH-OAM function MPLS OAM LPT for packet services Number of supported E-Line services Number of supported E-LAN services Number of MPLS tunnels
Supports the ETH-OAM function, which complies with IEEE 802.1ag, IEEE 802.3ah, and ITU-T Y.1731. Supports the MPLS tunnel OAM and PW OAM functions, with MPLS OAM in compliance with ITU-T Y.1711. Supports P2P LPT and P2MP LPT for packet services. When working with the N4GSCC: 4k When working with the N6GSCC: 8k 1k
Number of unidirectional/bidirectional MPLS tunnels (with tunnels shared): When working with the N4GSCC: 4k (unidirectional)/2k (bidirectional) When working with the N6GSCC: 16k (unidirectional)/8k (bidirectional)
Number of bidirectional static PWs Number of QinQ links Number of static MAC addresses in E-LAN services Number of VLANs
16k
1k 2k
4k
3-72
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
.unction and .eature Number of MPLS tunnel APS protection groups Number of MPLS PW APS protection groups
P5D# 1k
Supports a maximum of 1k MPLS PW APS protection groups, and a PW protection group can bind a maximum of 512 members.
Number of MPLS tunnels that support OAM Number of MPLS PWs that support OAM Number of MC-LAG protection groups MS-PW function
2k
2k
Supported
Supports static switching of MS-PWs.
Table 3-37 lists the functions and features of the PEG8 board. Table 3-37 Functions and features of the PEG8 .unction and .eature Basic functions P5G4 Provides eight GE optical interfaces and can access and process 8xGE signals. Works with the interface board PETF8/PEFF8/CQ1/MD12/MD75. One PEG8 board can access the FE/channelized STM-1/CES E1 services from a maximum of two interface boards. Specifications of the interface Supports the 1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX, 1000BASE-VX, and 1000BASE-ZX optical interfaces. The optical interface uses the LC connector and supports the transmission distances of 0.5 km, 10 km, 40 km, and 80 km. Supports the CWDM colored optical interfaces. The optical interface uses the LC connector and supports the transmission distance of 40 km.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-73
.unction and .eature Characteristics of the interface
P5G4 Supports the configuration of the full-duplex mode or auto-negotiation mode for the port. Supports the setting of the MTU for the Ethernet port. Supports the setting of the following parameters for the port: flow control function, loopback mode, state, and query of the type of optical interface. Supports the RMON performance measurement function. Supports the setting and query of the optical power threshold.
Processing capability Loopback function Format of service frames
Processes 5 Gbit/s services in full-duplex mode. Supports inloops at the MAC layer of the Ethernet ports. Supports the encapsulation in IEEE 802.3 format, Ethernet II format, or IEEE 802.1q/p format. Supports the Jumbo frame with a length not more than 9000 bytes.
Type of Ethernet services HQoS
Supports point-to-point E-Line services. Supports multipoint-to-multipoint E-LAN services. Provides the HQoS function. The PEG8 provides the scheduling function at multiple levels for the flow queue and port queue and the bandwidth restricting function, and provides the corresponding statistics information. Supports LAG protection. Supports the 1+1 (single-ended/dual-ended) and 1:1 (dual-ended) MPLS Tunnel APS. Supports LAG. Supports the 1+1 (single-ended/dual-ended) and 1:1 (dual-ended) MPLS PW APS. Supports MC-LAG.
Clock function
Provides eight GE optical interfaces that support the synchronous Ethernet clock feature. Supports eight channels of IEEE 1588 V2 clock signals.
Detects the fault at the physical layer of the board, the alarm reporting that the connection at the network port is lost, the alarm reporting that the interface fails, and the alarm reporting that the bit errors at the interface cross the threshold. Supports the hot-pluggable optical module and query of the information about the optical module. Supports the alarm detection function and reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates management and maintenance of the equipment.
3-74
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
.unction and .eature ETH-OAM function MPLS OAM LPT for packet services Number of supported E-Line services Number of supported E-LAN services Number of MPLS tunnels
P5G4 Supports the ETH-OAM function, which complies with IEEE 802.1ag, IEEE 802.3ah, and ITU-T Y.1731. Supports the MPLS tunnel OAM and PW OAM functions, with MPLS OAM in compliance with ITU-T Y.1711. Supports P2P LPT and P2MP LPT for packet services. When working with the N4GSCC: 4k When working with the N6GSCC: 8k 1k
Number of unidirectional/bidirectional MPLS tunnels (with tunnels shared): When working with the N4GSCC: 4k (unidirectional)/2k (bidirectional) When working with the N6GSCC: 16k (unidirectional)/8k (bidirectional)
Number of bidirectional static PWs Number of QinQ links Number of static MAC addresses in E-LAN services Number of VLANs Number of MPLS tunnel APS protection groups Number of MPLS PW APS protection groups
16k
1k 2k
4k 1k
Supports a maximum of 1k MPLS PW APS protection groups, and a PW protection group can bind a maximum of 512 members.
Number of MPLS tunnels that support OAM Number of MPLS PWs that support OAM
2k
2k
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-75
.unction and .eature Number of MC-LAG protection groups MS-PW function
P5G4 Supported.
Table 3-38 lists the functions and features of the PEG16 board. Table 3-38 Functions and features of the PEG16 .unction and .eature Basic functions P5G%3 Provides 16 GE interfaces and can access and process 16xGE signals. Works with the interface board PETF8. One PEG16 board can access the FE services of a maximum of two interface boards. Specifications of the interface Supports the 1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX, 1000BASE-VX, and 1000BASE-ZX optical interfaces. The optical interface uses the LC connector and supports the transmission distances of 0.5 km, 10 km, 40 km, and 80 km. Supports the CWDM colored optical interfaces. The optical interface uses the LC connector and supports the transmission distance of 40 km. Characteristics of the interface Supports the configuration of the full-duplex mode or auto-negotiation mode for the port. Supports the setting of the MTU for the Ethernet port. Supports the setting of the following parameters for the port: flow control function, loopback mode, state, and query of the type of optical interface. Supports the RMON performance measurement function. Supports the setting and query of the optical power threshold. Processing capability Loopback function Processes 10 Gbit/s services in full-duplex mode. Supports inloops/outloops at the PHY layer of the Ethernet port. Supports inloops at the MAC layer of the Ethernet port. Format of service frames Supports the encapsulation in IEEE 802.3 format, Ethernet II format, or IEEE 802.1q/p format. Supports the Jumbo frame with a length not more than 9000 bytes. Type of Ethernet services Supports point-to-point E-Line services. Supports multipoint-to-multipoint E-LAN services. Supports multipoint-to-point E-AGGR services.
3-76
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
.unction and .eature HQoS function
P5G%3 Provides the hierarchical QoS function. The board provides the scheduling function at multiple levels including the flow queue and port queue, the bandwidth restricting function, and the corresponding statistical information. Supports LAG protection. Supports the 1+1 (single-ended/dual-ended) and 1:1 (dual-ended) MPLS Tunnel APS. Supports the LAG.
Clock function
Provides two GE optical interfaces (that is, the first two optical interfaces) that support the synchronous Ethernet clock feature. Detects the fault at the physical layer of the board, the alarm indicating that the connection at the network port is lost, the alarm indicating that the interface fails, and the alarm indicating that the bit errors at the interface cross the threshold. Supports the hot-swappable optical module and query of the information about the optical module. Supports the alarm detection function and reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.
ETH-OAM function MPLS OAM function LPT for packet services Number of supported E-Line services Number of supported E-LAN services Number of supported E-AGGR services Number of MPLS tunnels Number of bidirectional static PWs Number of QinQ links Number of static MAC addresses in E-LAN services
Supports the ETH-OAM function, which complies with IEEE 802.1ag, IEEE 802.3ah, and ITU-T Y.1731. Supports the MPLS OAM function, which complies with ITU-T Y.1711. Supports P2P LPT and P2MP LPT for packet services. When working with the N4GSCC: 4k When working with the N6GSCC: 8k 1k 4, each of which supports 127 leaf ports Number of unidirectional/bidirectional MPLS tunnels (with the tunnels shared): 4k (unidirectional)/2k (bidirectional) 16k 1k 2k
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-77
.unction and .eature Number of VLANs Number of MPLS tunnel APS protection groups Number of MPLS tunnels that support OAM MS-PW function
P5G%3 4k 1k
2k
Table 3-39 lists the functions and features of the PETF8 board. Table 3-39 Functions and features of the PETF8 .unction and .eature Basic functions Specifications of the interface Characteristics of the interface P5T.4 Provides eight FE electrical interfaces, which are used to receive and transmit 8xFE electrical signals. Uses the RJ-45 connector and meets the specifications of the 100BASE-TX physical layer provided in IEEE 802.3. Supports the configuration of the full-duplex mode or auto-negotiation mode for the FE electrical port (in auto-negotiation mode, only the 100 Mbit/s full-duplex working mode is supported). Supports the RMON performance measurement function. Loopback function Supports inloops at the PHY layer of the Ethernet port. Supports outloops at the MAC layer of the Ethernet port. Format of service frames Type of Ethernet services HQoS function Supports the encapsulation in IEEE 802.3 format, Ethernet II format, or IEEE 802.1q/p format. Supports point-to-point E-Line services. Supports multipoint-to-multipoint E-LAN services. Provides the hierarchical QoS function. The board provides the scheduling function at multiple levels including the flow queue and port queue, the bandwidth restricting function, and the corresponding statistical information. Supports LAG protection. Supports eight channels of synchronous Ethernet clocks. Supports eight channels of IEEE 1588 V2 clocks.
LAG Clock function
3-78
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
.unction and .eature Protection schemes
P5T.4 Supports the 1+1 (single-ended/dual-ended) and 1:1 (single-ended/dual-ended) MPLS Tunnel APS. Supports the LAG. In addition, when working with the PEG8: Supports the 1+1 (single-ended/dual-ended) and 1:1 (single-ended/dual-ended) MPLS PW APS. Supports the MC-LAG.
Detects the fault at the physical layer of the board, the alarm indicating that the connection at the network port is lost, the alarm indicating that the interface fails, and the alarm indicating that the bit errors at the interface cross the threshold. Supports the hot-swappable function. Supports the alarm detection function and reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment. Supports the function of monitoring the voltage.
Table 3-40 lists the functions and features of the PEFF8 board. Table 3-40 Functions and features of the PEFF8 .unction and .eature Basic functions Specifications of the interface Characteristics of the interface P5..4 Provides eight FE optical interfaces, which are used to receive and transmit 8xFE optical signals. Supports the 100Base-FX Ethernet optical interfaces. The optical interface uses the LC connector and supports the transmission distances of 2 km, 15 km, 40 km, and 80 km. Supports two working modes of Ethernet interfaces, namely, full duplex and auto-negotiation. The Ethernet interface can be automatically negotiated into the 100M full duplex working mode only. Supports the setting of the following parameters for the port: loopback mode, state, and query of the type of optical interface. Supports the measurement based on the RMON function. Supports the setting and query of the optical power threshold. Loopback function Supports inloops at the PHY layer of the Ethernet port. Supports outloops at the MAC layer of the Ethernet port. Format of service frames Supports the encapsulation in IEEE 802.3 format, Ethernet II format, or IEEE 802.1q/p format.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-79
.unction and .eature Type of Ethernet services HQoS
P5..4 Supports point-to-point E-Line services. Supports multipoint-to-multipoint E-LAN services. Provides the HQoS function, including the scheduling function at multiple levels for the flow queue and port queue and the bandwidth restricting function, and provides the corresponding statistical information. Supports LAG protection. Supports the 1+1 (single-ended and dual-ended) and 1:1 (dual-ended) MPLS Tunnel APS Supports LAG. Supports the 1+1 (single-ended and dual-ended) and 1:1 (dual-ended) MPLS PW APS. Supports MC-LAG.
LAG Protection Scheme
Clock function
Supports eight channels of synchronous Ethernet clocks and the extraction of the clock from the physical layer of the port. The quality of the clock meets the requirement of the clock source. Supports eight channels of IEEE 1588 V2 clocks.
Detects the fault at the physical layer of the board, the alarm reporting that the connection at the network port is lost, the alarm reporting that the interface fails, and the alarm reporting that the bit errors at the interface crosses the threshold. Supports the hot-pluggable optical module and query of the information about the optical module. Supports the alarm detection function and reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.
-*-*0*# 5oD (oards

This topic describes the EoD boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 3-41, Table 3-42, and Table 3-43 provide the functions and features of the EDQ41. Table 3-41 Functions and features of the EDQ41 .unction and .eature Basic functions Description Transmits and receives 4xSTM-1/STM-4 optical signals.
3-80
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
.unction and .eature Specifications of the interface
Description The STM-1 or STM-4 optical module can be used. When the STM-1 optical module is used, the standard S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 optical interfaces are supported. The optical interfaces comply with ITU-T G.957. When the STM-4 optical module is used, the standard S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, and Ve-4.2 optical interfaces are supported. The optical interfaces of the S-4.1, L-4.1, and L-4.2 types comply with ITU-T G.957. The optical interface of the Ve-4.2 type complies with the standards defined by Huawei.
Specifications of optical modules
Supports the detection and query of the information about optical modules. Supports the usage and detection of SFP pluggable optical modules, facilitating the maintenance of optical modules. Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the function of setting the on/off state of a laser.
Service processing
Supports VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services when the STM-1 optical module is used. Supports VC-12/VC-3/VC-4/VC-4-4c services when the STM-4 optical module is used.
Overhead processing
Processes the section overheads of STM-4/STM-1 signals. Processes path overheads. Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, J2, and C2 bytes. Supports the ECC communication.
Loopback function
Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces. Supports inloops and outloops at the VC-4 level.
Alarms and performance events Protection scheme
Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment. Supports Two-fiber ring MSP. Supports Four-fiber ring MSP. Supports Linear MSP. Supports SNCP. Supports SNCMP. Supports SNCTP. Supports fiber-shared virtual trail protection. Supports optical-path-shared MSP. Each optical interface can process four sets of K bytes. One EDQ41 can support a maximum of four MSP rings.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-81
.unction and .eature Maintenance features
Description Supports the warm reset and cold reset. A warm reset does not affect services. Supports the alarm detection function and reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.
Table 3-42 Packet features of the EDQ41 .unction and .eature Basic functions Format of service frames Description Bridges a maximum of 2.5 Gbit/s EoS services to the packet domain. Supports the encapsulation in IEEE 802.3 format, Ethernet II format, or IEEE 802.1q/p format. Supports the jumbo frame with a length not more than 9000 bytes. Maximum uplink bandwidth Type of Ethernet services HQoS LAG Protection scheme 2.5 Gbit/s Supports point-to-point E-Line services. Supports multipoint-to-multipoint E-LAN services. Supports the UNI port policy. Supports VCG-side manual load non-sharing LAG protection. Supports LAG. Supports MC-LAG. Maintenance features ETH-OAM Supports the performance statistics and report of VCTRUNKs. Supports the query and report of alarms. Not supported.
NOTE The board does not support creation of maintenance points but supports transparent transmission of ETH-OAM packets.
MSTP IGMP Snooping Number of supported E-Line services Number of supported E-LAN services
Not supported. Not supported. When working with the N4GSCC: 4k When working with the N6GSCC: 8k 1k
3-82
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Table 3-43 EoS data features of the EDQ41 .unction and .eature Basic function Encapsulation format EPL Number of VCTRUNKs 5DC/% Supports transparent transmission of Ethernet services. Supports the GFP-F protocol. Supports transparent transmission of PORT-based EPL services. Binds a maximum of 63 VCTRUNKs, equivalent to 504 VC-12s, 48 VC-3s, or 16 VC-4s. Configuration features: The first eight VC-4s (including VC-3s and VC-12s in the VC-4s) and the last eight VC-4s (including VC-3s and VC-12s in the VC-4s) cannot be bound to the same VCTRUNK. Only 5th to 8th and the 13th to 16th VC-4s can bind VC-12 paths. In addition, VC-12s in the 5th to 8th VC-4s cannot be bound to the same VCTRUNK as the VC-12s in the 13th to 16th VC-4s. VC-3 and VC-4 signals can be bound to any of the 1st to 16th VC-4s. VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK63 can be bound to any of the 1st to 16th VC-4s. VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK8 each can be bound to a maximum of eight VC-4s. VCTRUNK9 to VCTRUNK63 each can be bound to a maximum of one VC-4, three VC-3s, or 63 VC-12s. A VC-4 cannot bind VC-3 and VC-12 paths at the same time. LCAS Test frames Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T G.7042. Supports the transmitting and receiving of GFP test frames or Ethernet test frames.
-*-*0*- C5S Service Processin (oards

This topic describes the CES service processing boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 3-44 lists the functions and features of the CQ1 board. Table 3-44 Functions and features of the CQ1 .unction and .eature Basic functions CC% Transmits and receives four-port channelized STM-1 optical signals, and works with the PEG8 to process four-port channelized STM-1 CES services.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-83
.unction and .eature Functions of the interface
CC% ALS Loopback types of the port Not supported Inloop Outloop Non-loopback Auto disabling of port loopback Not supported 252 CESoPSN SAToP Supports the timeslot compression function. In the case of the CES service in CESoPSN mode, the CQ1 compresses idle timeslots to improve the bandwidth utilization on the NNI side. The jitter compensation buffering time of CES services can be set to a value in the range of 0.125 ms to 64 ms with a step of 0.125 ms. The packet loading time of CES services can be set to a value in the range of 0.125 ms to 5 ms with a step of 0.125 ms.
NOTE The packet loading time needs to be set to the same value for the NEs at both ends. The jitter compensation buffering time needs to be more than at least two times of the packet loading time.
CES
Supported CES services Supported emulation mode
Bit error test function Protection scheme SSM protocol PRBS
Supports the function of testing bit errors and reports corresponding performance events in the case of bit errors. Supports the 1+1 and 1:1 Packet-based linear MSP. Supported Not supported
Table 3-45 lists the functions and features of the MD12 board. Table 3-45 Functions and features of the MD12 .unction and .eature Basic functions Bit error test function 2D%# Transmits and receives 32xE1 signals, and works with the PEG8 to process CES E1 services. Supports the function of testing bit errors and reports corresponding performance events in the case of bit errors.
3-84
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
.unction and .eature Number of CES services Emulation mode Clock function
2D%# 32 CESoPSN, SAToP Restores four CES adaptive clock recover (ACR) clocks.
NOTE Clock recovery over ports 1 to 16 is independent of clock recovery over ports 17 to 32. That is, clocks that are recovered from services over ports 1 to 16 can be transmitted out of ports 1 to 16 and clocks that are recovered from services over ports 17 to 32 can be transmitted out of ports 17 to 32.
Timeslot compression function Clock mode Line code of E1 link Frame format of E1 link Loopback mode Jitter compensation buffering time of CES services Packet loading time of CES packets
In the case of the CES services in CESoPSN mode, the MD12 compresses idle timeslots to improve the bandwidth utilization on the NNI side. Line Clock Mode and Null. HDB3 code Unframed format, double-framed format, or E1 CRC-4 multiframe format (default value) Inloop, outloop, or non-loopback (default value) The jitter compensation buffering time of CES services can be set to a value in the range of 0.125 ms to 64 ms with a step of 0.125 ms.
The packet loading time of CES services can be set to a value in the range of 0.125 ms to 5 ms with a step of 0.125 ms.
PRBS
Supports the tributary PRBS function.
Table 3-46 lists the functions and features of the MD75 board. Table 3-46 Functions and features of the MD75 .unction and .eature Basic functions Bit error test function 2D)0 Transmits and receives 32xE1 signals, and works with the PEG8 to process CES E1 services. Supports the function of testing bit errors and reports corresponding performance events in the case of bit errors.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-85
.unction and .eature Number of CES services Emulation mode Timeslot compression function Clock function
2D)0 32 CESoPSN, SAToP In the case of the CES services in CESoPSN mode, the MD75 compresses idle timeslots to improve the bandwidth utilization on the NNI side. Recovers four CES ACR clocks.
NOTE Clock recovery over ports 1 to 16 is independent of clock recovery over ports 17 to 32. That is, clocks that are recovered from services over ports 1 to 16 can be transmitted out of ports 1 to 16 and clocks that are recovered from services over ports 17 to 32 can be transmitted out of ports 17 to 32.
Clock mode Line code of E1 link Frame format of E1 link Loopback mode Jitter compensation buffering time of CES services Packet loading time of CES packets
Line Clock Mode and Null. HDB3 code Unframed format, double-framed format, or E1 CRC-4 multiframe format (default value) Inloop, outloop, or non-loopback (default value) The jitter compensation buffering time of CES services can be set to a value in the range of 0.125 ms to 64 ms with a step of 0.125 ms.
The packet loading time of CES services can be set to a value in the range of 0.125 ms to 5 ms with a step of 0.125 ms.
PRBS
Supports the tributary PRBS function.
-*/ 2STP Data .eatures

The data features include Ethernet features, RPR features, ATM features, SAN features and DDN features. 3.4.1 Ethernet Features This topic describes the functions, application and protection of the Ethernet features of the OptiX OSN equipment. 3.4.2 RPR Features
The RPR of the OptiX OSN 3500 is suitable for the ring topology. The RPR can quickly recover Ethernet services from a fiber cut or a link failure. 3.4.3 ATM Features This topic describes the functions, application and protection of the ATM features of the OptiX OSN 3500. 3.4.4 DDN Features This topic describes the functions and application of the DDN features of the OptiX OSN 3500. 3.4.5 SAN Features The OptiX OSN 3500 provides a multiservice transparent transmission processing board, N1MST4, to access and transparently transmit FC, FICON, ESCON and DVB-ASI services.
-*/*% 5thernet .eatures

This topic describes the functions, application and protection of the Ethernet features of the OptiX OSN equipment. 3.4.1.1 Functions of Transparent Transmission Boards The OptiX OSN equipment provides many Ethernet boards to meet different Ethernet service requirements. 3.4.1.2 Functions of Switching Boards The OptiX OSN equipment provides various types of Ethernet switching boards to realize different Ethernet services. 3.4.1.3 Application The OptiX OSN equipment has the Ethernet access function integrated on the SDH transmission platform. 3.4.1.4 Protection OptiX OSN 3500 provides layered protection on Ethernet services.
-*/*%*% .unctions o+ Transparent Transmission (oards

The OptiX OSN equipment provides many Ethernet boards to meet different Ethernet service requirements. Table 3-47 provides the functions and features of the EFT8. Table 3-47 Functions and features of the EFT8 .unction and .eature Basic functions 5.T4 Transmits 16xFE services.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-87
.unction and .eature Functions when being used with the interface board
5.T4 Accesses 8 Ethernet signals through the electrical interface independently. Accesses 16 Ethernet signals through the electrical interface when the EFT8 is used with the ETF8. Accesses 8 Ethernet optical signals and 8 Ethernet electrical signals when the EFT8 is used with the EFF8.
Specifications of the optical interface
Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals when the EFT8 is used with the ETF8. Supports 100BASE-FX/100BASE-TX signals when the EFT8 is used with the EFF8. The optical interfaces comply with IEEE 802.3u.
Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, and IEEE 802.1q TAG formats. Ports 1-4 and 9-12 on the board support the frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 1535 bytes, whereas ports 5-8 and 13-16 support the frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes. The board supports the Jumbo frame with a length not more than 9600 bytes. The maximum uplink bandwidth is 1.25 Gbit/s. The EFT8 can adapt to the bandwidth of the slot. 24xVC-3, or 126xVC-12 + 18xVC-3 Number of supported VCTRUNKs: 16 Configuration principles are as follows: A VCTRUNK can be bound with a maximum of three VC-3s or a maximum of 63 VC-12s. A VCTRUNK can be bound with the VC-12 path or VC-3 path at one time. A VCTRUNK should not be bound with VC-12 and VC-3 paths at the same time. Different VCTRUNKs can be bound with paths at different levels. VCTRUNK 1-VCTRUNK 8 can be bound with VC-3s 1-12 or VC-12s 1-63. VCTRUNK 9-VCTRUNK 16 can be bound with VC-3s 13-24 or VC-12s 64-126. A VCTRUNK cannot be bound with VC-12s numbered 1-63 and VC-3s numbered 10-12 at the same time. In addition, a VCTRUNK cannot be bound with VC-12s numbered 64-126 and VC-3s numbered 22-24 at the same time. VC-4s numbered 4 and 8 support the binding of VC-3 and VC-12 paths. The other VC-4s support the binding of VC-3 paths only.
Maximum uplink bandwidth Bound bandwidth VCTRUNKs
Mapping granularities Encapsulation format
Supports VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-Xv (X63), and VC-3-Xv (X3) granularities. Supports the HDLC, LAPS, and GFP-F protocols.
3-88
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
.unction and .eature EPL services MTU
5.T4 Supports the PORT-based transparent transmission. Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 1518 bytes to 1535 bytes. After the setting becomes valid, the length of the packets that enter or exit the IP ports is restricted by the pre-set MTU. Does not support the MPLS. Supports VLAN transparent transmission. Does not support the link aggregation function. Does not support the ETH-OAM function. Does not support the QoS function. Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T G.7042. Supports the P2P LPT in GFP bearer mode. Supports the FE port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x. Does not support the high-precision time. Receives and transmits GFP test frames. Does not support the port mirroring function. Supports inloops at the PHY layer on Ethernet ports. Supports inloops and outloops at the MAC layer on Ethernet ports. Supports inloops and outloops at the VC-3 level.
MPLS VLAN Link aggregation function ETH-OAM function QoS function LCAS function LPT function Flow control function High-precision time (IEEE 1588 V2) Test frames Port mirroring Loopback function
Protection schemes
Supports the following protection schemes at the Ethernet network level: LCAS LPT
Ethernet performance monitoring Alarms and performance events
Supports Ethernet performance monitoring at the port level.
Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.
Table 3-48 provides the functions and features of the EFT8A.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-89
Table 3-48 Functions and features of the EFT8A .unction and .eature Basic functions Functions when being used with the interface board Specifications of the optical interface Format of service frames 5.T4A Transparently transmits 8xFE services. Accesses 8xFE signals by providing interfaces on the front panel.
Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals. The optical interfaces comply with IEEE 802.3u. Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, and IEEE 802.1q TAG formats. The first four ports support the frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 1535 bytes and the last four ports support the frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes. The board supports the Jumbo frame with a length not more than 9600 bytes. 622 Mbit/s 12xVC-3, or 63xVC-12 + 9xVC-3 Number of supported VCTRUNKs: 8 Configuration principles are as follows: A VCTRUNK can be bound with a maximum of three VC-3s or a maximum of 63 VC-12s. A VCTRUNK can be bound with the VC-12 path or VC-3 path at one time. A VCTRUNK should not be bound with VC-12 and VC-3 paths at the same time. Different VCTRUNKs can be bound with paths at different levels. A VCTRUNK cannot be bound with VC-12s numbered 1-63 and VC-3s numbered 10-12 at the same time. VC-4 numbered 4 supports the binding of VC-3 and VC-12 paths. The other VC-4s support the binding of VC-3 paths only.
Mapping granularities Encapsulation format EPL services MTU
Supports VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-Xv (X63), and VC-3-Xv (X3) granularities. Supports the HDLC, LAPS, and GFP-F protocols. Supports the PORT-based transparent transmission. Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 1518 bytes to 1535 bytes. After the setting becomes valid, the length of the packets that enter or exit the IP ports is restricted by the pre-set MTU. Does not support the MPLS. Supports VLAN transparent transmission.
MPLS VLAN
3-90
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
.unction and .eature Link aggregation function ETH-OAM function QoS function LCAS function LPT function Flow control function High-precision time (IEEE 1588 V2) Test frames Port mirroring Loopback function
5.T4A Does not support the link aggregation function. Does not support the ETH-OAM function. Does not support the QoS function. Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T G.7042. Supports the P2P LPT in GFP bearer mode. Supports the FE interface-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x. Does not support the high-precision time. Receives and transmits GFP test frames. Does not support the port mirroring function. Supports inloops at the PHY layer on Ethernet ports. Supports inloops and outloops at the MAC layer on Ethernet ports. Supports inloops and outloops at the VC-3 level.
Protection schemes
Supports the following protection schemes at the Ethernet network level: LCAS LPT
Table 3-49 provides the functions and features of the EGT2. Table 3-49 Functions and features of the EGT2 .unction and .eature Basic functions Functions when being used with the interface board 5GT# Transparently transmits 2xGE services. Accesses 2xGE signals by providing interfaces on the front panel.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-91
.unction and .eature Specifications of the optical interface
5GT# Supports the 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX Ethernet optical interfaces. The optical interfaces support the auto-negotiation function in compliance with IEEE 802.3z. The optical interfaces use the SFP optical module and support hot swapping. When the multi-mode optical fiber is used, the maximum transmission distance is 550 m. When the single-mode optical fiber is used, the maximum transmission distance is 10 km. The optical modules that can meet different requirements for the transmission distance such as 40 km and 80 km can also be used. The N2EGT2 also supports the 1000BASE-T RJ-45 Ethernet electrical interface. The electrical interface supports the 1000M full-duplex working mode. The N2EGT2 uses the SFP electrical interface and supports hot swapping. The maximum transmission distance is 100 m.
Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, and IEEE 802.1q TAG formats. Supports the frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes. Supports the Jumbo frame with a length less than 9600 bytes.
The maximum uplink bandwidth is 2.5 Gbit/s. The EGT2 can adapt to the bandwidth of the slot. 16xVC-4, or 48xVC-3 Number of supported VCTRUNKs: 2 Configuration principles are as follows: N1EGT2: A VCTRUNK can be bound with a maximum of eight VC-4s or a maximum of 24 VC-3s. A VCTRUNK can be bound with VC-4s numbered 1-16 or VC-3s numbered 1-48. N2EGT2: A VCTRUNK can be bound with a maximum of 16 VC-4s or a maximum of 48 VC-3s. A VCTRUNK can be bound with VC-4s numbered 1-16 or VC-3s numbered 1-48. The virtual concatenation modes of the two VCTRUNKs of the board should be the same. That is, the two VCTRUNKs should be of the VC-4 virtual concatenation or of the VC-3 virtual concatenation.
Mapping granularities Encapsulation format EPL services
Supports VC-3, VC-4, VC-3-Xv (X 24 (N1EGT2); X 48 (N2EGT2)), and VC-4-Xv (X 8 (N1EGT2); X 16 (N2EGT2)) granularities. Supports the HDLC, LAPS, and GFP-F protocols. Supports the PORT-based transparent transmission.
3-92
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
.unction and .eature MTU
5GT# The N1EGT2 supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes. After the setting becomes valid, the length of the packets that enter or exit the IP ports is restricted by the pre-set MTU. The N2EGT2 supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes. After the setting becomes valid, the length of the packets that enter the IP ports is restricted by the pre-set MTU.
MPLS VLAN Link aggregation function ETH-OAM function
Does not support the MPLS. Supports the VLAN transparent transmission. Does not support the link aggregation function. The N1EGT2 does not support the ETH-OAM function. The N2EGT2 supports CC for the multicast service, LB test for the unicast service, and LT test. The ETH-OAM function complies with IEEE 802.1ag.
QoS function LCAS function LPT function Flow control function High-precision time (IEEE 1588 V2) Test frames Port mirroring Loopback function Protection schemes
Does not support the QoS function. Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T G.7042. Supports the P2P LPT in GFP bearer mode. Supports the GE port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x. Does not support the high-precision time. Receives and transmits GFP test frames. Does not support the port mirroring function. Supports inloops on Ethernet ports (at the PHY layer or MAC layer). Supports the following protection schemes at the Ethernet network level: LCAS LPT
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-93
-*/*%*# .unctions o+ S,itchin (oards

The OptiX OSN equipment provides various types of Ethernet switching boards to realize different Ethernet services. Table 3-50 provides the functions and features of the EFS0. Table 3-50 Functions and features of the EFS0 .unction and .eature Basic functions Functions when being used with the interface board 5.S" Processes 8xFE services and supports the convergence of 60x10 Mbit/s or 6x100 Mbit/s services. Accesses 8xFE signals through the electrical interface when the EFS0 is used with the ETF8. Accesses 8xFE signals through the optical interface when the EFS0 is used with the EFF8. Provides the TPS protection for the 8xFE signals through the electrical interface when the EFS0 is used with the ETS8 and TSB8. The N5EFS0 can access 8xFE signals through the electrical interface when it is used with the ETF8A. The N5EFS0 can access 8xFE signals through the optical interface when it is used with the EFF8A. Specifications of the optical interface Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals when the EFS0 is used with the ETF8. Supports 100BASE-FX signals when the EFS0 is used with the EFF8. The optical interfaces comply with IEEE 802.3u. The N5EFS0 supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals when it is used with the ETF8A. The N5EFS0 supports 100BASE-FX signals when it is used with the EFF8A. The optical interfaces comply with IEEE 802.3u. Format of service frames Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, and IEEE 802.1 q/p formats. Supports the frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes. Supports the Jumbo frame with a length less than 9600 bytes. Maximum uplink bandwidth The maximum uplink bandwidth of the N1EFS0 is 622 Mbit/s. The maximum uplink bandwidth of the N2EFS0/N4EFS0/N5EFS0 is 1.25 Gbit/s. The EFS0 can adapt to the bandwidth of the slot. Bound bandwidth N1EFS0: 12xVC-3, or 63xVC-12 + 9xVC-3 N2EFS0/N4EFS0/N5EFS0: 24xVC-3, or 126xVC-12 + 18xVC-3
3-94
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
.unction and .eature VCTRUNKs
5.S" The number of supported VCTRUNKs is as follows: The number of VCTRUNKs supported by the N1EFS0 is 12. The number of VCTRUNKs supported by the N2EFS0/N4EFS0/N5EFS0 is 24. Configuration principles are as follows: VCTRUNK 1-VCTRUNK 12 can be bound with VC-4s numbered 1-4 only. VCTRUNK 13-VCTRUNK 24 can be bound with VC-4s numbered 5-8 only. VC-4s numbered 4 and 8 support the binding of VC-3 and VC-12 paths. The other VC-4s support the binding of VC-3 paths only. A VC-4 cannot be bound with VC-3 and VC-12 paths at the same time.
Mapping granularities Encapsulation format EPL services EVPL services EPLAN services
Supports VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-Xv (X63), and VC-3-Xv (X12) granularities. Supports the GFP-F encapsulation. Supports the PORT-based transparent transmission. Supports PORT+VLAN-based EVPL services that use the frame encapsulation formats of MartinioE and stack VLAN. Supports the point-to-multipoint (P2MP) converging service that is based on Layer 2. Supports the Layer 2 forwarding function. Supports switching on the client and SDH sides. Supports the blacklist that can contain 2K records and also the static MAC address table that can contain 2K records. The sum of the number of records in the blacklist and the number of addresses in the static MAC address table must not exceed 2K. The blacklist function of the N5EFS0 supports verification of destination MAC addresses only. Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address. The capacity of the MAC address table is 16K. The aging time of the MAC address can be set and queried. Supports the configuration of the static MAC route. The N1EFS0/N2EFS0 does not support the query of the dynamic MAC address. The N4EFS0/N5EFS0 supports the query of the dynamic MAC address. Supports the creation, deletion, and query of the VB. The maximum number of supported VBs is 16. The maximum number of logical ports for each VB is 30. Queries the number of actually learnt MAC addresses based on VB+VLAN or VB+LP. Supports the EPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-95
.unction and .eature EVPLAN services
5.S" Supports EVPLAN virtual bridges. Supports data isolation based on VB+VLAN. Supports the setting of a maximum of 4096 VLAN services. Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1q virtual bridge.
MTU
The N1EFS0/N2EFS0/N4EFS0 supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes. After the setting becomes valid, the length of the packets that exit the IP ports is restricted by the pre-set MTU. The N5EFS0 supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes. After the setting becomes valid, the length of the packets that enter the IP ports is restricted by the pre-set MTU.
MPLS VLAN Rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) Link aggregation function IGMP snooping) ETH-OAM function
Supports the MPLS. Supports 4k VLANs. The VLAN technology complies with IEEE 802.1q/p. Supports the broadcast packet suppression function and RSTP that comply with IEEE 802.1w. The N1EFS0 does not support the link aggregation function. The N2EFS0, N4EFS0, and N5EFS0 support manual link aggregation. Supports the IGMP snooping function. The N1EFS0 and N2EFS0 do not support the ETH-OAM function. The N4EFS0 and N5EFS0 support continuity check (CC) for the multicast service, loopback (LB) test for the unicast service, link trace (LT) test, loop detection (LD), auto-negotiation, fault diagnosis, and link performance detection. The ETH-OAM function complies with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah.
QoS function
Supports the CAR. The granularity is 64 kbit/s. The N1EFS0 supports the service classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN ID, or PORT+VLAN PRI. The N2EFS0, N4EFS0, and N5EFS0 support the flow classification based on PORT, PORT++VLAN ID, or PORT+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI.
LCAS function LPT function
Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T G.7042. The N1EFS0/N2EFS0 supports the point-to-point (P2P) LPT. The N4EFS0/N5EFS0 supports the P2P LPT and P2MP LPT.
Flow control function
Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.
3-96
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
.unction and .eature High-precision time (IEEE 1588 V2) Test frames
5.S" Does not support the high-precision time. The N1EFS0/N2EFS0 receives and transmits Ethernet test frames. The N4EFS0/N5EFS0 receives and transmits Ethernet test frames or GFP test frames.
Loopback function
Supports inloops on Ethernet ports (at the PHY layer or MAC layer). The N1EFS0, N2EFS0 and N4EFS0 support inloops and outloops at the VC-3 level. The N5EFS0 does not support inloops and outloops at the VC-3 level.
Protection schemes
Supports the following protection schemes at the Ethernet equipment level and network level: The N2EFS0/N4EFS0/N5EFS0 supports TPS. STP/RSTP LCAS LPT LAG
Supports Ethernet performance monitoring at the port level. Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.
Table 3-51 provides the functions and features of the EFS0A. Table 3-51 Functions and features of the EFS0A .unction and .eature Basic functions Functions when being used with the interface board 5.S"A Processes 16xFE services. Accesses 16xFE signals through the electrical interface when the EFS0A is used with the ETF8. Accesses 16xFE signals through the optical interface when the EFS0A is used with the EFF8. Accesses 8xFE signals through the electrical interface and 8xFE signals through the optical interface when the EFS0A is used with the ETF8 and EFF8. Provides the TPS protection for the 16xFE signals through the electrical interface when the EFS0A is used with the ETS8 and TSB8.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-97
5.S"A Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals when the EFS0A is used with the ETF8. Supports 100BASE-FX signals when the EFS0A is used with the EFF8. The optical interfaces comply with IEEE 802.3u.
Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, and IEEE 802.1 q/p formats. Supports the frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes. Supports the Jumbo frame with a length less than 9600 bytes.
The maximum uplink bandwidth is 2.5 Gbit/s. The EFS0A can adapt to the bandwidth of the slot. 48xVC-3, or 252xVC-12 + 36xVC-3 Number of supported VCTRUNKs: 32 Configuration principles are as follows: VC-4s numbered 4, 8, 12, and 16 support the binding of VC-3 and VC-12 paths. The other VC-4s support the binding of VC-3 paths only. A VC-4 cannot be bound with VC-3 and VC-12 paths at the same time.
Mapping granularities Encapsulation format EPL services EVPL services
Supports VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-Xv (X63), and VC-3-Xv (X12) granularities. Supports the GFP-F protocol. Supports the PORT-based transparent transmission. Supports PORT+VLAN-based EVPL services that use the frame encapsulation formats of MartinioE and stack VLAN.
3-98
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
.unction and .eature EPLAN services
5.S"A Supports the P2MP converging service that is based on Layer 2. Supports the Layer 2 forwarding function. Supports switching on the client and SDH sides. Supports the blacklist that can contain 2K records and also the static MAC address table that can contain 2K records. The sum of the number of records in the blacklist and the number of addresses in the static MAC address table must not exceed 2K. The blacklist function supports verification of destination MAC addresses only. Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address. The capacity of the MAC address table is 16K. The aging time of the MAC address can be set and queried. Supports the configuration of the static MAC route. The N1EFS0, N2EFS0, and N5EFS0 support the query of the dynamic MAC address. Support the query of the dynamic MAC address. Supports the creation, deletion, and query of the VB. The maximum number of supported VBs is 16. The maximum number of logical ports for each VB is 48. Queries the number of actually learnt MAC addresses based on VB+VLAN or VB+LP. Supports the EPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge.
EVPLAN services
Supports EVPLAN virtual bridges. Supports data isolation based on VB+VLAN. Supports the setting of a maximum of 4096 VLAN services. Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1q virtual bridge.
MTU
Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes. After the setting becomes valid, the length of the packets that enter the IP ports is restricted by the pre-set MTU. Supports the MPLS. Supports 4k VLANs. The VLAN technology complies with IEEE 802.1q/p. Supports the broadcast packet suppression function and RSTP that comply with IEEE 802.1w. Supports manual link aggregation. Supports the IGMP snooping function.
MPLS VLAN RSTP Link aggregation function IGMP snooping
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-99
.unction and .eature ETH-OAM function
5.S"A Supports CC for the multicast service, LB test for the unicast service, LT test, LD, auto-negotiation, fault diagnosis, and link performance detection. Supports the CAR. The granularity is 64 kbit/s. Supports the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN ID, or PORT+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI.
QoS function
LCAS function LPT function Flow control function High-precision time (IEEE 1588 V2) Test frames Port mirroring Loopback function Protection schemes
Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T G.7042. Supports the P2P LPT and P2MP LPT. Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x. Does not support the high-precision time. Receives and transmits Ethernet test frames. Supports ingress mirroring. Supports inloops on Ethernet ports (at the PHY layer or MAC layer). Supports the following protection schemes at the Ethernet network level: STP/RSTP LCAS LPT LAG
Supports port-based Ethernet performance monitoring. Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.
Table 3-52 provides the functions and features of the EFS4. Table 3-52 Functions and features of the EFS4 .unction and .eature Basic functions Functions when being used with the interface board 5.S/ Processes 4xFE services. Accesses 4xFE signals by providing interfaces on the front panel.
3-100
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
.unction and .eature Specifications of the optical interface Format of service frames
5.S/ Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals. The optical interfaces comply with IEEE 802.3u. Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, and IEEE 802.1 q/p formats. Supports the frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes and supports the Jumbo frame with a length less than 9600 bytes. The maximum uplink bandwidth of the N1EFS4 is 622 Mbit/s. The maximum uplink bandwidth of the N2EFS4 and N3EFS4 is 1.25 Gbit/s. The EFS4 can adapt to the bandwidth of the slot.
Maximum uplink bandwidth
Bound bandwidth
N1EFS4: 12xVC-3, or 63xVC-12 + 9xVC-3 N2EFS4/N3EFS4: 24xVC-3 or 126xVC-12 + 18xVC-3
VCTRUNKs
The number of VCTRUNKs supported by the N1EFS4 is 12. The number of VCTRUNKs supported by the N2EFS4 and N3EFS4 is 24. Configuration principles are as follows: VCTRUNK 1-VCTRUNK 12 can be bound with VC-4s numbered 1-4 only. VCTRUNK 13-VCTRUNK 24 can be bound with VC-4s numbered 5-8 only. VC-4s numbered 4 and 8 support the binding of VC-3 and VC-12 paths. The other VC-4s support the binding of VC-3 paths only. A VC-4 cannot be bound with VC-3 and VC-12 paths at the same time.
Supports VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-Xv (X63), and VC-3-Xv (X12) granularities. Supports the GFP-F protocol. Supports the PORT-based transparent transmission. Supports PORT+VLAN-based EVPL services that use the frame encapsulation formats of MartinioE and stack VLAN.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-101
5.S/ Supports the P2MP converging service that is based on Layer 2. Supports the Layer 2 forwarding function. Supports switching on the client and SDH sides. Supports the blacklist that can contain 2K records and also the static MAC address table that can contain 2K records. The sum of the number of records in the blacklist and the number of addresses in the static MAC address table must not exceed 2K. The blacklist function of the N3EFS4 supports verification of destination MAC addresses only. Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address. The capacity of the MAC address table is 16K. The aging time of the MAC address can be set and queried. Supports the configuration of the static MAC route. The N2EFS4 and N3EFS4 support the query of the dynamic MAC address. The N1EFS4 does not support the query of the dynamic MAC address. Supports the creation, deletion, and query of the VB. The maximum number of supported VBs is 16. The maximum number of logical ports for each VB is 30. Queries the number of actually learnt MAC addresses based on VB+VLAN or VB+LP. Supports the EPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge.
EVPLAN services
MTU
The N1EFS4/N2EFS4 supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes. After the setting becomes valid, the length of the packets that exit the IP ports is restricted by the pre-set MTU. The N3EFS4 supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes. After the setting becomes valid, the length of the packets that enter the IP ports is restricted by the pre-set MTU.
MPLS VLAN RSTP Link aggregation
Supports the MPLS. Supports 4k VLANs. The VLAN technology complies with IEEE 802.1q/p. Supports the broadcast packet suppression function and RSTP that comply with IEEE 802.1w. Supports manual link aggregation.
3-102
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
.unction and .eature IGMP snooping ETH-OAM function
5.S/ Supports the IGMP snooping function. The N1EFS4 does not support the ETH-OAM function. The N2EFS4 and N3EFS4 support CC for the multicast service, LB test for the unicast service, LT test, LD, auto-negotiation, fault diagnosis, and link performance detection. The ETH-OAM function complies with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah.
QoS function
Supports the CAR. The granularity is 64 kbit/s. The N1EFS4 supports the service classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN ID, or PORT+VLAN PRI. The N2EFS4 and N3EFS4 support the flow classification based on PORT, PORT++VLAN ID, or PORT+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI.
Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T G.7042. The N1EFS4 supports the P2P LPT. The N2EFS4 and N3EFS4 support the P2P LPT and P2MP LPT.
Flow control function High-precision time (IEEE 1588 V2) Test frames
Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x. Does not support the high-precision time. The N1EFS4 receives and transmits Ethernet test frames. The N2EFS4/N3EFS4 receives and transmits Ethernet test frames or GFP test frames. Receives and transmits Ethernet test frames.
Port mirroring Loopback function
The N3EFS4 supports ingress mirroring. Supports inloops on Ethernet ports (at the PHY layer or MAC layer). The N1EFS4 and N2EFS4 also support inloops and outloops at the VC-3 level.
Protection schemes
Supports the following protection schemes at the Ethernet network level: STP/RSTP LCAS LPT LAG
Ethernet performance monitoring
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-103
.unction and .eature Alarms and performance events
5.S/ Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.
Table 3-53 provides the functions and features of the EGS2. Table 3-53 Functions and features of the EGS2 .unction and .eature Basic functions Functions when being used with the interface board Specifications of the optical interface 5GS# Processes 2xGE services. Accesses 2xGE signals by providing interfaces on the front panel.
Supports the 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX Ethernet optical interfaces. The optical interfaces support the auto-negotiation function in compliance with IEEE 802.3z. The optical interfaces use the SFP optical module and support hot swapping. When the multi-mode optical fiber is used, the maximum transmission distance is 550 m. When the single-mode optical fiber is used, the maximum transmission distance is 10 km. The optical modules that can meet different requirements for the transmission distance such as 40 km and 80 km can also be used. The N3EGS2 also supports the 1000BASE-T RJ-45 Ethernet electrical interface. The electrical interface supports the auto-negotiation function. The negotiated rate can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, or 1000 Mbit/s. The N3EGS2 uses the SFP electrical interface and supports hot swapping. The maximum transmission distance is 100 m.
Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, and IEEE 802.1q/p formats. Supports the frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes. Supports the Jumbo frame with a length less than 9600 bytes.
Maximum uplink bandwidth Bound bandwidth
The maximum uplink bandwidth is 2.5 Gbit/s. The EGS2 can adapt to the bandwidth of the slot. 48xVC-3, or 252xVC-12 + 36xVC-3
3-104
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
.unction and .eature VCTRUNKs
5GS# Number of supported VCTRUNKs: 48 Configuration principles are as follows: VCTRUNK 1-VCTRUNK 12 can be bound with VC-4s numbered 1-4 only. VCTRUNK13-VCTRUNK 24 can be bound with VC-4s numbered 5-8 only. VCTRUNK 25-VCTRUNK 36 can be bound with VC-4s numbered 9-12 only. VCTRUNK 37-VCTRUNK 48 can be bound with VC-4s numbered 13-16 only. VC-4s numbered 4, 8, 12, and 16 support the binding of VC-3 and VC-12 paths. The other VC-4s support the binding of VC-3 paths only. A VC-4 cannot be bound with VC-3 and VC-12 paths at the same time.
Mapping granularities Encapsulation format EPL services EVPL services EPLAN services
Supports VC-12, VC-3, VC12-Xv (X63), and VC3-Xv (X12) granularities. Supports the GFP-F protocol. Supports the PORT-based transparent transmission. Supports PORT+VLAN-based EVPL services that use the frame encapsulation formats of MartinioE and stack VLAN. Supports the P2MP converging service that is based on Layer 2. Supports the Layer 2 forwarding function. Supports switching on the client and SDH sides. Supports the blacklist that can contain 2K records and also the static MAC address table that can contain 2K records. The sum of the number of records in the blacklist and the number of addresses in the static MAC address table must not exceed 2K. The blacklist function of the N3EGS2 supports verification of destination MAC addresses only. Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address. The capacity of the MAC address table is 16K. The aging time of the MAC address can be set and queried. Supports the configuration of the static MAC route. Supports the creation, deletion, and query of the VB. The maximum number of supported VBs is 2. The maximum number of logical ports for each VB is 30. Supports the EPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge.
EVPLAN services
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-105
.unction and .eature MTU
5GS# Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes. After the setting becomes valid, the length of the packets that enter the IP ports is restricted by the pre-set MTU. Supports the MPLS. Supports 4k VLANs. The VLAN technology complies with IEEE 802.1q/p. Supports the broadcast packet suppression function and RSTP that comply with IEEE 802.1w. Supports manual link aggregation. Supports the IGMP snooping function. The N2EGS2 does not support the ETH-OAM function. The N3EGS2 supports CC for the multicast service, LB test for the unicast service, LT test, LD, auto-negotiation, fault diagnosis, and link performance detection. The ETH-OAM function complies with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah.
MPLS VLAN RSTP Link aggregation function IGMP snooping function ETH-OAM function
QoS function
Supports the CAR. The granularity is 64 kbit/s. Supports the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN ID, or PORT+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI.
Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T G.7042. The N2EGS2 supports the P2P LPT. The N3EGS2 supports the P2P LPT and P2MP LPT.
Flow control function High-precision time (IEEE 1588 V2) Test frames Port mirroring Loopback function
Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x. Does not support the high-precision time. Receives and transmits Ethernet test frames. The N3EGS2 supports ingress mirroring. Supports inloops on Ethernet ports (at the PHY layer or MAC layer). The N2EGS2 supports inloops and outloops at the VC-3 level, but the N3EGS2 does not support inloops and outloops at the VC-3 level.
3-106
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
.unction and .eature Protection schemes
5GS# Supports the following protection schemes at the Ethernet network level: STP/RSTP LCAS LPT LAG
Supports Ethernet performance monitoring at the port level. Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.
Table 3-54 provides the functions and features of the EMS2. Table 3-54 Functions and features of the EMS2 .unction and .eature Basic functions 52S# Accesses and processes 2xGE services. Processes 16xFE services. Support point-to-multipoint convergence services. Functions when being used with the interface board Accesses 16xFE signals through the electrical interface when the EMS2 is used with the ETF8. Accesses 16xFE signals through the optical interface when the EMS2 is used with the EFF8. Accesses 8xFE signals through the electrical interface and 8xFE signals through the optical interface when the EMS2 is used with the ETF8 and EFF8.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-107
52S# Supports the 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX Ethernet optical interfaces. The optical interfaces support the auto-negotiation function in compliance with IEEE 802.3z. The optical interfaces use the SFP optical module and support hot swapping. When the multi-mode optical fiber is used, the maximum transmission distance is 550 m. When the single-mode optical fiber is used, the maximum transmission distance is 10 km. The optical modules that can meet different requirements for the transmission distance such as 40 km and 80 km can also be used. Supports the 1000BASE-T RJ-45 Ethernet electrical interface. The electrical interface supports the auto-negotiation function. The negotiated rate can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, or 1000 Mbit/s. The board uses the SFP electrical interface and supports hot swapping. The maximum transmission distance is 100 m. Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals when the EMS2 is used with the ETF8 and supports 100BASE-FX signals when the EMS2 is used with the EFF8. The optical interfaces comply with IEEE 802.3u.
Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p formats. Supports the frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes. Supports the Jumbo frame with a length less than 9600 bytes.
2.5 Gbit/s 48xVC-3, or 252xVC-12 + 36xVC-3 Number of supported VCTRUNKs: 48 Configuration principles are as follows: VC-4s numbered 4, 8, 12, and 16 support the binding of VC-3 and VC-12 paths. The other VC-4s support the binding of VC-3 paths only. A VC-4 cannot be bound with VC-3 and VC-12 paths at the same time.
Supports the following virtual concatenation granularities: VC-12, VC-3, VC12-Xv (X63), and VC3-Xv (X12). Supports the GFP-F protocol. Supports PORT-based transparent transmission.
3-108
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
.unction and .eature EVPL services
52S# Supports EVPL services based on PORT+VLAN.
Supports a maximum of 2048 services that are accessed through IP ports. Supports a maximum of 2048 services that are accessed through VCTRUNKs. Supports a maximum of 4096 links.
Supports QinQ-based EVPL services. Supports PORT-based service forwarding. EPLAN Supports the Layer 2 forwarding function. Supports switching on the client and SDH sides. Supports the blacklist that can contain 2K records and also the static MAC address table that can contain 2K records. The sum of the number of records in the blacklist and the number of addresses in the static MAC address table must not exceed 2K. The blacklist function supports verification of destination MAC addresses only. Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address. The capacity of the MAC address table is 16K. The aging time of the MAC address can be set and queried. Supports the configuration of the static MAC route. Supports the creation, deletion, and query of the VB. The maximum number of supported VBs is 16. Supports the EPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge. EVPLAN Support EVPLAN virtual bridges. Supports data isolation based on VB+VLAN. Supports the configuration of up to 4096 VLAN services. Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1q virtual bridge and the IEEE 802.1ad virtual bridge. MTU Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes. After the setting becomes valid, the length of the packets that enter the IP ports is restricted by the pre-set MTU. Support the MPLS. Supports VLAN, and supports the addition, deletion, and exchanging of VLAN tags. The function complies with IEEE 802.1q/p. Supports 4095 VLANs (1-4095) in the case of EVPL services. RSTP Link aggregation function IGMP snooping Supports the RSTP, which complies with IEEE 802.1w. Supports manual link aggregation and load sharing link aggregation. Supports the IGMP snooping function.
MPLS VLAN
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-109
.unction and .eature ETH-OAM function
52S# Supports CC for the multicast service, LB test for the unicast service, LT test, LD, auto-negotiation, fault diagnosis, and link performance detection. The ETH-OAM function complies with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah. Supports the CAR. The granularity is 64 kbit/s. Supports the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN, PORT+SVLAN, and PORT+VLAN+PRI.
QoS function
Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T G.7042. Supports the P2P LPT and P2MP LPT. Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x. Does not support the high-precision time. Supports test frames. Supports ingress mirroring. Supports inloops on Ethernet ports (on the PHY layer or MAC layer). Supports the following protection schemes at the Ethernet network level: STP/RSTP LCAS LPT LAG
Supports RMON of the Ethernet performance of Ethernet ports and VCTRUNKs. Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.
Table 3-55 provides the functions and features of the EMS4. Table 3-55 Functions and features of the EMS4 .unction and .eature Basic functions 52S/ Accesses and processes 4xGE services Processes 16xFE services. Supports point-to-multipoint convergence services.
3-110
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
.unction and .eature Functions when being used with the interface board
52S/ Accesses 16xFE signals through the electrical interface when the EMS4 is used with the ETF8. Accesses 16xFE signals through the optical interface when the EMS4 is used with the EFF8. Accesses 8xFE signals through the electrical interface and 8xFE signals through the optical interface when the EMS4 is used with the ETF8 and EFF8.
Specifications of the optical interface
Supports the 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX Ethernet optical interfaces. The optical interfaces support the auto-negotiation function in compliance with IEEE 802.3z. The optical interfaces use the SFP optical module and support hot swapping. When the multi-mode optical fiber is used, the maximum transmission distance is 550 m. When the single-mode optical fiber is used, the maximum transmission distance is 10 km. The optical modules that can meet different requirements for the transmission distance such as 40 km and 80 km can also be used. Supports the 1000BASE-T RJ-45 Ethernet electrical interface. The electrical interface supports the auto-negotiation function. The negotiated rate can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, or. 1000 Mbit/s. The EMS4 uses the SFP electrical interface and supports hot swapping. The maximum transmission distance is 100 m. Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals when the EMS4 is used with the ETF8 and supports 100BASE-FX signals when the EMS4 is used with the EFF8. The optical interfaces comply with IEEE 802.3u.
Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p formats. Supports the frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9216 bytes. Supports the Jumbo frame with a length less than 9216 bytes.
Maximum uplink bandwidth Bound bandwidth Number of supported VCTRUNKs Mapping granularities
2.5 Gbit/s. 16xVC-4, or 48xVC-3, or 1008xVC-12 64 Supports the following virtual concatenation granularities: VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC12-Xv (X64), VC3-Xv (X24), and VC4-Xv (X8). Supports the GFP-F, LAPS, and HDLG protocols. Supports PORT-based transparent transmission.
Encapsulation format EPL services
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-111
52S/ Supports EVPL services based on PORT+VLAN.
Supports QinQ-based EVPL services. Supports PORT-based service forwarding. EPLAN services Supports the Layer 2 forwarding function. Supports switching on the client and SDH sides. Supports the blacklist that can contain 512 records and also the static MAC address table that can contain 512 records. The blacklist function supports verification of destination MAC addresses only. Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address. The capacity of the MAC address table is 128K. The aging time of the MAC address can be set and queried. Supports the configuration of the static MAC route. Supports the creation, deletion, and query of the VB. The maximum number of supported VBs is 2. Supports the EPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge. EVPLAN services Supports data isolation based on VB+VLAN. Supports the setting of a maximum of 4000 VLAN services. Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1q virtual bridge and IEEE 802.1ad provider bridge. MTU Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 1518 bytes to 9216 bytes. After the setting becomes valid, the length of the packets that enter the IP ports is restricted by the pre-set MTU. Does not support the MPLS. Supports VLAN and QinQ, and supports the addition, deletion, and exchanging of VLAN tags. The function complies with IEEE 802.1q/p. Supports 4096 S-VLANs (0-4095) and 4096 C-VLANs (0-4095) in the case of QinQ services. Supports 4095 VLANs (1-4095) in the case of EVPL services. RSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) Link aggregation function Supports the RSTP, which complies with IEEE 802.1w. Does not support the MSTP. Supports manual link aggregation and static link aggregation.
MPLS VLAN
3-112
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
.unction and .eature Inter-board link aggregation IGMP snooping function ETH-OAM function
52S/ Supports inter-board link aggregation. Supports the IGMP snooping function. Supports CC for the multicast service, LB test for the unicast service, remote loopback, auto-negotiation, LD, fault diagnosis, and link performance detection. The ETH-OAM function complies with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah. Supports the CAR. The granularity is 64 kbit/s. Supports the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN, or PORT+SVLAN.
QoS function
Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T G.7042. Supports the P2P LPT and P2MP LPT. Supports the setting of the LPT revertive mode. Based on the revertive mode, the RNC shutdown mode can be set.
Flow control function High-precision time (IEEE 1588 V2) Test frames Port mirroring Loopback function Protection schemes
Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x. Does not support the high-precision time. Supports test frames. Does not support the port mirroring function. Supports inloops on Ethernet ports (at the PHY layer). Supports the following protection schemes at the Ethernet network level: BPS/PPS/DLAG STP/RSTP LCAS LPT LAG
Supports RMON of the Ethernet performance of Ethernet ports and VCTRUNKs. Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates management and maintenance of the equipment.
Table 3-56 provides the functions and features of the EGS4.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-113
Table 3-56 Functions and features of the EGS4 .unction and .eature Basic functions 5GS/ Accesses and processes 4xGE services. Supports point-to-multipoint convergence services. Functions when being used with the interface board Specifications of the optical interface Accesses 4xGE signals by providing interfaces on the front panel.
Supports the 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX Ethernet optical interfaces. The optical interfaces support the auto-negotiation function in compliance with IEEE 802.3z. The optical interfaces use the SFP optical module and support hot swapping. When the multi-mode optical fiber is used, the maximum transmission distance is 550 m. When the single-mode optical fiber is used, the maximum transmission distance is 10 km. The optical modules that can meet different requirements for the transmission distance such as 40 km and 80 km can also be used. The N1EGS4 and N4EGS4 also support the 1000BASE-T RJ-45 Ethernet electrical interface. The electrical interface supports the auto-negotiation function. The N1EGS4 supports the negotiated rate of 1000 Mbit/s and the N4EGS4 supports the negotiated rate of 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, or 1000 Mbit/s. The N1EGS4 and N4EGS4 use the SFP electrical interface and support hot swapping. The maximum transmission distance is 100 m.
Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, and IEEE 802.1q/p formats. Supports the frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9216 bytes. Supports the Jumbo frame with a length less than 9216 bytes.
Maximum uplink bandwidth Bound bandwidth
2.5 Gbit/s N1EGS4: 16xVC-4, or 48xVC-3, or 1008xVC-12 N3EGS4/N4EGS4: 16xVC-4, or 48xVC-3, or 504xVC-12
Number of supported VCTRUNKs
64 Configuration principles are as follows: VC-4s numbered 1-4 and 9-12 of the N3EGS4/N4EGS4 support the binding of VC-3 and VC-12 paths. The other VC-4s support the binding of VC-3 paths only. Supports the following virtual concatenation granularities: VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC12-Xv (X64), VC3-Xv (X24), and VC4-Xv (X8). Supports the GFP-F, LAPS, and HDLG protocols. Supports PORT-based transparent transmission.
3-114
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
5GS/ Supports EVPL services based on PORT+VLAN.
Supports QinQ-based EVPL services. Supports PORT-based service forwarding. EPLAN services Supports the Layer 2 forwarding function. Supports switching on the client and SDH sides. Supports the blacklist that can contain 512 records and also the static MAC address table that can contain 512 records. The blacklist function supports verification of destination MAC addresses only. Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address. The capacity of the MAC address table is 128K. The aging time of the MAC address can be set and queried. Supports the configuration of the static MAC route. Supports the creation, deletion, and query of the VB. The EGS4 supports a maximum of two VBs. Supports the EPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge. EVPLAN services Supports data isolation based on VB+VLAN. Supports the setting of a maximum of 4000 VLAN services. Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1q virtual bridge and IEEE 802.1ad provider bridge. MTU Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 1518 bytes to 9216 bytes. After the setting becomes valid, the length of the packets that enter the IP ports is restricted by the pre-set MTU. Does not support the MPLS. Supports VLAN and QinQ, and supports the addition, deletion, and exchanging of VLAN tags. The function complies with IEEE 802.1q/p. Supports 4096 S-VLANs (0-4095) and 4096 C-VLANs (0-4095) in the case of QinQ services. Supports 4095 VLANs (1-4095) in the case of EVPL services. RSTP MSTP Link aggregation function Supports the RSTP, which complies with IEEE 802.1w. Does not support the MSTP. Supports manual link aggregation and static link aggregation.
MPLS VLAN
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-115
.unction and .eature Inter-board link aggregation IGMP snooping function ETH-OAM function
5GS/ Supports inter-board link aggregation. Supports the IGMP snooping function. Supports CC for the multicast service, LB test for the unicast service, and LD. Supports the initiation of remote loopbacks, auto-negotiation, status query in the case of a severe fault in the board, and link performance detection functions, which comply with IEEE 802.3ah. The N4EGS4 supports the LT test function.
QoS function
Supports the CAR. The granularity is 64 kbit/s. The N1EGS4 supports 512 rate modes, and the N3EGS4 and N4EGS4 support 60 rate modes. Supports the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN, or PORT+SVLAN.
Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T G.7042. Supports the P2P LPT and the P2MP LPT. Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x. Does not support the high-precision time. Supports test frames. The N4EGS4 supports ingress mirroring. Supports inloops on Ethernet ports (at the PHY layer). Supports the following protection schemes at the Ethernet equipment level and network level: BPS/PPS/DLAG STP/RSTP LCAS LPT LAG
Supports RMON of the Ethernet performance of Ethernet ports and VCTRUNKs. Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates management and maintenance of the equipment.
3-116
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Table 3-57 provides the functions and features of the EAS2. Table 3-57 Functions and features of the EAS2 board .unction and .eature Basic functions 5AS# Accesses 2x10 GE Ethernet services. Supports point-to-multipoint convergence services. Functions when being used with the interface board Specifications of the optical interface Format of service frames Provides interfaces on the front panel.
The optical interfaces are 10GBASE-LR and 10GBASE-LW Ethernet optical interfaces, which comply with IEEE 802.3ae. Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, and IEEE 802.1q TAG formats. Supports the frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes. Supports the Jumbo frame with a length less than 9600 bytes.
Maximum uplink bandwidth Bound bandwidth Number of supported VCTRUNKs
10 Gbit/s The EAS2 can adapt to the bandwidth of the slot. 64xVC-4 or 192xVC-3 The maximum number of VCTRUNKs supported by the N1EAS2 is 24. Configuration principles are as follows: A VCTRUNK can be bound with a maximum of eight VC-4s or a maximum of 24 VC-3s. A VCTRUNK can be bound with the VC-4 path or VC-3 path at one time. A VCTRUNK should not be bound with VC-4 and VC-3 paths at the same time. Different VCTRUNKs can be bound with paths at different levels. Supports VC-4-4c adjacent concatenation and VC-3/VC-4 virtual concatenation.
Supports the following adjacent concatenation granularities: VC4-Xv (X8), VC3-Xv (X24), and VC4-4c. Supports the GFP-F protocol, which meets ITU-T G.7041. Supports the PORT-based transparent transmission. Supports EVPL services based on PORT+VLAN. Supports EVPL services based on VCTRUNK+VLAN. Supports QinQ-based EVPL services. Supports a maximum of 2048 links.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-117
5AS# Supports the creation, deletion, and query of the VB. The maximum number of supported VBs is 1. Supports the blacklist that can contain 512 records and also the static MAC address table that can contain 512 records. Supports the setting and query of the aging time of the MAC address Supports the configuration of static MAC routes.
EVPLAN services
Supports EVPLAN services that use the stack VLAN encapsulation. Supports data isolation based on VB+VLAN.
MTU
Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes. After the setting becomes valid, the length of the packets that enter the IP ports is restricted by the pre-set MTU. Does not support the MPLS. Supports VLAN and QinQ, which comply with IEEE 802.1q/p. Supports the P2P LPT and P2MP LPT. Supports the CAR. The granularity is 64kbit/s. Supports the CoS and traffic shaping function.
MPLS VLAN LPT function QoS function
Flow control function LCAS function IGMP snooping
Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x. Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T G.7042. Supports the enabling of the IGMP snooping protocol. Supports a maximum of 1024 multicast groups. Supports the query of the enabling status of the IGMP snooping protocol. Supports the setting and query of the IGMP snooping protocol parameters. Supports a maximum of 1024 static multicast groups.
RSTP ETH-OAM function Link aggregation Inter-board link aggregation Test frames
Supports the broadcast packet suppression and RSTP, which comply with IEEE 802.1w. Supports CC for the multicast service, LB test for the unicast service, and LT test. The ETH-OAM function complies with IEEE 802.1ag. Supports manual link aggregation and static link aggregation for Ethernet links and VCTRUNKs. Supports inter-board link aggregation. Supports test frames in ETH and GFP bearer modes.
3-118
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
.unction and .eature Loopback function Protection schemes
5AS# Supports inloops on Ethernet ports (at the PHY or MAC layer). Supports the following protection schemes at the Ethernet service layer: STP/RSTP LCAS LPT LAG DLAG
Ethernet performance monitoring (RMON) Alarms and performance events
Supports the Ethernet performance monitoring at the port level. Supports the query of the rate of a port.
Provides various alarm and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.
-*/*%*- Application
The OptiX OSN equipment has the Ethernet access function integrated on the SDH transmission platform. The OptiX OSN equipment supports the following types of Ethernet services: EPL Service EVPL Service EPLAN Service EVPLAN Service
5P> Service
The EPL implements the point-to-point transparent transmission of Ethernet services. As shown in Figure 3-39, the Ethernet services of different NEs are transmitted to the destination node through their respective VCTRUNKs. The Ethernet services are also protected by the SDH self-healing ring (SHR). This ensures the secure and reliable transmission of services.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-119
Figure 3-39 EPL service based on port

B PORT2 PORT1 A VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK 1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK 1 PORT2 POTR1 A B
NE 1 OptiX OSN equipment Enterprise user
NE 2
5VP> Service
The OptiX OSN equipment adopts two ways to support EVPL services. Port-shared EVPL services. The services are isolated by VLAN tags and share a bandwidth. As shown in Figure 3-40, traffic classification is performed for the Ethernet service according to VLAN ID, to distinguish different VLANs from different departments of Company A. The two traffics are transmitted in respective VCTRUNKs. Figure 3-40 Port-shared EVPL services
Headquarters of company A VCTRUNK1 VLAN100 VLAN200 PORT1 VCTRUNK2 Department 1 VLAN100 PORT1 VLAN200 PORT2 Department 2
NE 1
NE 2
OptiX OSN equipment
Enterprise user
VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services. OptiX OSN equipment adopts three ways to realize convergence and distribution of EVPL services.

EVPL services based on VLAN ID, as shown in Figure 3-41. EVPL services based on MPLS, as shown in Figure 3-42. EVPL services based on QinQ, as shown in Figure 3-43.
3-120
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Figure 3-41 EVPL service based on VLAN ID

B VLAN200 VLAN100 A PORT 1 PORT2 PORT2 VCTRUNK VLAN200 VLAN100 B'
PORT 1
A'
NE 1 Cyber cafe user
NE 2 OptiX OSN equipment
Community user
Figure 3-42 EVPL service based on MPLS

Add label PE Department B PORT2 VCTRUNK1 Department A Branch 1 PORT1 ` Department A P P Strip label PE PORT2 Department B
NE 1
PORT1 NE 2 Branch 2
Company A
OptiX OSN equipment
Figure 3-43 EVPL service based on QinQ

Add label C-Aware Department B Department A Branch 1 PORT2 VCTRUNK1 PORT1 S-Aware Strip label S-Aware C-Aware PORT2 Department B Department A Branch 2
`
NE 2 PORT1
NE 1
Company A
OptiX OSN equipment
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-121
5P>AN Service
Through the EPLAN service, NEs can communicate with each other and dynamically share a bandwidth, the OptiX OSN equipment adopts virtual bridge (VB) to support Layer 2 switching of Ethernet data. This is referred to as the EPLAN service. Each NE in the system can create one or several VBs. Each VB establishes a media access control (MAC) address table. The system updates the table by self-learning. The data packets are transmitted over the mapping VCTRUNK according to the destination MAC address, as shown in Figure 3-44. Figure 3-44 EPLAN service
PORT1
VB Port 1 1 Department 3 of company A NE3
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
VB PORT1 VB VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1
PORT1
Port 1 NE 1 Department 1 of company A Access point Company A NE 2
Port 1
Department 2 of company A OptiX OSN equipment
5VP>AN Service
The EVPLAN services can dynamically share the bandwidth and the data packets in the same VLAN are isolated from each other. When the data services with the same VLAN ID are accessed into the same NE and dynamically share the bandwidth, the EVPLAN service can meet the service requirements. As shown in Figure 3-45, the Ethernet processing boards of the OptiX OSN equipment adopt VB+S-VLAN filter table to support the EVPLAN services.
3-122
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Figure 3-45 EVPLAN service

PORT2 PORT1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK1 Department 3 of company B
VB
Department 3 of company A Port 2 S-Aware VCTRUNK1
Port 1
C-Aware S-Aware S-Aware
NE3
VCTRUNK2
C-Aware PORT2 PORT1
VB
LSP NE 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2 LSP NE 2
S-Aware
VB
C-Aware
PORT2 PORT1
Port 1
Department 1 of company A
Department 1 of company B Company A
Department 2 of company A
Department 2 of company B
Acess point
Company B
OptiX OSN equipment
-*/*%*/ Protection
OptiX OSN 3500 provides layered protection on Ethernet services. The optical transmission layer supports MSP, SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP. The protection schemes supported at the Ethernet service layer are as follows: LCAS
The LCAS enables the configuration of system capacity, the increase and decrease of the concatenated VC quantity, the dynamic change of bearer bandwidth (services are not damaged during the dynamic change) and protects and restores failed members. For details, refer to LCAS in Feature Description. The Ethernet boards support the spanning tree protocol (STP) and the rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP). When the STP or the RSTP is started, it logically modifies the network topology to prevent a broadcast storm. The STP or the RSTP realizes link protection by restructuring the topology. For details, refer to STP and RSTP in Feature Description. The TPS provides equipment level protection for tributary services. When a protected board becomes faulty, its services are switched to the protection board. This ensures a reliable operation of the equipment. For details, refer to 3.2.4.1 TPS Protection. The BPS is a board-based protection scheme that requires an active board and a standby board. When the active board detects a link down failure of any port, or
STP/RSTP
Tributary protection switching (TPS)
Board protection switching (BPS)
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-123
detects a board hardware failure, the cross-connect board switches all the services from the active board to the standby board to realize the service protection.
For details, refer to BPS in Feature Description. The PPS is a port-based protection scheme that requires an active board and a standby board. When the active board detects a link down failure of any port, or detects a board hardware failure, the cross-connect board switches the services of one or more affected ports to the standby boards. In this case, a protection switching for the entire board is not necessary. For details, refer to PPS in Feature Description. A link aggregation group (LAG) bundles multiple links that are connected to the same equipment, to increase the bandwidth and improve the link reliability. An LAG can be regarded as one link. For details, refer to LAG in Feature Description. The DLAG requires two boards. One board is the working board and the other is the protection board. During switching, only the affected ports are switched and the other ports are not switched. The equipment configured with the DLAG should be connected to the equipment where the LACP is running. When any intermediate node is between two equipment sets where the DLAG is configured, the intermediated node should support the transparent transmission of the protocol packets. The DLAG can be of modes: revertive or non-revertive. For details, refer to DLAG in Feature Description. The link state pass through (LPT) is a link-based protection scheme. In a network, when the active and standby ports between routers belong to different links, the LPT function is available for protection. When the working link becomes faulty, the LPT function shuts down the local port so that the opposite router knows that the working link is abnormal. As a result, services are switched from the active port to the standby port. Thus, these services are protected. The DLAG can be of modes: Strict or Non-strict. For details, refer to LPT in Feature Description.
Port protection switching (PPS)
Link aggregation group (LAG)
DLAG
LPT
At the optical transmission layer, Ethernet services can be protected by the MSP, SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP schemes. For details, refer to 3.2.5.2 MSP Ring and 3.2.5.3 SNCP.
-*/*# RPR .eatures

The RPR of the OptiX OSN 3500 is suitable for the ring topology. The RPR can quickly recover Ethernet services from a fiber cut or a link failure. The main features of the RPR are as follows: Provide the topology auto-discovery function to reflect the network status in real time. Support fairness algorithm by configurable weight and support five service levels. Support a maximum of 255 nodes in the ring network and support stripping at the destination node. Solve the fairness and congestion control problems. Provide RPR protection.
3-124
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
The RPR defined by IEEE 802.17 uses a dual-ring topology in which the two rings are in reverse directions, as shown in Figure 3-46. The outer ring and the inner ring transmit data packets and control packets. Hence, this increases the bandwidth utilization. The control packets on the inner ring carry the control information on the outer ring, and the control packets on the outer ring carry the control information on the inner ring. The two rings protect each other. Figure 3-46 RPR ring
Node 1
Outer ring data Outer ring control
Node 2
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 4
Inner ring data Inner ring control
Node 3
3.4.2.1 Functions The RPR functions provide the basic functions, service class, topology auto-discovery, spatial reuse and fairness algorithm. 3.4.2.2 Application The RPR boards support the application of RPR features in EVPL and EVPLAN services. 3.4.2.3 Protection The RPR services of the OptiX OSN 3500 are protected by various protection schemes.
-*/*#*% .unctions
The RPR functions provide the basic functions, service class, topology auto-discovery, spatial reuse and fairness algorithm.
(asic .unctions
On the OptiX OSN 3500, the EMR0 and EGR2 boards support the RPR feature defined by IEEE 802.17. Table 3-58 provides the functions and features of the EMR0.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-125
Table 3-58 Functions and features of the EMR0 .unction and .eature Basic functions 52R" Accesses and processes 12xFE services and 1xGE services. Supports the RPR feature. Functions when being used with the interface board Supports four FE ports and one GE ports. Accesses 12xFE signals through the electrical interface when the EMR0 is used with the ETF8. Accesses 8xFE signals through the optical interface when the EMR0 is used with the EFF8. Specifications of the optical interface Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals when the EMR0 is used with the ETF8. The maximum transmission distance is 100 m. Supports 100BASE-FX signals in compliance with IEEE 802.3u when the EMR0 is used with the EFF8. Format of service frames Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, and IEEE 802.1q TAG formats. Supports the frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes. Supports the Jumbo frame with a length less than 9600 bytes. Maximum uplink bandwidth Mapping granularities Encapsulation format EVPL services 2.5 Gbit/s The EMR0 can adapt to the bandwidth of the slot. Supports VC-3, VC3-2v, VC-4, and VC4-Xv (X8) granularities. Supports the GFP-F and LAPS protocols. Supports EVPL services. The frame format can be Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q TAG, or MPLS Martini. Supports the MPLS encapsulation and forwarding based on PORT or PORT+VLAN. Supports five types of LSPs, including ingress LSP, egress LSP, transit LSP, RPR ingress LSP, and RPR transit LSP. Supports a maximum of 512 LSPs.
3-126
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
.unction and .eature EVPLAN services
52R" Supports EVPLAN services that use the stack VLAN encapsulation. Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address. The capacity of the MAC address table in the N2 functional version is 64K. The capacity of the MAC address table in the N1 functional version is 16K. The aging time of the MAC address can be set and queried. Supports the blacklist that can contain 4K records and also the static MAC address table that can contain 4K records. The sum of the number of records in the blacklist and the number of addresses in the static MAC address table must not exceed 4K. Supports the configuration of the static MAC routes. A maximum of 4K static MAC routes can be configured. Supports data isolation based on VB+VLAN. Supports the creation, deletion, and query of the VB. The maximum number of VBs supported by the N2EMR0 is 16. The maximum number of logical ports for each VB is 32.
MTU
Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes. After the setting becomes valid, in the case of the FE ports, the length of the packets that exit the IP ports is restricted by the pre-set MTU; in the case of the GE ports, the length of the packets that enter the IP ports is restricted by the pre-set MTU. Supports MartinioE. Supports the stack VLAN. Supports 4096 VLAN tags, and the addition, deletion, and exchanging of VLAN tags in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p. Supports the replacement of VLAN tags in Ethernet signal frames.
MPLS Stack VLAN VLAN
Link aggregation function
Supports the aggregation of the links of a maximum of eight FE ports.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-127
.unction and .eature RPR
52R" Supports the RPR feature that complies with IEEE 802.17. Supports a maximum of 255 nodes on the ring network, and supports stripping at the destination node and weighted fairness algorithm. Supports five priority levels, including A0, A1, B_EIR, B_CIR, and C, and supports automatic discovery of topologies, which can display the network status in real time. Supports three protection modes, including Steering, Wrapping, and Wrapping+Steering. Hence, the signal failure time is less than 50 ms. Supports the self-learning of routes on the ring, that is, supports the learning of mapping relationship between MAC addresses and node numbers. The N2EMR0 supports the manual configuration of routes for the services on the RPR ring network.
RSTP IGMP snooping QoS function
Supports the broadcast packet suppression and RSTP, which comply with IEEE 802.1w. Supports the IGMP snooping function. Supports the CAR. The granularity is 64 kbit/s. The N2EMR0 supports the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN ID, or PORT+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI.
LCAS function Flow control function Echo test frames Loopback function Protection schemes
Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T G.7042. Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x. Supports the echo function specified in the RPR OAM function, which is used to test the connectivity of the link. Supports inloops on Ethernet ports (at the PHY layer or MAC layer). Supports the following protection schemes at the Ethernet network level: STP/RSTP LCAS LAG
Ethernet performance monitoring Alarms and performance events Weighted fairness algorithm
Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment. Supports the weighted fairness algorithm.
3-128
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
.unction and .eature Automatic discovery of topologies Maximum number of supported nodes Service priority levels
52R" Supports the automatic discovery of topologies. 255 Supports A0, A1, B_CIR, B_EIR, and C.
Table 3-59 provides the functions and features of the EGR2. Table 3-59 Functions and features of the EGR2 .unction and .eature Basic functions 5GR# Accesses and processes 2xGE services. Supports the RPR feature. Functions when being used with the interface board Specifications of the optical interface Accesses 2xGE signals by providing interfaces on the front panel.
The optical interfaces are 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX Ethernet optical interfaces. The optical interfaces support the auto-negotiation function in compliance with IEEE 802.3z. The optical interfaces use the SFP optical module and support hot swapping.
When the multi-mode optical fiber is used, the maximum transmission distance is 550 m. When the single-mode optical fiber is used, the maximum transmission distance is 10 km. The optical modules that can meet different requirements for the transmission distance such as 40 km and 80 km can also be used.
Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, and IEEE 802.1q TAG formats. Supports the frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes. Supports the Jumbo frame with a length less than 9600 bytes.
Maximum uplink bandwidth Mapping granularities
2.5 Gbit/s The EGR2 can adapt to the bandwidth of the slot. Supports VC-3, VC3-2v, VC-4, and VC4-Xv (X8) granularities.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-129
.unction and .eature Encapsulation format EVPL services
5GR# Supports the GFP-F and LAPS protocols. Supports EVPL services. The frame format can be Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q TAG, or MPLS Martini. Supports the MPLS encapsulation and forwarding based on PORT or PORT+VLAN. Supports five types of LSPs, including ingress LSP, egress LSP, transit LSP, RPR ingress LSP, and RPR transit LSP. Supports a maximum of 512 LSPs.
EVPLAN services
Supports EVPLAN services that use the stack VLAN encapsulation. Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address. The capacity of the MAC address table in the N2 functional version is 64K. The aging time of the MAC address can be set and queried. Supports the blacklist that can contain 4K records and also the static MAC address table that can contain 4K records. The sum of the number of records in the blacklist and the number of addresses in the static MAC address table must not exceed 4K. Supports the configuration of the static MAC routes. A maximum of 4K static MAC routes can be configured. Supports data isolation based on VB+VLAN. Supports the creation, deletion, and query of the VB. The maximum number of supported VBs is 16. The maximum number of logical ports for each VB is 32.
MTU
Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes. After the setting becomes valid, the length of the packets that enter the IP ports is restricted by the pre-set MTU. Supports MartinioE. Supports the stack VLAN. Supports 4096 VLAN tags, and the addition, deletion, and exchanging of VLAN tags in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p. Supports the replacement of VLAN tags in Ethernet signal frames.
MPLS Stack VLAN VLAN
Link aggregation function
Supports the aggregation of the links of two GE ports.
3-130
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
.unction and .eature RPR
5GR# Supports the RPR feature that complies with IEEE 802.17. Supports a maximum of 255 nodes on the ring network, and supports stripping at the destination node and weighted fairness algorithm. Supports five priority levels, including A0, A1, B_EIR, B_CIR, and C, and supports automatic discovery of topologies, which can display the network status in real time. Supports three protection modes, including Steering, Wrapping, and Wrapping+Steering. Hence, the signal failure time is less than 50 ms. Supports the manual configuration of routes for the services on the RPR ring network. Supports the self-learning of routes on the ring, that is, supports the learning of mapping relationship between MAC addresses and node numbers.
RSTP IGMP snooping QoS
Supports the broadcast packet suppression and RSTP, which comply with IEEE 802.1w. Supports the IGMP snooping function. Supports the CAR. The granularity is 64 kbit/s. Supports the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN ID, or PORT+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI.
LCAS function LPT function Flow control function High-precision time (IEEE 1588 V2) Echo test frames Port mirroring Loopback function Protection schemes
Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T G.7042. Supports the P2MP LPT. Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x. Does not support the high-precision time. Supports the echo function specified in the RPR OAM function, which is used to test the connectivity of the link. Does not support port mirroring. Supports inloops on Ethernet ports (at the PHY layer or MAC layer). Supports the following protection schemes at the Ethernet network level: STP/RSTP LCAS LPT LAG
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-131
.unction and .eature Ethernet performance monitoring Alarms and performance events Weighted fairness algorithm Automatic discovery of topologies Maximum number of supported nodes Service priority levels
5GR# Supports Ethernet performance monitoring at the port level.
Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment. Supports the weighted fairness algorithm. Supports the automatic discovery of topologies. 255 Supports A0, A1, B_CIR, B_EIR, and C.
Service Class
The user data has three classes, which are A, B and C. On an RPR ring, Class A is further divided into the A0 and A1 subclasses. Class B is also divided into the B_CIR (committed information rate) and B_EIR (excess information rate) subclasses. Table 3-60 lists the differences among these classes. Table 3-60 RPR service class Class A Subclass A0 A1 B B_CIR B_EIR C C (and,idth Pre-allocated, irreclaimable Pre-allocated, reclaimable Pre-allocated, reclaimable Preemptible, not pre-allocated Preemptible, not pre-allocated Eitter Low Low Medium High High .airness Al orithm Irrelevant Irrelevant Irrelevant Relevant Relevant Application Real-time services Real-time services Near real-time services Near real-time services Best effort transmission
3-132
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Topolo y Auto&Discovery
The topology auto-discovery protocol provides an accurate and reliable method to quickly discover the topologies and their changes, for all the nodes in a ring network. Hence, the topology auto-discovery realizes the plug and play feature for the RPR. To increase or decrease the total bandwidth of an RPR, you can use the LCAS function, which realizes the dynamic increase and decrease of bandwidth without affecting the existing services.
Spatial Reuse
On an RPR, the stripping of unicast frames at the destination node realizes the spatial reuse for ring bandwidth. As shown in Figure 3-47, the bandwidth of a single ring is 1.25 Gbit/s. Traffic 1 sent from Node 1 to Node 4 is stripped from the ring at the destination Node 4, and thus the bandwidth behind Node 4 is left unused. In this case, Node 4 is able to send traffic to Node 3 at a 1.25 Gbit/s bandwidth. In this way, the bandwidth utilization is improved. Figure 3-47 Spatial reuse
Node 1 Traffic 1 1.25 Gbit/s
Node 2
Dual-ring 2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 4
Bandwidth of single ring is 1.25Gbit/s Node 3
Traffic 2 1.25 Gbit/s
.airness Al orithm
The outer ring and the inner ring of an RPR support independent weighted fairness algorithm. The fairness algorithm ensures the fair access of lower-class B_EIR and C services. The weight in the fairness algorithm is configurable so that different nodes can have different access rates. Weights need to be set for a node on the outer ring and the inner ring separately. In the case of preemptible bandwidth, these two weights decide the bandwidth at which the node transmits lower-class services on the inner ring and the outer ring. As shown in Figure 3-48, the weights of Nodes 2, 3 and 4 on the outer ring are 1. On the outer ring, assume that the preemptible bandwidth that is available for lower-class services is 1.2 Gbit/s. In this case, the fairness algorithm allocates 400 Mbit/s each for the lower-class services transmitted from Nodes 2, 3 and 4 to Node 1.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-133
Figure 3-49 shows a fairness algorithm with different weights, that is, the weights of Nodes 2, 3 and 4 on the outer ring are 1, 3 and 2 respectively. In this case, the fairness algorithm allocates 200 Mbit/s, 600 Mbit/s, and 400 Mbit/s bandwidths for the lower-class services transmitted from Nodes 2, 3 and 4 to Node 1. Figure 3-48 Fairness algorithm when the weight is 1
3 2 Node 2 Node 1
Node Node2 Node3 Node4
Weight 1 1 1
Node 3 1 Dual-ring 2.5 Gbit/s RPR Node 4 Node 5
Node 6 Traffic 1 2 3 Bandwidth 400 Mbit/s 400 Mbit/s 400 Mbit/s
Figure 3-49 Fairness algorithm when the weights are different
3 2 Node 2 Node 1
Node Node2 Node3 Node4
Weight 1 3 2
Node 3 1 Dual-ring 2.5 Gbit/s RPR Node 4 Node 5
Node 6 Traffic 1 2 3 Bandwidth 400 Mbit/s 600 Mbit/s 200 Mbit/s
-*/*#*# Application
The RPR boards support the application of RPR features in EVPL and EVPLAN services.
3-134
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
5VP> Service
The EVPL service supports traffic classification based on port or port+VLAN, and encapsulates and forwards the traffic in the MPLS MartinioE format. Figure 3-50 illustrates the accessing, forwarding and stripping of a unidirectional EVPL service. Node 2 adds the tunnel and VC labels into the packet, and sends the packet onto the RPR. Node 3 forwards the packet to the destination Node 4, which then strips the packet. Figure 3-51 illustrates the EVPL service convergence, in which the traffic classification is based on port+VLAN so that multiple services can be converged at the GE port of Node 1. Figure 3-50 EVPL service accessing, forwarding and stripping
Node 1
Dual-ring 2.5 Gbit/s RPR FE/GE Node 2 Node 4 FE/GE
LSP Action Tunnel VC Destination Insertion 100 100 Node 4 Action Forwarding Node 3
Action Tunnel VC
Stripping 100 100
Figure 3-51 EVPL service convergence

VLAN 2 VLAN 3 Traffic Port1+VLAN 2 Port1+VLAN 3 Port1+VLAN 4 VLAN 4 GE Tunnel 200 300 400 VC 200 300 400 Destination Node 2 Node 3 Node 4
Node 1
FE VLAN 2 Node 2 Dual-ring 2.5 Gbit/s RPR Node 4
FE VLAN 4
Node 3
FE
VLAN 3
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-135
5VP>AN Service
The EVPLAN service supports traffic classification based on port or port+VLAN, and encapsulates and forwards the traffic in the stack VLAN format. The EVPLAN service is realized by creating virtual bridges (VBs) in the board. The VB supports the self-learning of source MAC addresses and the configuration of static MAC routes. Figure 3-52 shows an example of the EVPLAN service. Port rpr1 is where the packets are accessed onto the RPR. By address self-learning, the VB of each node determines the forwarding port and the destination node of the packets. At Node 1, if the destination MAC address of the packets is A1, the packets are forwarded through Port 1. If the destination address is A2, the packets are forwarded through Port 2. If the destination address is B1, B2 or C1, the packets are forwarded onto the RPR through Port rpr1, added with a stack VLAN tag whose value is 100. Node 2 forwards packets in the same way. Figure 3-52 RPR EVPLAN service
A1 A2 MAC forwarding table of node 1 Port 2 Port 1 MAC A1 A2 B1 B1 Node 1 Dual-ring A2 2.5 Gbit/s RPR Node 2 B2 Port 2 MAC forwarding table of node 2 Node 3 MAC A1 A2 Port 1 C1 B1 B2 C1 Port rpr1 rpr1 port 1 port 2 rpr1 stack VLAN 100 100 none none 100 Node 4 B2 C1 Port port 1 port 2 rpr1 rpr1 rpr1 stack VLAN none none 100 100 100
Port 1
-*/*#*- Protection
The RPR services of the OptiX OSN 3500 are protected by various protection schemes. The protection schemes of the RPR services include: Wrapping, steering and wrapping+steering
When a failure is detected on the ring, the wrapping function performs an automatic loopback at the nodes that are adjacent to the failure point, to connect the inner ring and the outer ring. The protection switching time is less than 50 ms. The advantages of this protection scheme are enhanced protection speed and minimal loss of data, and the disadvantage is the waste of bandwidth. In the steering protection, switching is not performed at the failure point. Instead, the source node sends the traffic to the destination node through a new route that is generated by the topology auto-discovery protocol. If the number of nodes on the ring is less than 16, the steering protection switching time is less than 50 ms. The advantage of this protection scheme is that it does not waste bandwidth. The
3-136
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
disadvantage is that, when the network scale is large, the protection switching speed is low, and some data is discarded before a new route is generated.
In the wrapping+steering protection, when a failure is detected on the ring, the ring first performs a wrapping switching to ensure the switching speed and decrease the packet loss. After the topology auto-discovery protocol generates a new ring topology, the ring performs the steering protection so that the traffic is sent to the destination through the best route. This reduces the waste of bandwidth. For details, refer to RPR in Feature Description. The LCAS function adds and reduces the bandwidth dynamically, and protects the bandwidth. For details, refer to LCAS in Feature Description. The RPR boards support the rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP). The RSTP realizes link protection by restructuring the topology. When the RSTP is started, it logically modifies the network topology to prevent a broadcast storm. For details, refer to STP and RSTP in Feature Description.
LCAS
RSTP
2SP7 SNCP7 SNC2P And SNCTP

At the optical transmission layer, Ethernet services can be protected when the MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, or SNCTP scheme is used. For details, refer to 3.2.5.1 Linear MSP, 3.2.5.2 MSP Ring and 3.2.5.3 SNCP.
-*/*- AT2 .eatures

This topic describes the functions, application and protection of the ATM features of the OptiX OSN 3500. 3.4.3.1 Functions The OptiX OSN 3500 provides four types of ATM processing boards, which are ADL4, ADQ1, IDL4 and IDQ1. 3.4.3.2 Application The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the application of several types of ATM services. 3.4.3.3 Protection The ATM services of the OptiX OSN 3500 are protected at several layers.
-*/*-*% .unctions
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides four types of ATM processing boards, which are ADL4, ADQ1, IDL4 and IDQ1. An ADL4 board can access and process one STM-4 ATM service and an ADQ1 board can access and process four STM-1 ATM services. When working with the N1PL3/N1PL3A/N1PD3 board, the ADL4 or ADQ1 board can access and process E3 ATM services.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-137
An IDL4 board can access and process one STM-4 ATM service and an IDQ1 board can access and process four STM-1 ATM services. When working with the E1 processing board, the IDL4 or IDQ1 board can access and process IMA services. Table 3-61 lists the functions of the ADL4 and ADQ1 boards. Table 3-62 lists the functions of the IDL4 and IDQ1 boards. Table 3-61 Functions of ADL4 and ADQ1 .unction Front panel interface Optical interface specification Connector type Optical module type E3 ATM interface IMA Maximum uplink bandwidth ATM switching capability Mapping mode Service type Number of ATM connections Traffic type and QoS Supported ATM multicast connections ATM protection Mode (ITU-T I.630) ATM protection operation mode (ITU-T I.630) ATM protection level (ITU-T I.630) OAM function (ITU-T I.610) AD>/ 1 x STM-4 S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 and Ve-4.2 LC SFP Accesses 12 x E3 services by using the N1PD3 or N1PL3 or N1PL3A board. Not supported 8 VC-4, or 12 VC-3 + 4 VC-4 1.2 Gbit/s VC-3; VC-4: VC-4-xv (x4) CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR 2048 IETF RFC2514, ATM forum TM 4.0 Spatial multicast and logical multicast 1+1, 1:1 Unidirectional, bidirectional VP-Ring, VC-Ring AIS (Alarm Indication Signal), RDI (Remote Defect Indication), LB (Loopback), CC (Continuity Check) ADC% 4 x STM-1 Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 and Ve-1.2
3-138
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Table 3-62 Functions of IDL4 and IDQ1 .unction Front panel interface Optical interface specification Connector type Optical module type E3 ATM interface IMA (compliant with ATM Forum IMA 1.1 standards) ID>/ 1 x STM-4 S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 and Ve-4.2 LC SFP Not supported Accesses and processes IMA services when working with the E1 processing board N1PQ1 or N1PQM or N2PQ1. Supports a maximum of 63 IMA E1 services. Supports the mapping of a maximum of 16 IMA groups to the ATM port. Each IMA group supports 1-32 E1 services. Supports the mapping of a maximum of 16 E1 links (which are not in any IMA group) to the ATM port. Supports a maximum of 226 ms of IMA multipath delay. Maximum uplink bandwidth ATM switching capability Mapping mode Service type Number of ATM connections Traffic type and QoS Supported ATM multicast connections ATM protection Mode (ITU-T I.630) ATM protection operation mode (ITU-T I.630) ATM protection level (ITU-T I.630) OAM function (ITU-T I.610) Board level 1+1 protection 8 VC-4, or 63 VC-12 + 7 VC-4 1 Gbit/s VC-12; VC-4: VC-4-xv (X4) CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR 2048 IETF RFC2514, ATM forum TM 4.0 Spatial multicast and logical multicast 1+1, 1:1 Unidirectional, bidirectional VP-Ring, VC-Ring AIS, RDI, LB, CC Supported, with switching time less than 1s IDC% 4 x STM-1 Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 and Ve-1.2
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-139
-*/*-*# Application
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the application of several types of ATM services.
Supported Services and Tra++ic Types

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR services, but does not support ABR services. The CBR services apply to voice services, and video services and circuit emulation services of a constant bit rate. These services require guaranteed transmission bandwidth and latency. The rt-VBR services apply to audio and video services of a variable bit rate. The nrt-VBR services are mainly used for data transmission. The UBR services are generally used for LAN emulation and file transfer. In terms of the supported services and traffic types, the OptiX OSN 3500 meets IETF RFC2514, ATM Forum TM 4.0, and ATM Forum UNI 3.1 Recommendations. See Table 3-63. Table 3-63 ATM service types and traffic types No* 1 2 Tra++ic Type atmNoTrafficDescriptor atmNoClpNoScr Service Type UBR UBR.1 CBR 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 atmClpNoTaggingNoScr atmClpTaggingNoScr atmNoClpScr atmClpNoTaggingScr atmClpTaggingScr atmClpTransparentNoScr atmClpTransparentScr atmNoClpTaggingNoScr atmNoClpNoScrCdvt CBR CBR nrt-VBR.1 nrt-VBR.2 nrt-VBR.3 CBR.1 rt-VBR.1 UBR.2 UBR CBR 12 13 14 atmNoClpScrCdvt atmClpNoTaggingScrCdvt atmClpTaggingScrCdvt rt-VBR.1 rt-VBR.2 rt-VBR.3 Parameter None Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr, Clp0Pcr Clp01Pcr, Clp0Pcr Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs Clp01Pcr, Cdvt Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs, Cdvt Clp01Pcr, Cdvt Clp01Pcr, Cdvt Clp01Pcr, Cdvt Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs, Cdvt Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs, Cdvt Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs, Cdvt
3-140
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Application o+ (and,idth 5;clusive AT2 Services

When the bandwidth is not shared, ATM services are processed by the ATM service processing board, at the ATM layer of only the source and sink NEs. On intermediate NEs, only SDH timeslot pass-through is performed, without ATM layer processing. In this case, each ATM service exclusively occupies a VC-3 or VC-4 path. At the central node, the ATM services are converged to an STM-1 or STM-4 optical port for output. As shown in Figure 3-53, the 34 Mbit/s ATM services of NE1 and NE3 exclusively occupy a VC-3 bandwidth each. The 155 Mbit/s ATM service of NE2 exclusively occupies a VC-4 bandwidth, and only the SDH timeslot pass-through is performed at NE3. After the three services reach the central station NE4, they are converged by the ATM board and are output through the 622 Mbit/s optical interface on the front panel. Figure 3-53 Application of bandwidth exclusive ATM services
DSLAM 34M ATM Traffic Service Convergence
NE 1
155M ATM Traffic NE 2
2.5 Gbit/s SDH Ring NE 4
622M ATM Traffic
Router DSLAM
NE 3
34M ATM Traffic DSLAM
Application o+ (and,idth Shared AT2 Services

The VR-Ring and VC-Ring realize the bandwidth sharing and the statistical multiplexing for ATM services. The ATM services on each NE share the same VC (VC-3, VC-4, or VC-4-xv) path and are processed at the ATM layer of all NEs. As shown in Figure 3-54, NE1 accesses E3 ATM traffic from the tributary board and sends it to the ATM board for ATM switching and protection configuration (1+1 or 1:1). Then, after the traffic is encapsulated into VC-4-xv, it is sent to the line by the cross-connect board. NE2
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-141
accesses STM-1 ATM traffic from the optical interface, and then performs the ATM switching and protection configuration. At the same time, the ATM traffic from NE1 is dropped at NE2 for ATM layer processing. Then, the locally accessed traffic and the traffic from the upstream are encapsulated into the same VC-4-xv and sent to the downstream NE. The processing at NE3 and NE4 is similar. One VP-Ring/VC-Ring has a maximum bandwidth of 300 Mbit/s. Figure 3-54 VP-Ring/VC-Ring
DSLAM The ATM traffic from NE1 is dropped to the NE2,and then sent to VP/VC-Ring after converged with local service. NE 1 34M ATM Traffic
155M ATM Traffic VC4-Xv VP/VC-Ring NE 2 DSLAM
NE 4
Router
622M ATM Traffic
NE 3
34M ATM Traffic
DSLAM
Application o+ I2A Services

The inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) technology is used to demultiplex an ATM integrated cell flow into several lower rate links. At the other end, the lower rate links are multiplexed to recover the original integrated cell flow. The IMA technology is applicable when ATM cells are transmitted through an interface of the E1 rate or other rates. The IMA technology only provides a path, and does not process service types and ATM cells. The signals at the ATM layer and a higher layer are transparently transmitted. Figure 3-55 illustrates the IMA service networking.
3-142
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Figure 3-55 IMA service networking

RNC
NE1 U2000 25km NodeB 1 NE2 NE4 STM-16 two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring 40km
NodeB 4 30km
35km
NE3 NodeB 2
NodeB 3
-*/*-*- Protection
The ATM services of the OptiX OSN 3500 are protected at several layers. The protections that are available are as follows: ATM layer protections
The ATM layer protections are classified in different ways. You can select a combination of the following protection types as required, for example, 1+1 bidirectional non-revertive protection. For details, refer to ATM and IMA in Feature Description. The ATM service is also protected by the self-healing network at the optical transmission layer, where the protection schemes include MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP. You can set the hold-off time for the ATM protection switching. In this way, when network impairment occurs, the MSP, SNCP , SNCMP or SNCTP at the optical transmission layer performs the switching first, thus achieving the protection of the working ATM service (in this case, the protection switching at the ATM layer is not performed). For details, refer to 3.2.5.1 Linear MSP, 3.2.5.2 MSP Ring and 3.2.5.3 SNCP. The IDQ1 and IDL4 boards support the 1+1 board level protection. For details, refer to ATM and IMA in Feature Description.
Optical transmission layer protections, such as MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP
1+1 board level protection for IMA boards

-*/*/ DDN .eatures

This topic describes the functions and application of the DDN features of the OptiX OSN 3500.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-143
3.4.4.1 Functions The OptiX OSN 3500 uses the N1DX1/N1DXA processing boards and the N1DM12 interface board to access and process DDN services. 3.4.4.2 Application When the DDN service access and convergence board is configured in the OptiX OSN 3500, the SDH network is able to access and groom DDN services. 3.4.4.3 Protection The OptiX OSN 3500 provides TPS protection for DDN services.
-*/*/*% .unctions
The OptiX OSN 3500 uses the N1DX1/N1DXA processing boards and the N1DM12 interface board to access and process DDN services. Table 3-64 provides the functions and features of the DX1. Table 3-64 Functions and features of the DX1 .unction and .eature Basic functions DD%
Processes eight channels of Nx64 kbit/s services and eight channels of framed E1 services. Cross-connects 48 channels of Nx64 kbit/s signals on the system side.
Service processing
Accesses eight channels of Nx64 kbit/s and eight channels of framed E1 services and realizes the 1:N TPS protection when working with the DM12. One DX1 board needs to work with two DM12 boards.
Alarms and performance events Maintenance features
Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment. Supports inloops and outloops at electrical interfaces. Supports the PRBS function. Supports the CRC function.
Connectors
The DB28 connectors and DB44 connectors are present on the front panel of the DM12. The DB28 connector is used for the Nx64 kbit/s signals, and the DB44 connector is used for the framed E1 signals. Supports the TPS protection when working with the interface board.
Protection schemes
Table 3-65 provides the functions and features of the DXA.
3-144
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Table 3-65 Functions and features of the DXA .unction and .eature Basic functions Alarms and performance events Maintenance features DDA Cross-connects 63 channels of framed E1 signals. Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment. Supports inloops and outloops. Supports the CRC function.
-*/*/*# Application
When the DDN service access and convergence board is configured in the OptiX OSN 3500, the SDH network is able to access and groom DDN services. The N1DX1 and the N1DXA boards are mainly used for the following functions, so various services such as RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24, X.21 and framed E1 can be accessed to a transmission network. Point-to-point transmission for video conferences and routers Point-to-multipoint transmission for video conferences and routers Multipoint-to-multipoint transmission for video conferences and routers Access and convergence of multipoint routers The N1DX1 and N1DXA boards are applicable to DDN private networks for small-sized and medium-sized enterprises, government agencies, and banking and security service halls. Figure 3-56 DDN networking and application
NE1
Branch of company A
4 x 64k 4 x 64k NE2 NG-SDH NE4 Frame E1
Headquarters of company A
Branch of company B
Frame E1
Headquarters of company B
NE3 OptiX NE Enterprise user
As shown in Figure 3-56, point-to-point transmission of Nx64 kbit/s services can be performed between the headquarters and branches of Company A, and point-to-point transmission of framed E1 services can be performed between the headquarters and branches of Company B. The Nx64 kbit/s services of Company A and framed E1 services of Company B can also be transmitted in hybrid mode over the NG-SDH network. For details, see the Planning Guide.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-145
-*/*/*- Protection
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides TPS protection for DDN services. In TPS protection, when any working board is faulty or not in position, the DDN services are switched to the protection board. This ensures the reliable operation of the equipment. For details, refer to 3.2.4.1 TPS Protection.
-*/*0 SAN .eatures

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides a multiservice transparent transmission processing board, N1MST4, to access and transparently transmit FC, FICON, ESCON and DVB-ASI services. Table 3-66 provides the functions and features of the MST4. Table 3-66 Functions and features of the MST4 .unction and .eature Basic functions 2ST/ Provides four independent ports to access multiple services. Supports the transparent transmission of the SAN and Video services. Connector type Optical module type Service types LC SFP Supports FC100/FICON, FC200, ESCON, and DVB-ASI services. Table 2 describes types and rates of the services. Accesses four-channel FC services (FC100/FICON and FC200) at the same time, and the total bandwidth is less than 2.5 Gbit/s. Supports the full-rate transmission of FC services (one-channel FC200 services or two-channel FC100 services). Accesses four-channel ESCON or DVB-ASI services, and the total bandwidth is less than 2.5 Gbit/s. Distance extension The first and second ports support the distance extension function on the SDH side. FC100 services: 3000 km FC200 services: 1500 km Maximum uplink bandwidth 2.5 Gbit/s The backplane provides four 622 Mbit/s buses that are directly connected to the cross-connect unit. The MST4 can adapt to the bandwidth of the slot. Mapping granularity ESCON services Supports the VC4-Xc (X = 4, 8, or 16) granularity. Accesses four-channel ESCON services, and the total bandwidth is less than 2.5 Gbit/s.
3-146
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
.unction and .eature DVB-ASI services Encapsulation format Maintenance features Alarms and performance events
2ST/ Accesses four-channel DVB-ASI services, and the total bandwidth is less than 2.5 Gbit/s. Supports the GFP-T protocol, which complies with ITU-T G.7041. Supports inloops and outloops on ports on the customer side, which can be used to locate faults quickly. Reports various alarms and performance events, which can be used to locate faults and maintain the equipment.
Table 3-67 Service types service rates supported by the MST4 Service Type FC100/FICON FC200 ESCON DVB-ASI Rate 1062.5 Mbit/s 2125 Mbit/s 200 Mbit/s 270 Mbit/s Remar8s SAN service SAN service SAN service Video service
-*0 (uilt&in 9D2 Technolo y

The equipment supports the built-in WDM technology, which enables the transmission of several wavelengths in one fiber. The OptiX OSN equipment provides a built-in WDM technology. The functions of the equipment are as follows: Any four adjacent standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 can be added or dropped. Supports standard CWDM wavelengths, which can be multiplexed or demultiplexed. The optical terminal multiplexer (OTM) or the optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM) station that adds or drops four wavelengths is supported. Concatenation is supported, and thus multiple waves can be added or dropped. The conversion between client-side signal wavelengths and ITU-T G.692 compliant standard wavelengths is supported. During the conversion, all the signals are transparently transmitted. Intermediate ports are provided for expansion. When intermediate ports are cascaded with other OADM boards, the expansion of add/drop channels is realized. Supports the remote optical pumping amplifier (ROPA) system to transmit signals over a long distance.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-147
Supports the intelligent power adjustment (IPA) function.
-*3 2icro,ave Technolo y

The OptiX OSN equipment supports the built-in microwave boards of intermediate frequency. It can work with the outdoor unit (ODU) of the OptiX RTN 600 to achieve wireless service transmission. In the case of the OptiX OSN equipment, the service signals are transmitted on the basis of the microwave transmission flow shown in Figure 3-57. Figure 3-57 Processing flow of the service signals
Baseband signal PDH/SDH/Ethernet Service interface board Cross connect board Baseband signal Microwave IF board IF signal ODU Antenna RF signal
The OptiX OSN equipment supports the following microwave functions: Software programmed radio (SPR) function. The microwave capacity and modulation mode can be set through software. Microwave frames based on TU and STM-1. The air interface is used for the product to interconnect with the other OptiX OSN products that adopt the microwave frames based on TU and STM-1 or to interconnect with the OptiX RTN 600. 1+1 protection and N+1 protection. Automatic transmit power control (ATPC) function.
The OptiX OSN equipment does not support the 256 QAM modulation scheme or 56 MHz channel spacing.
The number of IFSD1 boards that can be configured for different types of the equipment is different. Hence, the number of microwave directions supported by different types of the equipment is also different. Table 3-68 lists the maximum number of IF boards and the maximum number of microwave directions supported by different types of the equipment. Table 3-68 Microwave capacity of the equipment 5=uipment Type OptiX OSN 3500 2a;imum Number o+ Con+i ured I. (oards 10 2a;imum Supported 2icro,ave Capacity $Channel' 20
3-148
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
-*) >icense Control

Licenses include version licenses and feature licenses. 3.7.1 Version License The product of this version is released with a license. That is, customers can obtain corresponding rights committed by the supplier based on the license certificate. 3.7.2 Feature License
In the case of the version, a license file needs to be purchased to enable the packet feature or the synchronization feature of IEEE 1588v2.
-*)*% Version >icense

The product of this version is released with a license. That is, customers can obtain corresponding rights committed by the supplier based on the license certificate. After you purchase the license, you need to load or update the license file. At the deployment phase: You can configure or use the new features of this version only after the license file of this version is loaded. At the maintenance phase: You can query the license status and use period on the NMS; you need to apply for a new license after the SCC boards are replaced; the services with the features controlled can be queried and deleted but cannot be added, modified, or enabled after the license expires; you need to purchase a new license if the features that you purchase are increased. If the SCC boards are replaced, the equipment serial number (ESN) of the license will be changed, and the license continues to be valid but will expire after 60 days. During the 60-day period, the functions of the license are fully provided, but a warning will be displayed, prompting you to apply for a new license. Therefore, after the working SCC boards are replaced, it is recommended that you immediately apply for a new license and load the license file onto the SCC boards.
-*)*# .eature >icense

In the case of the version, a license file needs to be purchased to enable the packet feature or the synchronization feature of IEEE 1588v2.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3-149
4 Products and Application Scenarios
Products and Application Scenarios
/*% Net,or8in Topolo ies

The OptiX OSN equipment supports the topologies such as chain, ring, tangent rings, intersecting rings, ring with chain, dual node interconnection (DNI), hub, and mesh at the STM-1/STM-4/STM-16/STM-64 level.The basic networking topologies are applicable to the packet mode, TDM mode, and hybrid mode. The OptiX OSN equipment supports the separate and hybrid configuration of the following types of NEs: Terminal multiplexer (TM) Add/drop multiplexer (ADM) Multiple add/drop multiplexer (MADM) The OptiX OSN equipment can be interconnected with Huawei OSN, DWDM, and Metro equipment series, to provide a complete transmission network solution.
When the equipment is interconnected, make sure that the K bytes to be received and transmitted are on the same path at both ends.
The OptiX OSN equipment can be used with another OptiX OSN equipment to provide a complete solution. This solution covers all the layers including the backbone layer, the convergence layer, and the access layer. Through an SDH interface or a GE interface, the OptiX OSN equipment can be interconnected with the WDM equipment. Through an SDH, PDH, Ethernet, ATM, or DDN interface, the OptiX OSN equipment can be interconnected with the OptiX Metro equipment.
/*# Typical Net,or8in in Pac8et 2ode

In packet mode, the equipment mainly supports two different typical networking scenarios, depending on whether routers are used. 4.2.1 Typical Networking Without Routers OptiX OSN equipment can construct a network where TDM services and packet services are transmitted between base stations and the RNC without assistance from routers.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
4-1
4.2.2 Hybrid Networking with Routers In the case of the packet domain, you can deploy a Layer 2 network by using OptiX OSN equipment and then connect the Layer 2 network to RNCs through routers, therefore improving network scalability based on the powerful Layer 3 processing capabilities of the routers.
/*#*% Typical Net,or8in 9ithout Routers

OptiX OSN equipment can construct a network where TDM services and packet services are transmitted between base stations and the RNC without assistance from routers. Figure 4-1 shows the typical networking diagram. Figure 4-1 Typical networking diagram (without any routers)
NE4 NE1 Working LSP/PW
Pro tec tio nL SP /PW
E1 BTS FE NodeB
NE7 STM-1
10xGE ring
GE ring
10xGE ring NE6
BSC
NE3 155/622 Mbit/s ring
E1 BTS FE NodeB
2.5/10 Gbit/s ring
10 Gbit/s ring
FE/GE RNC
NE2
NE5 PWE3
NE8 L2
As shown in Figure 4-1, NE1 and NE2 are generally OptiX OSN 1500 or OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000) NEs; NE3, NE4, NE5, and NE6 are generally OptiX OSN 3500 or OptiX OSN 7500 NEs; NE7 and NE8 are generally OptiX OSN 7500 NEs. In TDM domain, E1 services from base stations are transmitted on the TDM network comprised of OptiX OSN equipment, traversing the 155/622 Mbit/s ring, 2.5/10 Gbit/s ring, and 10 Gbit/s ring one after another. Then, the E1 services are converged to STM-1 services and are finally sent to the BSC. In packet domain, FE services from base stations are transmitted on the packet network comprised of OptiX OSN equipment, as follows: If the RNC is capable of processing VLAN tags, FE services from base stations traverse the GE ring and 10xGE rings one after another and are then transmitted to the RNC. The RNC determines the base station from which an FE service is transmitted according to its VLAN tag. LSPs/PWs are isolated from each other, therefore featuring high transmission security. The packet network comprised of OptiX OSN equipment supports 1+1 and 1:1 LSP/PW protection, enhancing network security. If the RNC is incapable of processing VLAN tags, the RNC does not identify VLAN tags contained in the FE services from base stations and instead determines the base station from which an FE service are transmitted according to its MAC address.
4-2
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
/*#*# !ybrid Net,or8in ,ith Routers

In the case of the packet domain, you can deploy a Layer 2 network by using OptiX OSN equipment and then connect the Layer 2 network to RNCs through routers, therefore improving network scalability based on the powerful Layer 3 processing capabilities of the routers. Figure 4-2 shows the typical networking diagram. Figure 4-2 Hybrid networking with routers
PWE3 STM-1 E1 BTS FE NodeB E1 BTS FE NodeB PWE3 L2
W or kin
L3 BSC Router 1
NE1
NE3
Working LSP/PW Protection LSP/PW
Pr g ot LS ec P/ tio PW n LS P/ PW
VRRP
RNC
NE2
NE4
Router 2 L3
As shown in Figure 4-2, NE1 and NE2 are generally OptiX OSN 1500 or OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000) NEs; NE3 and NE4 are generally OptiX OSN 3500 or OptiX OSN 7500 NEs. In TDM domain, E1 services from base stations are transmitted on the TDM network comprised of OptiX OSN equipment, traversing NE1 and NE3. Then, the E1 services are converged to STM-1 services and finally sent to the BSC. In packet domain, FE services from base stations are transmitted on the packet network comprised of OptiX OSN equipment and routers, as follows: FE services from base stations are transmitted to router 1 over end-to-end PWs. Router 1 terminates the PW labels in the FE services, identifies the FE services according to their IP L3 labels, and then sends the FE services to the RNC side. In this case, router 1 needs to support communication associated with services, protection, and OAM. FE services from base stations are transmitted to NE4 over end-to-end PWs. NE4 terminates PW labels in the FE services. The FE services are transmitted over a Layer 2 network when distinguished by VLAN tags and then are sent to router 2. Router 2 terminates the VLAN tags in the FE services and then sends the FE services to the RNC. The RNC determines the source base station of each FE service according to its IP L3 label. This transmission mode enables the OptiX OSN equipment to interconnect with equipment of more vendors and to support more flexible networking modes.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
4-3
/*- Net,or8in ,ith the Pac8et Domain 1verlappin the TD2 Domain
The packet features of the OptiX OSN 3500 enable the equipment to overlap the Ethernet service network based in packet domain on the TDM network.
Access >ayer 1verlaid ,ith the G5 Rin 7 Conver ence:Core >ayer 1verlaid ,ith the %"G5 Rin
The OptiX OSN 3500 can be used to transmit Ethernet services in packet domain overlaying on the TDM network. Figure 4-3 shows that the packet service and SDH service exist on the same network. The packet service is transmitted on the packet ring, and the SDH service is transmitted on the TDM ring. There is no interference between the two types of services. After the IP-based telecommunication is realized, the OptiX OSN 3500 can be smoothly upgraded to the pure packet domain. Hence, the increasing requirements for packet services can be satisfied. Figure 4-3 The access layer overlaid with the GE ring and the convergence/core layer overlaid with the 10GE ring
In the preceding typical networking diagram, the OptiX OSN 1500 or the OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000) is generally used at the access layer, and the OptiX OSN 3500/7500 is generally used at the convergence/core layer. At the access layer, SDH services are transmitted on the STM-1/STM-4 ring and packet services are transmitted on the GE ring. At the backbone/convergence layer, SDH services are transmitted on the STM-16/STM-64 ring and packet services are transmitted on the 10GE ring. SDH services are transmitted in TDM domain and packet services are transmitted in packet domain. In the overlay networking of the TDM domain and packet domain, the OptiX OSN equipment in TDM domain uses the end-to-end TDM service protection, and the OptiX OSN equipment in packet domain uses the end-to-end LSP/PW protection that realizes protection switching under 50 ms.
4-4
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Usin the 5oS Service Dividin (oard to 1verlay the Conver ence:Core >ayer ,ith the %"G5 Rin
The OptiX OSN 3500 can use the EoS service dividing board to directly access Ethernet services through the TDM ring at the access layer. Figure 4-4 shows how this function is realized. As the packet service increases, the EoS service dividing board provides a solution for the expansion of the SDH network and improves the utilization of the equipment at the access layer. Figure 4-4 Using the EoS service dividing board to overlay the convergence/core layer with the 10GE ring
RNC GE BSC STM-1 10GE ring
TDM Crossconnection SDH line board 10GE Ethernet board EOS service dividing board Packet crossconnection
RNC GE
BSC STM-1
E1 BTS NodeB FE
STM-16/ STM-64ring
STM-1/4 ring TDM ring E1 FE NodeB BTS Packet ring TDM cross-connection Packet cross-connection
In the preceding typical networking diagram, the OptiX OSN 1500 or the OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000) is generally used at the access layer, and the OptiX OSN 3500/7500 is generally used at the convergence/core layer. As shown in Figure 4-4, only the TDM domain is available at the STM-1/STM-4 access layer. The OptiX OSN 1500 transmits the E1 and FE services that are accessed by the base station to the OptiX OSN 3500/7500. At the backbone/convergence layer, the 10GE packet ring and the STM-16/STM-64 TDM ring are available. The OptiX OSN 3500/7500 uses the EoS service dividing board (N1EOQ41) to transmit two types of services in TDM domain and packet domain separately at the backbone/convergence layer. That is, E1 services are transmitted on the STM-16/STM-64 ring at the backbone/convergence layer, and FE services are transmitted on the 10GE ring at the backbone/convergence layer. The purpose is to realize the end-to-end transmission of E1 services to the BSC and the end-to-end transmission of FE services to the RNC.
/*/ !ybrid Net,or8in ,ith 1ther !ua,ei 5=uipment

Dual-core OptiX OSN 3500 can flexibly construct a network with other Huawei equipment. OptiX OSN equipment supports the following hybrid networking scenarios:
Issue 02 (2010-11-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4-5
Hybrid networking with OptiX PTN equipment Hybrid networking with OptiX RTN equipment 4.4.1 Hybrid Networking with the PTN Equipment The OptiX OSN 3500 supports hybrid networking with the PTN equipment, therefore implementing end-to-end management. 4.4.2 Hybrid Networking with the RTN Equipment The OptiX OSN 3500 supports hybrid networking with the RTN equipment, therefore implementing end-to-end management.
/*/*% !ybrid Net,or8in ,ith the PTN 5=uipment

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports hybrid networking with the PTN equipment, therefore implementing end-to-end management. As shown in Figure 4-5, the hybrid networking allows more flexible reform of the existing network and optimal utilization of the network resources. Figure 4-5 Hybrid networking with Huawei MSTP and PTN equipment
NMS RNC GE BSC STM-1 GE RNC BSC STM-1
10GE ring STM-16/64 ring
E1 BTS
STM-1/4 ring
SDH line board 10GEEthernet board
E1
GE ring
FE
FE BTS NodeB FE
NodeB
TDM ring Packet ring TDM plane Packet plane PTN equipment MSTP equipment
NodeB
In the preceding typical networking, the OptiX OSN 1500 or OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000) or the OptiX PTN 910/950/1900 is used at the access layer. At the backbone/convergence layer, the OptiX OSN 3500/7500 or the OptiX PTN 3900 is used.
4-6
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
See Figure 4-5. In packet domain, the equipment at the access layer, such as the OptiX OSN 1500 or the OptiX PTN equipment, accesses the FE services from the 3G base stations, and transmits the FE services to the GE packet ring ,then to the 10GE convergence/backbone ring, and finally to the RNC. In this manner, the FE services from the base stations are transmitted to the RNC in an end-to-end manner. See Figure 4-5. In TDM domain, the equipment at the access layer, such as the OptiX OSN 1500 or the OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000), accesses the E1 services from the BTS to the STM-1/STM-4 ring consisting of the MSTP equipment and then transmits the service to the STM-16/STM-64 ring consisting of the OptiX OSN equipment (convergence/backbone layer) and finally to the BSC. In this manner, the E1 services from the BTS are transmitted to the BSC in an end-to-end manner. In the hybrid networking of the OptiX OSN 3500, the MSTP equipment, and the PTN equipment, a unified NMS is used.
/*/*# !ybrid Net,or8in ,ith the RTN 5=uipment

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports hybrid networking with the RTN equipment, therefore implementing end-to-end management. As shown in Figure 4-6, hybrid networking allows more flexible reform of the existing network and optimal utilization of the network resources. Figure 4-6 Hybrid networking with Huawei MSTP and RTN equipment
NMS BSC STM-1 GE RNC
10GE Ring
10GE Ring
STM-16/64 Ring
STM-16/64 Ring
STM-4/16 Ring
GE Ring
STM-1/4 Ring FE E1 BTS E1 Node B BTS
GE Ring
FE FE Node B
BTS
Node B
TDM ring Packet ring Radio ring
MSTP equipment at the access layer
MSTP equipment at the backbone layer
MSTP equipment at the convergence layer
RTN equipment
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
4-7
In the preceding typical networking, the OptiX OSN 1500 or OptiX RTN equipment is used at the access layer. The OptiX OSN 3500/7500 is often used at the convergence/backbone layer. See Figure 4-6. In packet domain, the equipment at the access layer, such as the OptiX OSN 1500 or the OptiX RTN equipment, accesses the FE services from the NodeB, and transmits the FE services to the GE packet ring ,then to the 10GE convergence/backbone ring, and finally to the RNC. In this manner, the FE services from the base stations are transmitted to the RNC in an end-to-end manner. See Figure 4-6. In TDM domain, the equipment at the access layer, such as the OptiX OSN 1500 accesses the E1 services from the BTS to the STM-1/STM-4 ring consisting of the MSTP equipment and then transmits the service to the STM-16/STM-64 ring consisting of the OptiX OSN equipment (convergence/backbone layer) and finally to the BSC. In this manner, the E1 services from the BTS are transmitted to the BSC in an end-to-end manner. In the hybrid networking of the OptiX OSN 3500, the MSTP equipment, and the RTN equipment, a unified NMS is used.
4-8
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
5 OAM
0
0*% Administration and Au;iliary Inter+aces
The equipment provides several types of administration and auxiliary interfaces. Table 5-1 lists the types of administration and auxiliary interfaces. Table 5-1 Administration and auxiliary interfaces Inter+ace Type Administration interface Description One remote maintenance interface (OAM) Four broadcast data interfaces (S1-S4) One 64 kbit/s codirectional data path interface (F1)
1A2
One Ethernet interface (10M/100M) for network management (ETH) One serial interface for administration (F&f) One commissioning interface (COM) Orderwire interface One orderwire phone interface (PHONE) Two SDH NNI voice interfaces (V1 and V2) Two SDH NNI signaling interfaces (S1 and S2, used with two broadcast data interfaces) Clock interface Two 75-ohm external clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz) Two 120-ohm external clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz) External synchronization and synchronous output Alarm interface 16-input and 4-output alarm interface Four output interfaces for cabinet alarm indicator Four input interfaces for cabinet alarm indicator concatenation Four input interfaces for cabinet alarm concatenation Microwave IF interface One coaxial cable connects to one ODU. Each board provides two cables to separately connect two ODUs. Two -48 VDC power input interfaces.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
5-1
5 OAM
0*# DCN 2ana ement Scheme

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports two DCN modes: outband data communication network (DCN) and inband DCN. 5.2.1 Outband DCN The OptiX OSN equipment supports various outband DCN modes. 5.2.2 Inband DCN
The OptiX OSN equipment supports various inband DCN modes.
0*#*% 1utband DCN

The OptiX OSN equipment supports various outband DCN modes. An outband DCN indicates that the other channels (excluding service channels) are used to transmit the network management information, thus managing the network. An outband DCN requires a dedicated communication channel and a maintenance channel that is independent of the service channels. If the outband DCN mode is used, the network management center can build a DCN network with the managed equipment through multiple methods (for example, E1 private line or Ethernet). Then, the network management center can manage the network under control. Compared with an inband DCN, an outband DCN provides the management paths that are more reliable. If any fault occurs on the service channels, the network management center can obtain the network management information immediately and monitor the equipment in real time. The OptiX OSN equipment supports the following outband DCN networking technologies: HWECC IP over DCC OSI over DCC Table 5-2 lists the DCC resource allocation modes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 5-2 DCC allocation modes of the OptiX OSN 3500 DCC Allocation Channel type Operation mode Mode 1 Mode 2 N/GSCC:N3GSCC Supports the D1-D1, D1-D3 and D4-D12 channel types. Supports 160 D1-D3 channels. Supports 40 D1-D3 channels. Supports 40 D4-D12 channels. Mode 3 Supports 26 D1-D3 channels. Supports 26 D4-D12 channels. Mode 4 Supports 12 D1-D3 channels. Supports 12 D4-D12 channels. Mode 5 Supports eight D1-D3 channels.
5-2
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
5 OAM
DCC Allocation Mode 6 Mode 7
N/GSCC:N3GSCC Supports 10 D1-D3 channels. Supports 70 D1-D3 channels. Supports 30 D4-D12 channels.
Mode 8
Supports 100 D1-D3 channels. Supports 20 D4-D12 channels.
Mode 9
Supports 30 D1-D1 channels. Supports 150 D1-D3 channels.
Mode 10
Supports 30 D1-D1 channels. Supports 39 D1-D3 channels. Supports 37 D4-D12 channels.
Protocol type Default mode
Supports HWECC, IP, and OSI protocols. Mode 1
When interconnected with the OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000), the OptiX OSN 3500 does not support the D4-D12 channel type if the DCN networking runs the IP over DCC protocol. Otherwise, communication is interrupted.
0*#*# Inband DCN

The OptiX OSN equipment supports various inband DCN modes. In TDM mode, the SDH and Ethernet services carried by the equipment uses the outband DCN networking. In packet mode, the Ethernet services carried by the equipment uses the inband DCN networking. If the inband DCN mode is used, the network management information is transmitted on the services channels of the equipment. If the inband DCN mode is used, the network management information is encapsulated as payload and is transmitted through the service channels without setting up a dedicated DCN channel. The inband DCN networking provides the feature of flexible networking and does not require extra equipment. The OptiX OSN equipment supports the following inband DCN networking technologies: HWECC IP
By default, the inband DCN networking uses the IP technology.
For details on the inband DCN, see Inband DCN Solution in the Feature Description.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
5-3
5 OAM
0*- Net,or8 2ana ement

The OptiX OSN equipment is uniformly managed by the transmission network management system (hereinafter referred to as the NMS) through the ETH port. The NMS maintains the OSN, SDH, Metro, and DWDM network elements (NEs) on the entire network.The NMS can implement end-to-end protection configuration for TDM and packet mode services. The OptiX OSN equipment complies with ITU-T recommendations. The equipment adopts the management information model and the object-oriented management technology. With the NMS, the equipment can exchange information with the NE software through the communication module to manage the alarms and performance events in a centralized manner. In addition, the end-to-end configuration on the management plane can be realized. The OptiX OSN equipment supports the simple network management protocol (SNMPv2/SNMPv3), which solves the uniform NMS problem for the networking of equipment from different vendors.
0*/ Alarm and Per+ormance 2ana ement

The OptiX OSN equipment supports alarm and performance management, that can help the network administrators to locate and rectify faults quickly. In the case of an emergency, the GSCC board generates audible and visual alarms to prompt the network administrators to take proper measures. The AUX board provides 16 alarm input interfaces, four alarm output interfaces, four output interfaces for cabinet alarm indicators, and alarm concatenation interfaces to facilitate operation and maintenance of the equipment. Each board provides running and alarm indicators to help the network administrators to locate and rectify faults quickly. Alarm storms can be suppressed. If the number of reported alarms exceeds 1860, the NE reports that excessive alarms are generated. Then, the board does not report excessive alarms. The NG-SDH equipment supports the alarm muting function. You can mute an alarm by pressing the key on the GSCC board or by using the NM interface. The connectivity of the network cable between NEs can be automatically monitored. After detecting any faults, they automatically report the relevant alarms. The working temperature of certain boards can be queried. When an MSP switching or a TPS switching occurs, the state of an alarm or of a performance event is not changed in the working path. Thus, the service administrator focuses on the service state only.
0*0 A>S .unction And 1ptical Po,er 2ana ement

The OptiX OSN equipment supports in-service detection of the optical power of SDH optical interfaces and provides the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function for the SDH single-mode optical interfaces.
5-4
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
5 OAM
A>S .unction
The OptiX OSN equipment provides the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function for the SDH optical interfaces. When a fiber that connects two optical interfaces is cut, an R-LOS alarm is generated at the optical interface of the local end. If the R_LOS alarm lasts for 500 ms, the laser of the transmit optical interface at the local end is automatically shut down. By default, the laser pulse is generated at a 60-second interval and lasts for 2s every time. After the fiber connection is restored, the optical interface at the opposite end detects the laser pulse generated from the local end. The laser of the optical interface at the opposite end then continuously launches laser beams. After receiving the laser beams launched by the opposite end, the laser of the local end then also continuously launches the laser beams. As a result, the two optical interfaces can communicate with each other and the R-LOS alarm is cleared.
1ptical Po,er 2ana ement

The OptiX OSN equipment supports in-service detection of the optical power of SDH optical interfaces. The OptiX OSN equipment provides the function to query the parameters of the SDH optical module. The parameters that can be queried include the optical interface type, fiber mode (single-mode or multi-mode), transmission distance, transmission rate, and wavelength. The optical interface board uses the pluggable optical module. Users can choose single-mode or multi-mode optical modules according to the requirement, which facilitates the maintenance. The optical power threshold of the boards can be queried.
0*3 .ault >ocatin and 5=uipment 2aintenance

The OptiX OSN equipment provides multiple maintenance methods. In this manner, users can conveniently monitor and commission the equipment, and locate the fault on the equipment.
.ault >ocatin
Certain tributary boards, line boards, and cross-connect boards support the PRBS test and the remote bit error test. The OptiX OSN equipment provides the press-to-collect function for fault data. This function reduces the data collection time before service restoration. By using this function, the user is able to selectively collect fault data, and to manually cancel the collection according to the requirement. The operation logs can be queried. The operations and maintenance activities can be traced to determine the fault causes and the accident responsibilities. The connectivity status of the services can be determined. The faulty node can be analyzed.
5T!&1A2 and 2P>S 1A2

Ethernet boards provide the OAM function. This function is used to automatically detect faults in Ethernet, and to help locate and isolate these faults.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
5-5
5 OAM
The MPLS OAM and ETH-OAM function is supported. The enabling state of detecting the alarms in the MSP protection path can be queried. The PW OAM and Tunnel OAM function are supported. Different alarms are used to detect the faults of working links.
2aintenance
The OptiX OSN equipment provides the orderwire phone function for management personnel at different sites to communicate with each other. The NMS can be used to dynamically monitor the equipment running status and alarms of each set of equipment on a network. The OptiX OSN equipment supports the remote maintenance function. When the equipment becomes faulty, the maintenance personnel can use the public phone network to remotely maintain the OptiX OSN equipment system. The OptiX OSN equipment supports the hot swapping of the boards. The OptiX OSN equipment provides the board version replacement function. This helps to replace the board of with the board of a later version. After the replacement, the configuration and service status of the board of a later version are the same as the configuration and service status of the board of the previous version. The power consumption of the equipment and boards can be queried and controlled. After being inserted, the board does not work if the total power consumption of the boards exceeds the power consumption threshold of the equipment. The OptiX OSN equipment supports the query of the current status of the NE, board, and port. The daylight saving time can be set. The daylight saving time is adjusted according to the daylight saving time in the country.
0*) (oard Replacement and 5=uipment Up rade

The OptiX OSN equipment supports a network upgrade through board replacement or software upgrade. The following part describes several key network upgrade methods. 5.7.1 Board Version Replacement The board version replacement function replaces an old version board with a new version board. After the replacement, the configuration and service status of the new version board are consistent with the configuration and service status of the old version board. 5.7.2 Simulation Package Loading and Simulation Package Diffusion The OptiX OSN equipment provides the functions of simulation package loading and simulation package diffusion. 5.7.3 Hot Patch The OptiX OSN equipment supports the hot patch technology. 5.7.4 NSF Function NSF stands for Non-interrupted Service Forwarding. The OptiX OSN equipment supports the NSF function. When the control plane of the equipment is faulty, the NSF function ensures that the data services are not interrupted, thus ensuring transmission of the key services on the network.
5-6
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
5 OAM
5.7.5 Smooth Upgrade Based on the increasing demands for packet services and stable requirements for conventional TDM services, the OptiX OSN equipment supports a smooth upgrade from the TDM mode to the packet mode.
0*)*% (oard Version Replacement

The board version replacement function replaces an old version board with a new version board. After the replacement, the configuration and service status of the new version board are consistent with the configuration and service status of the old version board. This function provides a flexible board replacement scheme. For detailed replacement relations of boards that support this function, refer to Part Replacement Design. When using the board version replacement function, note the following points: The new board may not support the functions of the original board. Before the replacement, fully consider the difference of functions of the two boards. For example, If the N2SL64 board is configured with the TCM function or AU-3 services, it cannot be replaced with the N1SL64 board. The line board to be replaced cannot have an optical-path-shared MSP configured.
A board can support only the AU-3 services or TCM function.
0*)*# Simulation Pac8a e >oadin and Simulation Pac8a e Di++usion

The OptiX OSN equipment provides the functions of simulation package loading and simulation package diffusion.
Simulation Pac8a e >oadin

When you need to upload the whole set of the software to an NE, and the mapping between the board and software is defined according to the format of the simulation software package, you can use the simulation software package to improve the loading efficiency and upgrade security, and reduce the operation complexity. The simulation software package includes: All the necessary software to be loaded to the NE Package description document that specifies the loading attributes of each software The simulation software package loading has the following features: The user loads the software on an NE basis and through a uniform operation interface. The status of the NE does not affect the loading. A version rollback is supported for an upgrade failure.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
5-7
5 OAM
Simulation Pac8a e Di++usion

When you use the simulation package simulation method, the simulation software package is diffused and loaded to all NEs on a network. The diffusion protocol running on the NEs ensures that the loading process is almost synchronous. As a result, package loading is more efficient and less manual operations are required. Simulation package diffusion has the following features: Level-by-level package diffusion and synchronous package loading on multiple NEs Load sharing Balanced utilization of network bandwidths
0*)*- !ot Patch

The OptiX OSN equipment supports the hot patch technology. Some equipment requires long-term uninterrupted operation. When a defect is located or a new requirement needs to be applied to the equipment software, a process of replacing old codes with new codes should be performed to rectify the defect or realize the new requirement, without any service interruption. These new codes are referred to as a hot patch. The hot patch technology has the following features: The hot patch solves most of the software problems without affecting services. The hot patch effectively decreases the number of software versions and prevents frequent software version upgrade. The hot patch operation does not affect services and can be performed remotely. The hot patch also provides a rollback function. This helps to decrease the upgrade cost and to avoid upgrade risks. The hot patch can be used as an effective method for locating faults, and thus improves the efficiency of solving problems.
0*)*/ NS. .unction

NSF stands for Non-interrupted Service Forwarding. The OptiX OSN equipment supports the NSF function. When the control plane of the equipment is faulty, the NSF function ensures that the data services are not interrupted, thus ensuring transmission of the key services on the network. The TDM Ethernet boards that support the NSF function are N4EFS0 and N2EFS4. The packet boards that support the NSF function are N1PEG16, N1PETF8, and N1PEX1. When a warm reset is performed on the packet cross-connect board N1PSXCS/N2PSXCSA, the interruption duration of the data services on processing boards of the OptiX OSN equipment is within 50 ms, thus complying with the carrier-level service non-interruption standard.
0*)*0 Smooth Up rade

Based on the increasing demands for packet services and stable requirements for conventional TDM services, the OptiX OSN equipment supports a smooth upgrade from the TDM mode to the packet mode. The OptiX OSN equipment supports the following smooth upgrade schemes:
5-8
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
5 OAM
Smooth upgrade through adding boards and software upgrade, without replacement of the original equipment Smooth upgrade through replacement of the original cross-connect board with a dual-mode cross-connect board, which can process the services in TDM mode and in packet mode
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
5-9
6 Security Management
Security 2ana ement
3*% Authentication 2ana ement

Considering the security, only the legal user can log in to the NE after authentication. NE login management: You can successfully log in to the NE only by entering a valid user name and a valid password. NE user switching: On a client, only one user is allowed to operate the NE each time. For this reason, if multiple users intend to operate the same NE simultaneously, they need to be switched to ensure that the data is unique. Forcibly making other users exit from the NE: To avoid errors caused by simultaneous configuration by multiple users, or to prevent other users from illegally logging in to the NE, one user can forcibly make other users who are at lower level exit from the NE. NE login locking: After the locking function is enabled, a user whose level is lower than that of the current user is not allowed to log in to the NE. NE setting locking: You can lock the settings of functional modules of the NE to prevent other users from operating the locked modules. Query the online NE users.
3*# Authori<ation 2ana ement

Proper authority assignment to different NE users can ensure the successful operations performed by each user and the security of the NE system. NE user management:
According to the operation authorities, NE users are divided into five levels, which involve monitoring level, operation level, maintenance level, system level, and debugging level in an ascending order. According to the NMS, NE users are classified into LCT NE users, EMS NE users, CMD NE users, and general NE users. Create NE users, assign authorities, or specify a user flag. Modify the user name, change the password, modify the operation authority, or change the user flag. Delete NE users.
NE user group management:
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
6-1
According to the operation authority, by default, NE user groups are divided into administrator group, super administrator group, operator group, monitoring personnel group, and maintenance personnel group. Modify the group of a user.
3*- Net,or8 Security 2ana ement

Safe data transmission between the NMS and NEs is the prerequisite for the NMS to effectively manage the NEs. The NMS communicates with NEs through the security socket layer (SSL) protocol. Therefore, the data is complete and safe. Set the ACL rule to filter the received IP packets, control the data traffic in the network, and to avoid malicious attack. According to the system security level, the ACL rule is divided into basic ACL and advanced ACL.
For an NE that requires lower security level, you can set the basic ACL rule only to check the source address of the IP packets only. For an NE that requires higher security level, you can set the advanced ACL rule. In this case, the NE checks the source address, sink address, source port, sink port, and protocol type of the received IP packets. If both the advanced and the basic ACL rules are available, the NE adopts the advanced ACL rule to check the packets. Query the ACL rule. Modify the ACL rule. Delete the ACL rule. Access over the Ethernet network. By default, an NE allows the NMS to access it over the Ethernet network. Access through the OAM port.
An NE can access the NMS by using any of the following methods:
Control the access to NEs by using LCT: If the NMS needs to be used to manage NEs, you can enable the LCT access authority allowed by the NE on the NMS. When the NMS communicates with an NE, confidential data (such as user name and password) is encrypted.
3*/ System Security 2ana ement

Considering the security, the system provides some security policies, which must be executed forcibly. Query or set the Warning Screen information of the NE. Query and set the Warning Screen switch of the NE to decide whether to report an alarm after a user logs in to the NE. Query or set the earliest expiry time and the latest expiry time of the password. Query or set the maximum number of illegal login attempts. Query or set the maximum number of overdue password attempts. Query or set the password uniqueness.
6-2
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
3*0 >o 2ana ement

The OptiX OSN equipment provides log management functions. 6.5.1 NE Security Log Management The NE security logs record the operations performed by all the NE users and the operation results. By querying these logs, the administrator can trace and review the operations. 6.5.2 Syslog Management The system log service (Syslog service) is used for the security management on an NE. For unified control by maintenance engineers, all types of information are transmitted to the log server in the format complying with the system log (Syslog) protocol.
3*0*% N5 Security >o 2ana ement

The NE security logs record the operations performed by all the NE users and the operation results. By querying these logs, the administrator can trace and review the operations. Query the security logs of the NE. Set forwarding NE logs to the Syslog Server.
3*0*# Syslo 2ana ement

The system log service (Syslog service) is used for the security management on an NE. For unified control by maintenance engineers, all types of information are transmitted to the log server in the format complying with the system log (Syslog) protocol. The OptiX OSN equipment supports: Enabling and disabling of Syslog protocol Setting of Syslog protocol transmit modes: UDP (by default) and TCP Adding and deletion of Syslog servers Coexisting of multiple Syslog servers and the sending of logs to multiple servers at the same time Reporting of alarms upon the communication disconnection between the Syslog server and the NE Figure 6-1 shows how the Syslog protocol is transmitted in a network. To ensure the security of system logs, make sure that at least two system log servers are available in a network. Normally, IP protocol is used for the communication between the NE and the system log servers. The communication between NEs can be realized through several methods, for example, ECC mode or IP over DCC mode.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
6-3
Figure 6-1 Schematic diagram of Syslog protocol transmitting

NE B
NMS
NE A (client) ECC/ IP OVER DCC TCP/IP real time security log
NE C (client)
Syslog Server B
Syslog Server A
NE D
Normally, a system log server is a workstation or server that is dedicated to storing the system logs of all NEs in a network. A forwarding gateway NE receives the system logs of other NEs and forwards the logs to the system log server. In Figure 6-1, NE A and NE C are forwarding gateway NEs.
When IP protocol is adopted on each NE for communication, every NE can directly communicate with the two system log servers through the IP protocol. Hence, configure the IP addresses and port numbers on the NE, and the system is able to transmit the NE logs to the two Syslog servers through the auto addressing function of IP protocol. No forwarding gateway NE is required. When ECC mode is adopted on each NE for communication, the NE that does not directly connect to the Syslog servers cannot communicate with the servers. The logs of the NE must be transmitted to a gateway NE that directly communicates with the Syslog servers through ECC. Then, the logs are forwarded to the Syslog servers by the gateway NE. Hence, the forwarding gateway NE must be configured, for example, configure NE A as the forwarding gateway NE for NE D.
6-4
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
7 Technical Specifications
Technical Speci+ications
)*% 1verall Speci+ications o+ the 5=uipment

The overall specifications of the equipment include the packet switching capability, TDM cross-connect capability, specifications of the cabinet, specifications of the subrack, power supply parameters, laser safety class, electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), and environmental specifications. 7.1.1 Specifications of the Cabinet The technical specifications of the cabinet include the dimensions, weight, and number of permitted subracks. 7.1.2 Specifications of the Subrack The technical specifications of the subrack include the dimensions, weight, and maximum power consumption. 7.1.3 Power Supply Parameters This topic describes the parameters for configuring different PIU boards. 7.1.4 Laser Safety Class
The safety class of the laser on each board is Class 1, Class 4, or Class 1M. 7.1.5 Electromagnetic Compatibility The OptiX OSN equipment is designed according to the ETS 300 386 and ETS 300 127 standards stipulated by the ETSI. The equipment has passed the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) related tests. 7.1.6 Environmental Specification The equipment requires proper environment for normal operation.
)*%*% Speci+ications o+ the Cabinet

The technical specifications of the cabinet include the dimensions, weight, and number of permitted subracks. Table 7-1 lists the technical specifications of the ETSI cabinet.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
7-1
Table 7-1 Technical specifications of the ETSI cabinet Dimensions $mm' 600 (width) x 300 (depth) x 2000 (height) (T63) 600 (width) x 300 (depth) x 2000 (height) (N63E) 600 (width) x 600 (depth) x 2000 (height) (N66T) 600 (width) x 600 (depth) x 2000 (height) (T66) 600 (width) x 300 (depth) x 2200 (height) (T63) 600 (width) x 300 (depth) x 2200 (height) (N63E) 600 (width) x 600 (depth) x 2200 (height) (N66T) 600 (width) x 600 (depth) x 2200 (height) (T66) 600 (width) x 300 (depth) x 2600 (height) (T63) 600 (width) x 600 (depth) x 2600 (height) (T66) 9ei ht $8 ' 58 41 71 80 63 45 76 85 73 101 Number o+ Permitted Subrac8s 1 1 2 2 2 2 4 4 2 4
NOTE The 600 mm ETSI cabinet can house non-high power subracks and enhanced subracks (1100 W) that reside in back-to-back mode.
Both the N63E cabinet and N66T cabinet are available in two heights, namely, 2000 mm and 2200 mm. If the cabinet that is 2600 mm high is required, add an enclosure frame that is 400 mm high on a cabinet that is 2200 mm high.
The DC power distribution unit (PDU) is located on the top of a cabinet and is used to provide power to the equipment. Table 7-2 lists the technical specifications of the PDU. Table 7-2 Technical specifications of the PDU (oard Dimensions $mm' Sin le&Cabi net Input Volta e $V' -48 (DC) -60 (DC) -48 (DC) -60 (DC) Sin le&Cabi net 1utput Volta e $V' -38.4 to -57.6 -48 to -72 -38.4 to -57.6 -48 to -72 1utput Current $A' 2a;imum Number o+ Allo,ed Subrac8s 2
N1PDU
530 (W) x 97 (D) x 133 (H) 535 (W) x 147 (D) x 133 (H)
4x20 A 4x32 A 4x60 A 4x30 A
TN51P DU
7-2
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
(oard
Dimensions $mm'
Sin le&Cabi net Input Volta e $V'
Sin le&Cabi net 1utput Volta e $V'
1utput Current $A'
2a;imum Number o+ Allo,ed Subrac8s
NOTE Two power inputs need to be provided, and they work in 1+1 load-sharing mode. In the telecommunications room, it is required that the PDU needs to provide power supply for an entire subrack. In this case, normal power supply can be guaranteed when either of the power inputs fails.
)*%*# Speci+ications o+ the Subrac8

The technical specifications of the subrack include the dimensions, weight, and maximum power consumption. Table 7-3 lists the dimensions and weight of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack. Table 7-3 Dimensions and weight of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack Dimensions $mm' 497 (W) x 295 (D) x 722 (H) 9ei ht $8 ' 23 (net weight of the subrack that is not installed with boards and fans)
Table 7-4 lists the maximum power consumption of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
7-3
Table 7-4 Maximum power consumption of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack Subrac 8 Type 2a;imum Con+i uration 2a;imum Po,er Consumption General OptiX OSN 3500 subrack 720 W .use Capacit y 20 A Typical Con+i uration Typical Po,er Consumptio n 496 W Typical Con+i uration
Two N1SLD64 (S-64.2b, LC) boards Two N2SLQ4 (S-4.1, LC) boards Two N1SLQ16 (L-16.2, LC) boards Two N1SLH1 (S-1.1, LC) boards Four N1OU08 boards Two N2EGT2 boards Two N1PSXCS boards One N4GSCC board One N1AUX board Two N1PIU boards
Enhance d OptiX OSN 3500 subrack
1100 W
32 A
626 W
Two N1SL64 (S-64.2b, LC) boards Two N2SLQ4 (S-4.1, LC) boards One N1SLT1 (S-1.1, LC) board Two N1PEG8 boards Two N1PEX2 boards Two N1PETF8 boards Two N2PSXCSA boards One N1AUX board Two N1PIUA boards
Enhance d OptiX OSN 3500 subrack
2300 Wa
60 A
921 W
Five N1PEG8 boards Two N1PEX2 boards Two N2PEX1 boards Three N1PETF8 boards Two N2PSXCSA boards One N1AUX board Two N1PIUB boards
a: The default maximum power consumption of the equipment is 1100 W. If a power of 2300 W is required, change the maximum power consumption on the NMS.
7-4
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
When the cabinet is fully loaded, the maximum power consumption is the sum of the maximum power consumption of all subracks and the maximum power consumption of other configuration.
)*%*- Po,er Supply Parameters

This topic describes the parameters for configuring different PIU boards. Table 7-5 lists the power supply parameters. Table 7-5 Power supply parameters Item Power supply mode Nominal voltage Voltage range Maximum current Speci+ication DC power supply -48 V or -60 V -38.4 V to -57.6 V or -48 V to -72 V 18.75 A/28.7 Aa/60 Ab
a: This value indicates the maximum current of the equipment when the enhanced subrack (1100 W) is used. b: This value indicates the maximum current of the equipment when the enhanced subrack (2300 W) is used.
)*%*/ >aser Sa+ety Class

The safety class of the laser on each board is Class 1, Class 4, or Class 1M. The safety classes of the lasers are defined as follows: Class 1: The maximum launched optical power of the optical interfaces is less than 10 dBm (10 mW). Class 4: The maximum launched optical power of the optical interfaces is more than 27 dBm (500 mW). Class 1M: The maximum launched optical power of the optical interfaces is within the range from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW). Table 7-6 lists the safety classes of the lasers on the boards.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
7-5
Table 7-6 Laser safety class >aser Sa+ety Class Class 1 (oard
Packet processing boards Packet interface boards Dual-domain bridging boards SDH boards EoS boards ATM boards RPR boards WDM boards: N1MR2C, N1FIB, N1MR2A, N1LWX
Class 4 Class 1M
Optical amplifier boards and dispersion compensation boards: N1RPC01, N1RPC02 WDM boards: TN12OBU1, TN11MR2, TN11CMR2, TN11MR4, TN11CMR4 Optical power amplifier boards: BPA, BA2, 61COA, N1COA, 62COA
)*%*0 5lectroma netic Compatibility

The OptiX OSN equipment is designed according to the ETS 300 386 and ETS 300 127 standards stipulated by the ETSI. The equipment has passed the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) related tests. Table 7-7 lists the passed EMC-related test specifications. Table 7-7 EMC test results Item Radiated emission Standard CISPR22 Class AEN55022 Class A Conducted emission for DC ports CISPR22 Class A EN55022 Class A Conducted emission for signal ports CISPR22 Class A EN55022 Class A Immunity to radiated electromagnetic field Immunity to electrostatic discharge ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3 IEC 61000-4-3(80 MHz-2700 MHz: 10 V/m) ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3 IEC 61000-4-2 (air discharge: 8 kV; contact discharge: 6 kV)
7-6
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Item Immunity to electrical fast transient bursts for DC ports Immunity to electrical fast transient bursts for signal ports Immunity to surges for DC ports
Standard ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3 IEC 61000-4-4 (1 kV) ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.2 IEC 61000-4-4 (1 kV) ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3 IEC 61000-4-5 (line to line: 1 kV, line to ground: 2 kV)
Immunity to surges for signal ports
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3 IEC 61000-4-5 (1 kV)
Immunity to continuous conducted interference for DC ports Immunity to continuous conducted interference for signal ports Immunity to continuous voltage dips and short interruption and voltage variation for DC power port
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3 IEC 61000-4-6 (10 V) ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3 IEC 61000-4-6 (10 V) ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3 IEC 61000-4-29
)*%*3 5nvironmental Speci+ication

The equipment requires proper environment for normal operation. The equipment can operate normally in a long term in the environment defined in Table 7-8. Table 7-8 Environment specifications for long-term operation Speci+ications Altitude Air pressure Temperature Relative humidity Anti-seismic performance Description 4850 m 55 kPa to 106 kPa 0 C to 45 C 10% to 90% Compliant with ETS300-019-2-3-AMD
)*# Per+ormance Speci+ications o+ Pac8et S,itchin

This topic describes the performance specifications of packet switching of the OptiX OSN equipment in terms of system, protection, and clock.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
7-7
7.2.1 Packet System Performance The same performance parameters are available for different performance items of the OptiX OSN equipment. 7.2.2 Protection Performance of Packet Switching The protection performance complies with the ITU-T G.841 requirements. 7.2.3 IEEE 1588 V2 Synchronization Performance
The timing and synchronization performance complies with ITU-T G.813.
)*#*% Pac8et System Per+ormance

The same performance parameters are available for different performance items of the OptiX OSN equipment. Table 7-9 lists the system performance parameters specified for the OptiX OSN equipment. Table 7-9 System performance specifications Item MPLS Tunnel APS protection switching time PW APS protection switching time LAG protection switching time Speci+ication < 50 ms < 50 ms Supports a maximum of 64 LAGs, and each LAG has a maximum of 16 members. Supports intra-board LAG and inter-board LAG. < 500 ms in the case of link interruption in two directions or switching triggered by removing boards < 3s in the case of link interruption in one direction Maximum number of MC-LAGs supported by the entire system GSCC switching performance Number of supported MPLS tunnels (MPLS tunnel and PW shared bandwidth) 64 The services are not affected in the case of board removal or manual switching. N4GSCC: Supports 4k unidirectional MPLS tunnels, supports 2k bidirectional MPLS tunnels. N6GSCC: Supports 16k unidirectional MPLS tunnels, supports 8k bidirectional MPLS tunnels. Supports 16k MPLS bidirectional PWs. N4GSCC: 4k N6GSCC: 8k 1k
Number of static pseudo wires (PW) Number of supported E-Line services Number of supported E-LAN services
7-8
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Item Number of supported E-Aggr services MPLS Tunnel OAM (MPLS tunnel and PW shared bandwidth) MPLS Tunnel APS (MPLS tunnel and PW shared bandwidth) Maximum number of virtual ports supported by each VSI Number of static MAC addresses of the entire equipment on a private network Number of VLANs CAR (number of V-UNI ingress flows with bandwidth limiting enabled) ARP entries (static and dynamic entries sharing the same resources)
Speci+ication 4 N4GSCC: 2047 N6GSCC: 8188 N4GSCC: 1023 N6GSCC: 4092 256 2048
64k 8192
512
The preceding table lists only the maximum value of each packet-related item.
)*#*# Protection Per+ormance o+ Pac8et S,itchin

The protection performance complies with the ITU-T G.841 requirements.
%?% and %@% Protection +or 2P>S Tunnel APS

Table 7-10 lists the parameters of the MPLS Tunnel APS 1+1 and 1:1 protection.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
7-9
Table 7-10 MPLS Tunnel APS 1+1 and 1:1 protection parameters S,it chin Type Revert ive 2ode S,it chin Prot ocol S,itchi n 2ode S,itc hin Time S,itchin Delay Time De+ault 9TR Time S,itchin Condition $Any o+ the +ollo,in conditions tri ers the s,itchin ' The board has a hardware or software failure. The board is in a cold reset. A switching command is manually issued. Tunnel faulty is detected by MPLS OAM.
1+1 single -ende d switc hing 1+1 dualended switc hing 1+1 single -ende d switc hing 1+1 dualended switc hing 1:1 dualended switc hing 1:1 dualended switc hing
Non-re vertive
APS APS
Locked switching Forced switching Manual switching
50 ms
Non-re vertive
Exercise switching
Reverti ve
60 to 720s (300 by default)
Reverti ve
60 to 720s (300 by default) -
Non-re vertive
Reverti ve
P9 APS Protection
Table 7-11 provides the parameters for PW APS protection.
7-10
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Table 7-11 PW APS 1+1/1:1 protection parameters S,it chin Type Revert ive 2ode S,it chin Prot ocol S,itchi n 2ode S,itc hin Time S,itchin Delay Time De+ault 9TR Time S,itchin Condition $Any o+ the +ollo,in conditions tri ers the s,itchin ' The board has a hardware or software failure. The board is in a cold reset. A switching command is manually issued. Tunnel faulty is detected by PW OAM.
1+1 single -ende d switc hing 1+1 dualended switc hing 1+1 single -ende d switc hing 1+1 dualended switc hing 1:1 dualended switc hing 1:1 dualended switc hing
Non-re vertive
APS
Locked switching Forced switching Automati c switching Manual switching Exercise switching
50 ms
0s to 10s (0 by default)
Non-re vertive
Reverti ve
Reverti ve
60 to 720s (60 by default) -
Non-re vertive
Reverti ve
>PT Protection
Table 7-12 provides parameters for point-to-point LPT protection.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
7-11
Table 7-12 Parameters for point-to-point LPT protection Instance 16 S,itchin Condition LinkDown ETH_LOS 16 On the network side: dServer dLOCV dTTSI_Mismatch dTTSI_Mismerge dExcess On the client side: ETH_LOS LINK_DOWN Strict mode 500 ms
NOTE To ensure that the LPT switching time is no more than 500 ms, packet detection period of the OAM function for MPLS tunnels and PWs must be set to 3.3 ms.
S,itchin 2ode Strict mode
S,itchin Time 3 ms
Table 7-13 provides parameters for point-to-multipoint LPT protection. Table 7-13 Parameters for point-to-multipoint LPT protection Instance 16 S,itchin Condition LinkDown ETH_LOS 16 On the network side: dServer dLOCV dTTSI_Mismatch dTTSI_Mismerge dExcess On the user side: ETH_LOS LINK_DOWN S,itchin 2ode Strict mode Non-strict mode Strict mode Non-strict mode 500 ms
NOTE To ensure that the LPT switching time is no more than 500 ms, packet detection period of the OAM function for MPLS tunnels and PWs must be set to 3.3 ms.
S,itchin Time 3 ms
>AG Protection
Table 7-14 lists the related parameters of the LAG protection.
7-12
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Table 7-14 Parameters for LAG protection of Ethernet boards (packet mode) Parameter Switching condition (Any of the following conditions triggers the switching.) >AG The links of the interconnected equipment are directly connected to each other through static LAG or manual LAG, no intermediate equipment exists, and the fiber is cut in both directions. Switching time 500 ms. The links of the interconnected equipment are directly connected to each other through static LAG or manual LAG, no intermediate equipment exists, and the fiber is cut in one direction. In addition, the ports of the interconnected equipment are set to the auto-negotiation mode. Switching time 500 ms. The links of the interconnected equipment are directly connected to each other through static LAG, no intermediate equipment exists, and the fiber is cut in both directions. Switching time 3.5s. Revertive mode Revertive (default) Non-revertive LAG type Static Manual Load sharing mode Load sharing Load non-sharing
NOTE In the case of a manually aggregated LAG and the full-duplex configured for the ports, a fiber cut in one direction cannot ensure successful switching. In the other cases, the switching can be performed successfully within a period of three to six seconds. The system provides intra-board port LAG protection and inter-board LAG protection, which comply with the IEEE 802.3ad standard. The ports include FE and GE ports.
)*#*- I555 %044 V# Synchroni<ation Per+ormance

The timing and synchronization performance complies with ITU-T G.813. Table 7-15 provides the timing and synchronization performance of the IEEE 1588 V2. Table 7-15 Timing and synchronization performance of the IEEE 1588 V2 high precision clock Per+ormance Precision in the case of one station Precision in the case of 20 stations Description 30 ns 1 us
Table 7-16 provides the timing and synchronization performance of the synchronous Ethernet.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
7-13
Table 7-16 Timing and synchronization performance of the synchronous Ethernet Per+ormance Clock frequency accuracy (24 hours) Synchronization precision Description 1 ppm Complies with ITU-T G.8262.
)*- TD2 Per+ormance Speci+ication

This topic describes the TDM performance specifications of the OptiX OSN equipment in terms of clock, transmission, protection, timeslot, and laser safety class. 7.3.1 Timing and Synchronization Performance The timing and synchronization performance complies with ITU-T G.813. 7.3.2 Transmission Performance The transmission performance complies with ITU-T standards. 7.3.3 Protection Performance The protection performance complies with the ITU-T G.841 requirements. 7.3.4 Timeslot Numbering The equipment supports two TU-12 numbering schemes.
)*-*% Timin and Synchroni<ation Per+ormance

The timing and synchronization performance complies with ITU-T G.813. Table 7-17 lists the timing and synchronization performance. Table 7-17 Timing and synchronization performance Per+ormance Output Jitter Output Frequency in Free-Run Mode Long-Term Phase Variation in Locked Mode Description ITU-T G.813 compliant ITU-T G.813 compliant ITU-T G.813 compliant
)*-*# Transmission Per+ormance

The transmission performance complies with ITU-T standards. Table 7-18 lists the transmission performance.
7-14
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Table 7-18 Transmission performance Per+ormance Jitter at STM-N Interface Jitter at PDH Interface Bit Error Description Compliant with ITU-T G.813/G.825 Compliant with ITU-T G.823/G.783 Compliant with ITU-T G.826
)*-*- Protection Per+ormance

The protection performance complies with the ITU-T G.841 requirements.
>inear 2SP
Table 7-19 lists the linear MSP parameters. Table 7-19 Linear MSP parameters Protection Type 1+1 single-ended switching 1+1 single-ended switching 1+1 dual-ended switching 1+1 dual-ended switching 1:N (N14) dual-ended switching Revertive 2ode Non-reverti ve Revertive S,itchin Protocol Not required Not required APS protocol APS protocol APS protocol S,itchin Time 50 ms De+ault 9TR Time S,itchin Condition Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: R_LOS R_LOF 50 ms MS_AIS B2_EXC Revertive 50 ms 600s B2_SD (optional) Forced switching Revertive 50 ms 600s Manual switching Exercise switching
50 ms
600s
Non-reverti ve
2SP Rin
Table 7-20 lists the MSP ring parameters.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
7-15
Table 7-20 MSP ring parameters Protection Type Two-fiber bidirectional MSP Revertiv e 2ode Revertive S,itchin 2ode S,itchi n Time 50 ms De+ault 9TR Time 600s S,itchin Condition Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: R_LOS R_LOF MS_AIS B2_EXC 50 ms 600s B2_SD Forced switching Manual switching Exercise switching
Forced switching Manual switching Exercise switching
Two-fiber unidirection al MSP
Revertive
Forced switching Manual switching Exercise switching
50 ms
600s
Four-fiber bidirectional MSP
Revertive
Forced switching - ring Manual switching - ring Exercise switching - ring Forced switching - span Manual switching - span Exercise switching - span
SNCP
Table 7-21 lists the SNCP parameters.
7-16
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Table 7-21 SNCP parameters Protection Type SNCP Revertive 2ode Revertive Non-reverti ve S,itchin Time 50 ms 50 ms De+ault 9TR Time 600s S,itchin Conditions Any of the following alarms triggers the switching of VC4 level SNCP: R_LOS R_LOF R_LOC MS_AIS B2_EXC AU_AIS AU_LOP B3_EXC (Optional) B3_SD (Optional) HP_UNEQ (Optional) HP_TIM (Optional) Any of the following alarms triggers the switching of VC3 level SNCP: TU_LOP TU_AIS B3_EXC (Optional) B3_SD (Optional) Any of the following alarms triggers the switching of VC12 level SNCP: TU_LOP TU_AIS BIP_EXC (Optional) BIP_SD (Optional)
)*-*/ Timeslot Numberin

The equipment supports two TU-12 numbering schemes. Table 7-22 and Table 7-23 describe the two TU-12 numbering schemes of the OptiX OSN 3500. When creating cross-connections, you can use either of the following two numbering schemes for SDH optical/electrical lines or SDH radio links: Sequential scheme
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
7-17
The sequential scheme is also called timeslot scheme. The numbering formula is as follows: VC-12 number = TUG-3 number + (TUG-2 number - 1) x 3 + (TU-12 number -1) x 21 This scheme is the numbering scheme recommended in ITU-T G.707. By default, the OptiX OSN equipment uses this type of numbering scheme. Interleaved scheme The interleaved scheme is also called line scheme. The numbering formula is as follows: VC-12 number = (TUG-3 number - 1) x 21 + (TUG-2 number - 1) x 3 + TU-12 number The OptiX equipment uses the interleaved scheme if the OptiX equipment interconnects with equipment that also uses the interleaved scheme or if the interleaved scheme is specified for the OptiX equipment Table 7-22 TU-12 numbering in a VC-4 (sequential) TUG# $)&%' TU-3 (3-1) TU-3 (3-2) TU-3 (3-3) 1 2 2 4 3 2 2 3 4 4 3 2 4 4 5 TUG# $)&#' 4 2 5 4 6 5 2 6 4 7 6 2 7 4 8 TUG# $)&-' 7 2 8 4 9 8 2 9 5 0 9 3 0 5 1 TUG $)&/' 1 0 3 1 5 2 1 1 3 2 5 3 1 2 3 3 5 4 TUG $)&0' 1 3 3 4 5 5 1 4 3 5 5 6 1 5 3 6 5 7 TUG $)&3' 1 6 3 7 5 8 1 7 3 8 5 9 1 8 3 9 6 0 TUG $)&)' 1 9 4 0 6 1 2 0 4 1 6 2 2 1 4 2 6 3
Table 7-23 TU-12 numbering in a VC-4 (interleaved) TUG# $)&%' TU-3 (3-1) TU-3 (3-2) TU-3 (3-3) 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 4 4 3 4 4 4 5 TUG# $)&#' 4 5 6 2 5 2 6 2 7 4 6 4 7 4 8 TUG# $)&-' 7 8 9 2 8 2 9 3 0 4 9 5 0 5 1 TUG# $)&/' 1 0 1 1 1 2 3 1 3 2 3 3 5 2 5 3 5 4 TUG# $)&0' 1 3 1 4 1 5 3 4 3 5 3 6 5 5 5 6 5 7 TUG# $)&3' 1 6 1 7 1 8 3 7 3 8 3 9 5 8 5 9 6 0 TUG# $)&)' 1 9 2 0 2 1 4 0 4 1 4 2 6 1 6 2 6 3
)*/ 2icro,ave R. Per+ormance

This topic describes the radio work mode, frequency band, receiver sensitivity, transceiver performance, distortion sensitivity, IF performance, baseband signal processing performance of the modem, and link reliability.
This topic describes the specifications of the ODU. The OptiX OSN equipment does not support the 256QAM modulation scheme or the 56 MHz channel spacing.
7-18
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
7.4.1 Radio Work Modes The OptiX OSN equipment supports various work modes bases on TU/SDH microwave frames. 7.4.2 IF Performance
The IF performance indicates the performances of the IF signals and ODU O&M signals. 7.4.3 Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem The baseband signal processing performance of the modem indicates the performances of the FEC encoding mode and adaptive time-domain equalizer for baseband signals. 7.4.4 Equipment Reliability The 1+0 non-protection configuration and 1+1 protection configuration have different link reliabilities. 7.4.5 SP ODU The SP ODU is a type of the standard power ODU. 7.4.6 HP ODU The HP ODU is a type of the high power ODU.
)*/*% Radio 9or8 2odes

The OptiX OSN equipment supports various work modes bases on TU/SDH microwave frames. Table 7-24 Radio work modes Service Capacity 4xE1 4xE1 8xE1 8xE1 16xE1 16xE1 STM-1 22xE1 26xE1 35xE1 44xE1 53xE1 2odulation Scheme QPSK 16QAM QPSK 16QAM QPSK 16QAM 128QAM 32QAM 64QAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM Channel Spacin $2!<' 7 3.5 14 (13.75) 7 28 (27.5) 14 (13.75) 28 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5)
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
7-19
The channel spacings 13.75 MHz and 27.5 MHz are applied to the 18 GHz frequency band. The channel spacings listed in the table are the minimum channel spacings supported by the OptiX OSN equipment. The channel spacings larger than the values are also supported.
)*/*# I. Per+ormance
The IF performance indicates the performances of the IF signals and ODU O&M signals. Table 7-25 IF performance Item IF signal Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) Impedance (ohm) ODU O&M signal Modulation scheme Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) ASK 5.5 10 350 140 50 Per+ormance
)*/*- (aseband Si nal Processin Per+ormance o+ the 2odem

The baseband signal processing performance of the modem indicates the performances of the FEC encoding mode and adaptive time-domain equalizer for baseband signals. Table 7-26 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem Item Encoding mode Per+ormance Reed-Solomon (RS) encoding for PDH signals Trellis-coded modulation (TCM) and RS two-level encoding for SDH signals Adaptive time-domain equalizer for baseband signals Support
)*/*/ 5=uipment Reliability

The 1+0 non-protection configuration and 1+1 protection configuration have different link reliabilities.
7-20
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Table 7-27 Link reliability per hop Item Per+ormance %?" Non&protection Con+i uration MTBF (h) MTTR (h) Availability 12.03x104 1 99.99917% %?% Protection Con+i uration 51.6x104 1 99.99981%
)*/*0 SP 1DU
The SP ODU is a type of the standard power ODU.
2odulation 2ode
Table 7-28 Modulation Mode (SP ODU) Item Modulation mode Channel Spacing Per+ormance QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM/256QAM 3.5/7/14/28 MHz
.re=uency (and
Table 7-29 Frequency Band (SP ODU) .re=uency (and 7GHz 8GHz 11GHz 13GHz 15GHz 18GHz 23GHz 26GHz 38GHz .re=uency Ran e $G!<' 7.093-7.897 7.731-8.496 10.675-11.745 12.751-13.248 14.403-15.348 17.685-19.710 21.200-23.618 24.549-26.453 37.044-40,105 T:R Spacin $2!<' 154, 161, 168, 196, 245 119, 126, 266, 311.32 490, 500, 530 266 315, 322, 420, 490, 728 1008, 1010, 1560 1008, 1200, 1232 1008 700, 1260
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
7-21
Transceiver Per+ormance
Table 7-30 Transceiver Performance (SP ODU) Item Per+ormance CPSB %3CA2:-#CA 2 3/CA2:%#4C A2 #03CA2
Nominal maximum transmit power (dBm) @7 GHz @8 GHz @11 GHz @13 GHz @15 GHz @18 GHz @23 GHz @26 GHz @38 GHz Nominal minimum transmit power (dBm) Nominal maximum receive power (dBm) Frequency stability (ppm) 27 27 26 26 26 25.5 24 23.5 22 -6 -20 5 -25 22.5 22.5 21.5 21.5 21.5 21.5 20.5 19.5 17.5 18.5 18.5 17.5 17.5 17.5 17.5 16.5 15.5 13.5 16.5 16.5 15.5 15.5 15.5 15.5 14.5 13.5 11.5
I. Per+ormance
Table 7-31 IF Performance Item IF signal Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) Impedance (ohm) ODU O&M signal Modulation mode Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) Per+ormance 350 140 50 ASK 5.5 10
7-22
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
2echanical (ehavior and Po,er Consumption

Table 7-32 Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption (SP ODU) Item Dimensions Typical Weight (kg) Typical Power Consumption (W) Per+ormance < 280 mm x 92 mm x 280 mm (width x depth x height) 4.6 35
.re=uency in+ormation
Frequency ranges shown are Tx signal frequencies lower / upper limits, that is, not the channel center frequencies. The lowest available channel center frequency is at least the lowest frequency shown plus one half of the selected channel spacing. The highest available channel center frequency is at most the maximum frequency shown minus one half of the selected channel spacing.
Table 7-33 Frequency information of the 7 GHz frequency band (SP ODU) T:R Spacin $2!<' Sub&band >o,er Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit A B C A B C D E F G H I J K L 7,428.00 7,470.00 7,512.00 7,114.00 7,149.00 7,184.00 7,219.00 7,239.00 7,274.00 7,309.00 7,344.00 7,414.00 7,449.00 7,484.00 7,519.00 Upper >imit 7,484.00 7,526.00 7,568.00 7,177.00 7,212.00 7,247.00 7,282.00 7,302.00 7,337.00 7,372.00 7,407.00 7,477.00 7,512.00 7,547.00 7,582.00 !i her Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit 7,582.00 7,624.00 7,666.00 7,275.00 7,310.00 7,345.00 7,380.00 7,400.00 7,435.00 7,470.00 7,505.00 7,575.00 7,610.00 7,645.00 7,680.00 Upper >imit 7,638.00 7,680.00 7,722.00 7,338.00 7,373.00 7,408.00 7,443.00 7,463.00 7,498.00 7,533.00 7,568.00 7,638.00 7,673.00 7,708.00 7,743.00
154 154 154 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 161
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
7-23
T:R Spacin $2!<'
Sub&band
>o,er Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit Upper >imit 7,602.00 7,637.00 7,672.00 7,707.00 7,499.00 7,541.00 7,583.00 7,149.00 7,177.00 7,205.00 7,233.00 7,261.00 7,484.00 7,568.00 7,652.00
!i her Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit 7,700.00 7,735.00 7,770.00 7,805.00 7,611.00 7,653.00 7,695.00 7,289.00 7,317.00 7,345.00 7,373.00 7,401.00 7,645.00 7,729.00 7,813.00 Upper >imit 7,763.00 7,798.00 7,833.00 7,868.00 7,667.00 7,709.00 7,751.00 7,345.00 7,373.00 7,401.00 7,429.00 7,457.00 7,729.00 7,813.00 7,897.00
161 161 161 161 168 168 168 196 196 196 196 196 245 245 245
M N O P A B C A B C D E A B C
7,539.00 7,574.00 7,609.00 7,644.00 7,443.00 7,485.00 7,527.00 7,093.00 7,121.00 7,149.00 7,177.00 7,205.00 7,400.00 7,484.00 7,568.00
Table 7-34 Frequency information of the 8 GHz frequency band (SP ODU) T:R Spacin $2!<' Sub&band >o,er Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit A B C D E F A B 8,279.00 8,293.00 8,307.00 8,321.00 8,335.00 8,349.00 7,905.00 8,017.00 Upper >imit 8,307.00 8,321.00 8,335.00 8,349.00 8,363.00 8,377.00 8,024.00 8,136.00 !i her Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit 8,398.00 8,412.00 8,426.00 8,440.00 8,454.00 8,468.00 8,171.00 8,283.00 Upper >imit 8,426.00 8,440.00 8,454.00 8,468.00 8,482.00 8,496.00 8,290.00 8,402.00
119/126 119/126 119/126 119/126 119/126 119/126 266 266
7-24
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
T:R Spacin $2!<'
Sub&band
>o,er Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit Upper >imit 7,867.00 7,971.00
!i her Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit 8,042.00 8,146.00 Upper >imit 8,178.00 8,282.00
311.32 311.32
A B
7,731.00 7,835.00
Table 7-35 Frequency information of the 11 GHz frequency band (SP ODU) T:R Spacin $2!<' Sub&band >o,er Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit A B C A B C D 10,700.00 10,855.00 11,010.00 10,675.00 10,795.00 10,915.00 11,035.00 Upper >imit 10,890.00 11,045.00 11,200.00 10,855.00 10,975.00 11,135.00 11,215.00 !i her Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit 11,200.00 11,355.00 11,510.00 11,205.00 11,325.00 11,445.00 11,565.00 Upper >imit 11,390.00 11,545.00 11,700.00 11,385.00 11,505.00 11,665.00 11,745.00
490/500 490/500 490/500 530 530 530 530
Table 7-36 Frequency information of the 13 GHz frequency band (SP ODU) T:R Spacin $2!<' Sub&band >o,er Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit A B C D 12,751.00 12,807.00 12,863.00 12,919.00 Upper >imit 12,814.00 12,870.00 12,926.00 12,982.00 !i her Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit 13,017.00 13,073.00 13,129.00 13,185.00 Upper >imit 13,080.00 13,136.00 13,192.00 13,248.00
266 266 266 266
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
7-25
Table 7-37 Frequency information of the 15 GHz frequency band (SP ODU) T:R Spacin $2!<' Sub&band >o,er Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit A B C A B C D A B C D B 14,627.00 14,725.00 14,823.00 14,501.00 14,606.00 14,718.00 14,816.00 14,403.00 14,515.00 14,627.00 14,739.00 14,500.00 Upper >imit 14,746.00 14,844.00 14,942.00 14,613.00 14,725.00 14,837.00 14,928.00 14,522.00 14,634.00 14,746.00 14,858.00 14,625.00 !i her Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit 14,942.00 15,040.00 15,138.00 14,921.00 15,026.00 15,138.00 15,236.00 14,893.00 15,005.00 15,117.00 15,229.00 15,228.00 Upper >imit 15,061.00 15,159.00 15,257.00 15,033.00 15,145.00 15,257.00 15,348.00 15,012.00 15,124.00 15,236.00 15,348.00 15,353.00
315/322 315/322 315/322 420 420 420 420 490 490 490 490 728
Table 7-38 Frequency information of the 18 GHz frequency band (SP ODU) T:R Spacin $2!<' Sub&band >o,er Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit A B C D C 17,685.00 17,930.00 18,180.00 18,400.00 17,700.00 Upper >imit 17,985.00 18,230.00 18,480.00 18,700.00 18,140.00 !i her Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit 18,695.00 18,940.00 19,190.00 19,410.00 19,260.00 Upper >imit 18,995.00 19,240.00 19,490.00 19,710.00 19,700.00
1010/1008 1010/1008 1010/1008 1010/1008 1560
7-26
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Table 7-39 Frequency information of the 23 GHz frequency band (SP ODU) T:R Spacin $2!<' Sub&band >o,er Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit A B A B C A B C D 21,994.00 22,274.00 21,200.00 21,600.00 22,000.00 21,200.00 21,472.00 21,779.00 22,086.00 Upper >imit 22,330.00 22,610.00 21,600.00 22,000.00 22,400.00 21,500.00 21,786.00 22,093.00 22,386.00 !i her Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit 23,002.00 23,282.00 22,400.00 22,800.00 23,200.00 22,432.00 22,704.00 23,011.00 23,318.00 Upper >imit 23,338.00 23,618.00 22,800.00 23,200.00 23,600.00 22,732.00 23,018.00 23,325.00 23,618.00
1,008 1,008 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,232 1,232 1,232 1,232
Table 7-40 Frequency information of the 26 GHz frequency band (SP ODU) T:R Spacin $2!<' Sub&band >o,er Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit A B C 24,549.00 24,829.00 25,109.00 Upper >imit 24,885.00 25,165.00 25,445.00 !i her Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit 25,557.00 25,837.00 26,117.00 Upper >imit 25,893.00 26,173.00 26,453.00
1008 1008 1008
Table 7-41 Frequency information of the 38 GHz frequency band (SP ODU) T:R Spacin $2!<' Sub&band >o,er Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit A B C D 38,595.00 38,795.00 38,995.00 39,195.00 Upper >imit 38,805.00 39,005.00 39,205.00 39,405.00 !i her Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit 39,295.00 39,495.00 39,695.00 39,895.00 Upper >imit 39,505.00 39,705.00 39,905.00 40,105.00
700 700 700 700
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
7-27
T:R Spacin $2!<'
Sub&band
1260 1260
A B
37,044.00 37,604.00
)*/*3 !P 1DU
The HP ODU is a type of the high power ODU.
2odulation 2ode
Table 7-42 Modulation Mode (HP ODU) Item Modulation mode Channel Spacing Per+ormance QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM/256QAM 7/14/28/40/56MHz
.re=uency (and
Table 7-43 Frequency band (HP ODU) .re=uency (and 7 GHz 8 GHz 11 GHz 13 GHz 15 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz 26 GHz 32 GHz 38 GHz .re=uency Ran e $G!<' 7.093-7.897 7.731-8.497 10.675-11.745 12.751-13.248 14.400-15.353 17.685-19.710 21.200-23.618 24.549-26.453 31.815-33.383 37.044-40.105 T:R Spacin $2!<' 154, 161, 168, 196, 245 119, 126, 151.614, 208, 266, 311.32 490, 500, 530 266 315, 322, 420, 490, 644, 728 1008, 1010, 1560 1008, 1200, 1232 1008 812 700, 1260
7-28
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Transceiver Per+ormance
Table 7-44 Transceiver performance (HP ODU) Item Per+ormance CPSB %3CA2:-#CA 2 3/CA2:%#4C A2 #03CA2
Nominal maximum transmit power (dBm) @7 GHz @8 GHz @11 GHz @13 GHz @15 GHz @18 GHz @23 GHz @26 GHz @32 GHz @38 GHz 30 30 28 26 26 25.5 25 25 23 23 28 28 26 24 24 23 23 22 21 20 25 25 22 20 20 19 19 19 17 17 23 23 20 18 18 17 17 17 15 15
Nominal minimum transmit power (dBm) @7 GHz @8 GHz @11 GHz @13 GHz @15 GHz @18 GHz @23 GHz @26 GHz @32 GHz @38 GHz Nominal maximum receive power (dBm) Frequency stability (ppm) 9 9 6 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 -20 -25
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
7-29
I. Per+ormance
Table 7-45 IF Performance Item IF signal Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) Impedance (ohm) ODU O&M signal Modulation mode Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) Per+ormance 350 140 50 ASK 5.5 10
2echanical (ehavior and Po,er Consumption

Table 7-46 Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption (HP ODU) Item Dimensions Typical Weight (kg) Typical Power Consumption (W) Per+ormance < 280 mm x 92 mm x 280 mm (width x depth x height) 4.6 40 (13/15/18/23/26/32/38GHz) 52 (7/8/11GHz)
.re=uency in+ormation
Frequency ranges shown are Tx signal frequencies lower / upper limits, that is, not the channel center frequencies. The lowest available channel center frequency is at least the lowest frequency shown plus one half of the selected channel spacing. The highest available channel center frequency is at most the maximum frequency shown minus one half of the selected channel spacing.
Table 7-47 Frequency information of the 7 GHz frequency band (HP ODU) T:R Spacin $2!<' Sub&band >o,er Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit A B C 7,428.00 7,470.00 7,512.00 Upper >imit 7,484.00 7,526.00 7,568.00 !i her Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit 7,582.00 7,624.00 7,666.00 Upper >imit 7,638.00 7,680.00 7,722.00
154 154 154
7-30
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
T:R Spacin $2!<'
Sub&band
>o,er Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit Upper >imit 7,177.00 7,212.00 7,247.00 7,282.00 7,302.00 7,337.00 7,372.00 7,407.00 7,477.00 7,512.00 7,547.00 7,582.00 7,602.00 7,637.00 7,672.00 7,707.00 7,499.00 7,541.00 7,583.00 7,149.00 7,177.00 7,205.00 7,233.00 7,261.00 7,484.00 7,568.00 7,652.00
!i her Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit 7,275.00 7,310.00 7,345.00 7,380.00 7,400.00 7,435.00 7,470.00 7,505.00 7,575.00 7,610.00 7,645.00 7,680.00 7,700.00 7,735.00 7,770.00 7,805.00 7,611.00 7,653.00 7,695.00 7,289.00 7,317.00 7,345.00 7,373.00 7,401.00 7,645.00 7,729.00 7,813.00 Upper >imit 7,338.00 7,373.00 7,408.00 7,443.00 7,463.00 7,498.00 7,533.00 7,568.00 7,638.00 7,673.00 7,708.00 7,743.00 7,763.00 7,798.00 7,833.00 7,868.00 7,667.00 7,709.00 7,751.00 7,345.00 7,373.00 7,401.00 7,429.00 7,457.00 7,729.00 7,813.00 7,897.00
161 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 168 168 168 196 196 196 196 196 245 245 245
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P A B C A B C D E A B C
7,114.00 7,149.00 7,184.00 7,219.00 7,239.00 7,274.00 7,309.00 7,344.00 7,414.00 7,449.00 7,484.00 7,519.00 7,539.00 7,574.00 7,609.00 7,644.00 7,443.00 7,485.00 7,527.00 7,093.00 7,121.00 7,149.00 7,177.00 7,205.00 7,400.00 7,484.00 7,568.00
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
7-31
Table 7-48 Frequency information of the 8 GHz frequency band (HP ODU) T:R Spacin $2!<' Sub&band >o,er Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit A B C D E F A B C A B C D A B A B 8,279.00 8,293.00 8,307.00 8,321.00 8,335.00 8,349.00 8,203.00 8,240.00 8,277.00 8,043.00 8,099.00 8,155.00 8,211.00 7,905.00 8,017.00 7,731.00 7,835.00 Upper >imit 8,307.00 8,321.00 8,335.00 8,349.00 8,363.00 8,377.00 8,271.00 8,308.00 8,345.00 8,113.00 8,169.00 8,225.00 8,281.00 8,024.00 8,136.00 7,867.00 7,971.00 !i her Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit 8,398.00 8,412.00 8,426.00 8,440.00 8,454.00 8,468.00 8,355.00 8,392.00 8,429.00 8,251.00 8,307.00 8,363.00 8,419.00 8,171.00 8,283.00 8,042.00 8,146.00 Upper >imit 8,426.00 8,440.00 8,454.00 8,468.00 8,482.00 8,496.00 8,423.00 8,460.00 8,497.00 8,321.00 8,377.00 8,433.00 8,489.00 8,290.00 8,402.00 8,178.00 8,282.00
119/126 119/126 119/126 119/126 119/126 119/126 151.614 151.614 151.614 208 208 208 208 266 266 311.32 311.32
Table 7-49 Frequency information of the 11 GHz frequency band (HP ODU) T:R Spacin $2!<' Sub&band >o,er Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit A B C A B 10,700.00 10,855.00 11,010.00 10,675.00 10,795.00 Upper >imit 10,890.00 11,045.00 11,200.00 10,855.00 10,975.00 !i her Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit 11,200.00 11,355.00 11,510.00 11,205.00 11,325.00 Upper >imit 11,390.00 11,545.00 11,700.00 11,385.00 11,505.00
490/500 490/500 490/500 530 530
7-32
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
T:R Spacin $2!<'
Sub&band
530 530
C D
10,915.00 11,035.00
Table 7-50 Frequency information of the 13 GHz frequency band (HP ODU) T:R Spacin $2!<' Sub&band >o,er Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit A B C D 12,751.00 12,807.00 12,863.00 12,919.00 Upper >imit 12,814.00 12,870.00 12,926.00 12,982.00 !i her Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit 13,017.00 13,073.00 13,129.00 13,185.00 Upper >imit 13,080.00 13,136.00 13,192.00 13,248.00
266 266 266 266
Table 7-51 Frequency information of the 15 GHz frequency band (HP ODU) T:R Spacin $2!<' Sub&band >o,er Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit A B C A B C D A B C D 14,627.00 14,725.00 14,823.00 14,501.00 14,606.00 14,718.00 14,816.00 14,403.00 14,515.00 14,627.00 14,739.00 Upper >imit 14,746.00 14,844.00 14,942.00 14,613.00 14,725.00 14,837.00 14,928.00 14,522.00 14,634.00 14,746.00 14,858.00 !i her Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit 14,942.00 15,040.00 15,138.00 14,921.00 15,026.00 15,138.00 15,236.00 14,893.00 15,005.00 15,117.00 15,229.00 Upper >imit 15,061.00 15,159.00 15,257.00 15,033.00 15,145.00 15,257.00 15,348.00 15,012.00 15,124.00 15,236.00 15,348.00
315/322 315/322 315/322 420 420 420 420 490 490 490 490
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
7-33
T:R Spacin $2!<'
Sub&band
>o,er Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit Upper >imit 14,512.00 14,610.00 14,708.00 14,615.00 14,625.00
!i her Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit 15,044.00 15,142.00 15,240.00 15,228.00 15,228.00 Upper >imit 15,156.00 15,254.00 15,352.00 15,343.00 15,353.00
644 644 644 728 728
A B C A B
14,400.00 14,498.00 14,596.00 14,500.00 14,500.00
Table 7-52 Frequency information of the 18 GHz frequency band (HP ODU) T:R Spacin $2!<' Sub&band >o,er Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit A B C D C 17,685.00 17,930.00 18,180.00 18,400.00 17,700.00 Upper >imit 17,985.00 18,230.00 18,480.00 18,700.00 18,140.00 !i her Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit 18,695.00 18,940.00 19,190.00 19,410.00 19,260.00 Upper >imit 18,995.00 19,240.00 19,490.00 19,710.00 19,700.00
1010/1008 1010/1008 1010/1008 1010/1008 1560
Table 7-53 Frequency information of the 23 GHz frequency band (HP ODU) T:R Spacin $2!<' Sub&band >o,er Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit A B A B C A B 21,994.00 22,274.00 21,200.00 21,600.00 22,000.00 21,200.00 21,472.00 Upper >imit 22,330.00 22,610.00 21,600.00 22,000.00 22,400.00 21,500.00 21,786.00 !i her Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit 23,002.00 23,282.00 22,400.00 22,800.00 23,200.00 22,432.00 22,704.00 Upper >imit 23,338.00 23,618.00 22,800.00 23,200.00 23,600.00 22,732.00 23,018.00
1008 1008 1200 1200 1200 1232 1232
7-34
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
T:R Spacin $2!<'
Sub&band
1232 1232
C D
21,779.00 22,086.00
Table 7-54 Frequency information of the 26 GHz frequency band (HP ODU) T:R Spacin $2!<' Sub&band >o,er Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit A B C 24,549.00 24,829.00 25,109.00 Upper >imit 24,885.00 25,165.00 25,445.00 !i her Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit 25,557.00 25,837.00 26,117.00 Upper >imit 25,893.00 26,173.00 26,453.00
1008 1008 1008
Table 7-55 Frequency information of the 32 GHz frequency band (HP ODU) T:R Spacin $2!<' Sub&band >o,er Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit A B 31,815.00 32,179.00 Upper >imit 32,207.00 32,571.00 !i her Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit 32,627.00 32,991.00 Upper >imit 33,019.00 33,383.00
812 812
Table 7-56 Frequency information of the 38 GHz frequency band (HP ODU) T:R Spacin $2!<' Sub&band >o,er Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit A B C D 38,595.00 38,795.00 38,995.00 39,195.00 Upper >imit 38,805.00 39,005.00 39,205.00 39,405.00 !i her Sub&band T; .re=uency $2!<' >o,er >imit 39,295.00 39,495.00 39,695.00 39,895.00 Upper >imit 39,505.00 39,705.00 39,905.00 40,105.00
700 700 700 700
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
7-35
T:R Spacin $2!<'
Sub&band
1260 1260
A B
37,044.00 37,604.00
)*0 Parameters Speci+ied +or the 1ptical Inter+aces

This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 optical interfaces, STM-4 optical interfaces, STM-16 optical interfaces, STM-64 optical interfaces, colored optical interfaces, Ethernet optical interfaces, and ATM optical interfaces. This topic also provides information on wavelength allocation.
To provide effective precaution, on the NMS, the lower threshold of the input optical power of the board is set to higher than the receiver sensitivity and the higher threshold of the input optical power of the board is set to lower than the overload optical power.
The multi-mode optical interface operates at wavelength 850 nm, whereas the single-mode optical interface operates at wavelength 1310 nm or 1550 nm. The optical interfaces of different modes cannot be interconnected. The optical module type should match the optical fiber type. It is recommended that the single-mode optical fiber uses the single-mode optical module, and the multi-mode optical fiber uses the multi-mode optical module. 7.5.1 STM-1 Optical Interfaces This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 optical interfaces. 7.5.2 STM-4 Optical Interfaces This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-4 optical interfaces. 7.5.3 STM-16 Optical Interfaces This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-16 optical interfaces. 7.5.4 STM-64 Optical Interfaces This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-64 optical interfaces. 7.5.5 Ethernet Optical Interfaces This topic lists the parameters specified for the Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500.
7-36
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
7.5.6 Tunable-Wavelength Optical Interfaces This topic lists the parameters specified for the tunable-wavelength optical interface. 7.5.7 ATM Optical Interfaces This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 and STM-4 ATM optical interfaces. 7.5.8 Colored Optical Interfaces This topic lists the parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN equipment. 7.5.9 Wavelength Allocation This topic provides information on wavelength allocation of the OptiX OSN equipment.
)*0*% ST2&% 1ptical Inter+aces

This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 optical interfaces. Table 7-57 lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN equipment. Table 7-57 Parameters specified for the STM-1 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 Parameter Nominal bit rate Application code Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength range (nm) Type of fiber Value 155520 kbit/s I-1 0 to 2 1260 to 1360 Single-m ode LC -15 to -8 -23 -8 8.2 Ie-1 0 to 2 1270 to 1380 Multi-m ode LC -20 to -14 -30 -14 10 S-1.1 2 to 15 1261 to 1360 Singlemode LC -15 to -8 -28 -8 8.2 L-1.1 20 to 40 1263 to 1360 Single-m ode LC -5 to 0 -34 -10 10 L-1.2 60 to 80 1480 to 1580 Singlemode LC -5 to 0 -34 -10 10 Ve-1.2 80 to 100 1480 to 1580 Single-m ode LC -3 to 0 -34 -10 10
Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
7-37
)*0*# ST2&/ 1ptical Inter+aces

This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-4 optical interfaces. Table 7-58 lists the parameters specified for the STM-4 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN equipment. Table 7-58 Parameters specified for the STM-4 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN equipment Parameter Nominal bit rate Application code Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength range (nm) Type of fiber Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Value 622080 kbit/s I-4 0 to 2 1261 to 1360 S-4.1 2 to 15 1274 to 1356 L-4.1 20 to 40 1280 to 1335 L-4.2 50 to 80 1480 to 1580 Ve-4.2 80 to 100 1480 to 1580
Single-mode LC -15 to -8 -23 -8 8.2 -15 to -8 -28 -8 8.2 -3 to 2 -28 -8 10 -3 to 2 -28 -8 10 -3 to 2 -34 -13 10.5
)*0*- ST2&%3 1ptical Inter+aces

This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-16 optical interfaces. Table 7-59 lists the parameters specified for the STM-16 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN equipment. Table 7-59 Parameters specified for the STM-16 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 Parameter Nominal bit rate Application code Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength range (nm) Type of fiber Value 2488320 kbit/s I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 L-16.2Je V-16.2J e (BA) 105 to 140 1530 to 1565 U-16.2Je (BA+PA ) 145 to 170 1550.12
0 to 2 1266 to 1360
2 to 15 1260 to 1360
25 to 40 1280 to 1335
50 to 80 1500 to 1580
80 to 100 1530 to 1560
Single-mode LC
7-38
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Parameter Launched optical power range (dBm)
Value -10 to -3 -5 to 0 -2 to 3 -2 to 3 5 to 7 Without the booster amplifie r (BA): -2 to 3 With the BA: 13 to 15 Without the BA or pre-ampl ifier (PA): -2 to 3 With the BA: 15 to 18 Without the BA or PA: -28 With the PA: -34
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
-18
-18
-27
-28
-28
-28
Minimum overload (dBm)
-3
-9
-9
-9
-9
Without the BA or PA: -9 With the PA: -10
Dispersion tolerance (ps/nm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
12
1200 to 1600 8.2
2000
2800
3400
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Table 7-60 lists the parameters specified for the STM-16 (FEC) optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN equipment. Table 7-60 Parameters specified for the STM-16 (FEC) optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN equipment Parameter Nominal bit rate Application code Meaning of the code
a
Value 2666057 kbit/s Ue-16.2c FEC + BA (14 dB) + PA 1550.12 Single-mode LC Ue-16.2d FEC + BA (17 dB) + PA 1550.12 Ue-16.2f FEC + BA (17 dB) + RA + PA 1550.12
Operating wavelength range (nm) Type of fiber
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
7-39
Value Without the BA or PA: -5 to -1 With the BA: 13 to 15 Without the BA or PA: -5 to -1 With the BA: 15 to 18 Without the BA or PA: -27.5 With the PA: -37 -10 10 Without the BA, RA, or PA: -5 to -1 With the BA: 15 to 18 Without the BA, RA, or PA: -27.5 With the PA: -42 -10 10
Without the BA or PA: -27.5 With the PA: -37
Minimum overload (dBm)b Minimum extinction ratio (dB)c
-10 10
a: The numbers in the brackets indicate the corresponding parameter values. For example, "BA (14 dB)" indicates that the optical power amplified by the BA is 14 dBm. "FEC + BA + PA" indicates that the specifications of the optical interface are measured when the FEC, BA, and PA are used. b: The parameter values are applicable only to the PA. c: The parameter values are applicable only to the optical modules. The parameter values of the amplifier are not provided.
)*0*/ ST2&3/ 1ptical Inter+aces

This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-64 optical interfaces. Table 7-61 lists the parameters specified for the STM-64 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 7-61 Parameters specified for the STM-64 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 Parameter Nominal bit rate Application code Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength range (nm) Type of fiber Value 9953280 kbit/s I-64.1 I-64.2 S-64.2 b 2 to 40 1530 to 1565 L-64.2b (BA) 35 to 80 1530 to 1565 Le-64. 2 35 to 60 1530 to 1565 Ls-64.2 V-64.2b (BA+PA+D CU) 80 to 120 1550.12
0 to 2 1290 to 1330
0 to 25 1530 to 1565
55 to 80 1530 to 1565
Single-mode LC
7-40
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Value -6 to -1 -5 to -1 -1 to 2 Without the BA: -4 to 2 With the BA: 13 to 15 2 to 4 3 to 7 Without the BA, PA, or DCU: -4 to -1 With the BA: 13 to 15 -21 -21 Without the BA, PA, or DCU: -14 With the PA: -26
-11
-14
-14
-14
Minimum overload (dBm) Dispersion tolerance (ps/nm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
-1
-1
-1
-1
-8
-8
-1
6.6
500
800
1600
1200
1600
2040 (with the DCU) 8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Table 7-62 lists the parameters specified for the STM-64 (FEC) optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 7-62 Parameters specified for the STM-64 (FEC) optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 Parameter Nominal bit rate Application code Meaning of the codea Operating wavelength range (nm) Type of fiber Launched optical power range (dBm)b Value 10709225 kbit/s Ue-64.2c FEC + BA (14 dB) + PA + DCU (60 + 80)c 1550.12 Ue-64.2d FEC + BA (17 dB) + PA + DCU (80 x 2) 1550.12 Ue-64.2e FEC + BA (17 dB) + RA + PA + DCU (60 x 3) 1550.12
Single-mode LC -4 to -1 -4 to -1 -4 to -1
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
7-41
Parameter Receiver sensitivity (dBm)b Minimum overload (dBm)b Minimum extinction ratio (dB)b Dispersion tolerance (ps/nm)b
Value -14 -1 10 -14 -1 10 -14 -1 10
800
800
800
a: The numbers in the brackets indicate the corresponding parameter values. For example, "BA (14 dB)" indicates that the optical power amplified by the BA is 14 dBm. "FEC + BA + PA + RA" indicates that the specifications of the optical interface are measured when the FEC, BA, PA, and Raman amplifier (RA) are used. b: The parameter values are applicable only to the optical modules. The parameter values of the amplifier and dispersion compensation unit (DCU) are not provided. c: The parameter values indicate the distances that correspond to different dispersion compensation values.
)*0*0 5thernet 1ptical Inter+aces

This topic lists the parameters specified for the Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500. The characteristics of the 10-Gigabit Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 comply with IEEE 802.3ae. The characteristics of the Gigabit Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 comply with IEEE 802.3z. The characteristics of the 100 Mbit/s Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 comply with IEEE 802.3u. Table 7-63 and Table 7-64 list the parameters specified for the Ethernet optical interfaces. lists the parameters specified for the Ethernet optical interfaces. Table 7-63 Parameters specified for the Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 Paramete r Type of interface Value 1000 BAS E-Z X 80 1000B ASE-V X 40 1000B ASE-L X 10 1000B ASE-S X 0.5 100BA SE-FX 100BA SE-FX 100BA SE-FX 100BA SE-FX
Transmiss ion distance (km)
80
40
15
7-42
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Paramete r Type of fiber
Value Singl e-mo de LC -2 to 5 Singlemode LC -5 to 0 Singlemode LC -9 to -3 Multimode LC -9.5 to -2.5 Singlemode LC -5 to 0 Singlemode LC -5 to 0 Singlemode LC -15 to -8 Multi-m ode LC
Launched optical power range (dBm) Operating wavelengt h range (nm) Minimum overload (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
-19 to -14
1500 to 1580 -3
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
770 to 860
1480 to 1580
1263 to 1360
1261 to 1360
1270 to 1380
-3
-3
-10
-10
-8
-14
-23
-23
-20
-17
-34
-34
-28
-30
10
10
8.2
10
Table 7-64 Parameters specified for the Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 Parameter Type of interface Value 10GBASESR (LAN) 10GBASESW (WAN) Transmission distance (km) Type of fiber Launched optical power range (dBm) Operating wavelength range (nm) 0.3 Multi-mode LC -1.3 to -7.3 10GBASE-LR (LAN) 10GBASE-LW (WAN) 10 Single-mode LC -6 to -1 10GBASE-ER (LAN) 10GBASE-E W (WAN) 40 Single-mode LC -1 to +2 10GBASE-ZR (LAN) 10GBASE-ZW (WAN) 80 Single-mode LC 0 to 4
840 to 860
1260 to 1330
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
7-43
Parameter Minimum overload (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Value -1 -7.5 3 0.5 -11 6 -1 -15 8.2 -7 -24 9
)*0*3 Tunable&9avelen th 1ptical Inter+aces

This topic lists the parameters specified for the tunable-wavelength optical interface. Table 7-65 lists the specifications of the tunable-wavelength optical interface that complies with ITU-T G.692. Table 7-65 Parameters specified for the tunable-wavelength optical interface Parameter Nominal bit rate Application code Meaning of the codea Operating wavelength range (nm) Type of fiber Launched optical power range (dBm)b Receiver sensitivity (dBm)b Minimum overload (dBm)b Minimum extinction ratio (dB)b Dispersion tolerance (ps/nm)b Value 10709225 kbit/s Ue-64.2c FEC + BA (14 dB) + PA + DCU (60 + 80)c 1550.12 Ue-64.2d FEC + BA (17 dB) + PA + DCU (80 x 2) 1550.12 Ue-64.2e FEC + BA (17 dB) + RA + PA + DCU (60 x 3) 1550.12
Single-mode LC -4 to -1 -4 to -1 -4 to -1
-14 -1 10
-14 -1 10
-14 -1 10
800
800
800
7-44
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Parameter
Value
a: The numbers in the brackets indicate the corresponding parameter values. For example, "BA (14 dB)" indicates that the optical power amplified by the BA is 14 dBm. "FEC + BA + PA + RA" indicates that the specifications of the optical interface are measured when the FEC, BA, PA, and Raman amplifier (RA) are used. b: The parameter values are applicable only to the optical modules. The parameter values of the amplifier and dispersion compensation unit (DCU) are not provided. c: The parameter values indicate the distances that correspond to different dispersion compensation values.
For details on the parameters specified for the STM-64 tunable-wavelength optical interface, see 7.5.4 STM-64 Optical Interfaces.
)*0*) AT2 1ptical Inter+aces

This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 and STM-4 ATM optical interfaces. Table 7-66 lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 7-67 lists the parameters specified for the STM-4 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 7-66 Parameters specified for the STM-1 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 Parameter Nominal bit rate Application code Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength range (nm) Type of fiber Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Value 155520 kbit/s Ie-1 0 to 2 1270 to 1380 Multi-mo de LC -20 to -14 -30 -14 10 S-1.1 2 to 20 1261 to 1360 Single-mo de LC -15 to -8 -28 -8 8.2 L-1.1 20 to 60 1263 to 1360 Single-mo de LC -5 to 0 -34 -10 10 L-1.2 60 to 80 1480 to 1580 Single-mo de LC -5 to 0 -34 -10 10 Ve-1.2 80 to 100 1480 to 1580 Single-mo de LC -3 to 0 -34 -10 10
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
7-45
Table 7-67 Parameters specified for the STM-4 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 Parameter Nominal bit rate Application code Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength range (nm) Type of fiber Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Value 622080 kbit/s S-4.1 2 to 15 1274 to 1356 L-4.1 20 to 40 1280 to 1335 L-4.2 50 to 80 1480 to 1580 Ve-4.2 80 to 100 1480 to 1580
Single-mode LC -15 to -8 -28 -8 8.2 -3 to 2 -28 -8 10 -3 to 2 -28 -8 10 -3 to 2 -34 -13 10.5
)*0*4 Colored 1ptical Inter+aces

This topic lists the parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN equipment. With colored interfaces, the OptiX OSN equipment can directly be interconnected with the WDM equipment. Table 7-68, Table 7-70, and Table 7-69 list the parameters specified for the colored interfaces of the OptiX OSN equipment. Table 7-68 Parameters specified for the STM-16 and STM-64 colored optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 Parameter Nominal bit rate Dispersion-limite d distance (km) Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Value 2488320 kbit/s 170 -2 to 3 640 -5 to -1 2666057 kbit/s 640 -5 to -1 9953280 kbit/s 40 -4 to -1 10709225 kbit/s 40 -4 to -1
-28 -9
-28 -9
-28 -9
-14 -1
-14 -1
7-46
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Parameter Maximum allowed dispersion (ps/nm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Central frequency deviation (GHz) Minimum side mode suppression ratio (dB) Maximum -20 dB spectral width (nm) Maximum optical path penalty (dB) Optical signal-to-noise ratio (dB)
Value 3400 10880 12800 800 800
8.2
10
8.2
8.2
8.2
20 30
20 35
20 35
12.5 30
12.5 30
0.4
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.3
2 Withou t the FEC: 20
2 Without the FEC: 20
2 With the FEC: 16 Without the FEC: 21
2 Without the FEC: 22
2 With the FEC: 20 Without the FEC: 26
Table 7-69 Parameters specified for the GE colored optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 Parameter Nominal bit rate Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Maximum allowed dispersion (ps/nm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Value 1250000 kbit/s 0 to 5 -19 -3 800 9
Table 7-70 Parameters specified for the 10GE colored optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 Parameter Nominal bit rate Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Value 9953280 kbit/s -1 to 2 -12 10312500 kbit/s -1 to 2 -12
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
7-47
Parameter Minimum overload (dBm) Maximum allowed dispersion (ps/nm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Value 3 800 8.2 3 800 8.2
)*0*6 9avelen th Allocation

This topic provides information on wavelength allocation of the OptiX OSN equipment. The STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN equipment support the output of the wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The output wavelengths can be directly added to the WDM system. Table 7-71 provides the wavelength allocation information of the STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces. On the packet switching mode, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports colored optical interfaces whose wavelength allocation is shown in Table 7-72 and Table 7-73. Table 7-71 Wavelength allocation information of the STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces No* 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 .re=uency $T!<' 192.1 192.2 192.3 192.4 192.5 192.6 192.7 192.8 192.9 193.0 193.1 193.2 193.3 193.4 193.5 193.6 193.7 9avelen th $nm' 1560.61 1559.79 1558.98 1558.17 1557.36 1556.56 1555.75 1554.94 1554.13 1553.33 1552.52 1551.72 1550.92 1550.12 1549.32 1548.51 1547.72 No* 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 .re=uency $T!<' 194.1 194.2 194.3 194.4 194.5 194.6 194.7 194.8 194.9 195.0 195.1 195.2 195.3 195.4 195.5 195.6 195.7 9avelen th $nm' 1544.53 1543.73 1542.94 1542.14 1541.35 1540.56 1539.77 1538.98 1538.19 1537.40 1536.61 1535.82 1535.04 1534.25 1533.47 1532.68 1531.90
7-48
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
No* 18 19 20
.re=uency $T!<' 193.8 193.9 194.0
9avelen th $nm' 1546.92 1546.12 1545.32
No* 38 39 40
.re=uency $T!<' 195.8 195.9 196.0
9avelen th $nm' 1531.12 1530.33 1529.55
Table 7-72 Wavelength allocation information of the GE colored optical interfaces No* 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 .re=uency $T!<' 20.22 19.97 19.72 19.47 19.22 18.97 18.72 18.47 9avelen th $nm' 1471 1491 1511 1531 1551 1571 1591 1611
Table 7-73 Wavelength allocation information of the 10GE colored optical interfaces No* 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 .re=uency $T!<' 192.1 192.2 192.3 192.4 192.5 192.6 192.7 192.8 192.9 193.0 193.1 9avelen th $nm' 1560.61 1559.79 1558.98 1558.17 1557.36 1556.56 1555.75 1554.94 1554.13 1553.33 1552.52 No* 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 .re=uency $T!<' 194.1 194.2 194.3 194.4 194.5 194.6 194.7 194.8 194.9 195.0 195.1 9avelen th $nm' 1544.53 1543.73 1542.94 1542.14 1541.35 1540.56 1539.77 1538.98 1538.19 1537.40 1536.61
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
7-49
No* 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
.re=uency $T!<' 193.2 193.3 193.4 193.5 193.6 193.7 193.8 193.9 194.0
9avelen th $nm' 1551.72 1550.92 1550.12 1549.32 1548.51 1547.72 1546.92 1546.12 1545.32
No* 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
.re=uency $T!<' 195.2 195.3 195.4 195.5 195.6 195.7 195.8 195.9 196.0
9avelen th $nm' 1535.82 1535.04 1534.25 1533.47 1532.68 1531.90 1531.12 1530.33 1529.55
)*3 Parameters Speci+ied +or 5lectrical Inter+aces

This topic lists the parameters specified for the PDH electrical interfaces, DDN electrical interfaces, and Ethernet electrical interfaces. 7.6.1 PDH Electrical Interfaces This topic lists the parameters specified for the PDH electrical interfaces. 7.6.2 DDN Electrical Interfaces This topic lists the parameters specified for the DDN electrical interfaces. 7.6.3 Ethernet Electrical Interfaces This topic lists the parameters specified for the Ethernet electrical interfaces.
)*3*% PD! 5lectrical Inter+aces

This topic lists the parameters specified for the PDH electrical interfaces. Table 7-74 lists the parameters specified for the PDH electrical interfaces of the OptiX OSN equipment. Table 7-74 Parameters specified for the PDH electrical interfaces Nominal bit rate Line code pattern Waveform at the output interface %0// 8bit:s B8ZS and AMI #"/4 8bit:s HDB3 -/-34 8bit:s HDB3 //)-3 8bit:s B3ZS %-6#3/ 8bit:s CMI %000#" 8bit:s CMI
Complies with ITU-T G.703.
7-50
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Nominal bit rate Signal bit rate at the output interface Allowed attenuation at the input interface Allowed frequency deviation at the input interface Input jitter tolerance
%0// 8bit:s
#"/4 8bit:s
-/-34 8bit:s
//)-3 8bit:s
%-6#3/ 8bit:s
%000#" 8bit:s
Complies with ITU-T G.823.
Complie s with ITU-T G.824. -
Complie s with ITU-T G.823. Complie s with ITU-T G.703. Complie s with ITU-T G.703.
Compli es with ITU-T G.823. Compli es with ITU-T G.703. Compli es with ITU-T G.703.
Compli es with ITU-T G.824. -
Anti-interference capability at the input interface Reflection attenuation at the input/output interface Output jitter Mapping jitter Combined jitter Jitter transfer function
Complie s with ITU-T G.703.
Complies with ITU-T G.823 and G.824. Complies with ITU-T G.783. -
Compli es with ITU-T G.751.
)*3*# DDN 5lectrical Inter+aces

This topic lists the parameters specified for the DDN electrical interfaces. Table 7-75 lists the parameters specified for the DDN electrical interfaces. Table 7-75 Parameters specified for the DDN electrical interfaces Type o+ Inter+ace Framed E1 interface Description Framed E1 signal Standard The physical and electrical characteristics of the interface comply with ITU-T G.703. The frame structure of the interface complies with ITU-T G.704.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
7-51
Type o+ Inter+ace Nx64 kbit/s interface
Description V.35 interface V.24 interface X.21 interface RS-449 interface RS-530 interface RS-530A interface
Standard Complies with ITU-T V.35. Complies with ITU-T V.24. Complies with ITU-T X.21. Complies with EIA RS-449 (RS-423A and RS-422A). Complies with EIA RS-530. Complies with EIA RS-530A.
)*3*- 5thernet 5lectrical Inter+aces

This topic lists the parameters specified for the Ethernet electrical interfaces. Table 7-76 lists the parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the OptiX OSN equipment. Table 7-76 Parameters specified for electrical interfaces Nominal (it Rate 1000BASE-TX 100BASE-TX 10BASE-TX Type o+ Inter+ace RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 Code Pattern 4D-PAM5 MLT-3 MLT-3
)*) Parameters Speci+ied +or the Au;iliary Inter+aces

This topic lists the parameters specified for the clock interfaces, 64 kbit/s interfaces, RS-232 interfaces, RS-422 interfaces, and orderwire phone interfaces. 7.7.1 Clock Interface Specifications The specifications of the clock interface comply with ITU-T G.703. 7.7.2 64 kbit/s Interface Specifications The specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface comply with ITU-T G.703. 7.7.3 RS-232 Interface Specifications The specifications of the RS-232 interface comply with EIA RS-232. 7.7.4 RS-422 Interface Specifications The specifications of the RS-422 interface comply with EIA RS-422.
7-52
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
7.7.5 Orderwire Phone Interface Specifications The specifications of the orerwire phone interface comply with ITU-T.
)*)*% Cloc8 Inter+ace Speci+ications

The specifications of the clock interface comply with ITU-T G.703. The specifications of the clock interface are listed as Table 7-77. Table 7-77 Specifications of the clock interface Speci+ications Output frequency accuracy Output jitter Description Compliant with G.813 0.05 UIpp
)*)*# 3/ 8bit:s Inter+ace Speci+ications

The specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface comply with ITU-T G.703. The specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface are listed as Table 7-78. Table 7-78 Specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface Speci+ications Bit rate Timing signals Coding style Compliant Output interface characteristics Incoming interface characteristics Description 64 kbit/s From RX Compliant with ITU-T G.703 Compliant with ITU-T G.703 Compliant with ITU-T G.703 Compliant with ITU-T G.703
)*)*- RS&#-# Inter+ace Speci+ications

The specifications of the RS-232 interface comply with EIA RS-232. The specifications of the RS-232 interface are listed as Table 7-79. Table 7-79 Specifications of the RS-232 interface Speci+ications Bit rate Mode Description 19.2 kbit/s RS-232 Tx & Rx data only
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
7-53
Speci+ications Electrical levels
Description 5V-15V
)*)*/ RS&/## Inter+ace Speci+ications

The specifications of the RS-422 interface comply with EIA RS-422. The specifications of the RS-422 interface are listed as Table 7-80. Table 7-80 Specifications of the RS-422 interface Speci+ications Bit rate Mode Electrical levels Description 19.2 kbit/s RS-422 Tx & Rx data only 2.0V
)*)*0 1rder,ire Phone Inter+ace Speci+ications

The specifications of the orerwire phone interface comply with ITU-T. The specifications of the orerwire phone interface are listed as Table 7-81. Table 7-81 Specifications of the orerwire phone interface Speci+ications Speech channel interface Impedance Bandwidth Operating current Input gain Output gain Signalling Analog EOW extension Impedance Bandwidth Tx level Rx level 600 ohms 300 Hz-3400 Hz -3.5 dBr 1 dBr -3.5 dBr 1 dBr 600 ohms 300 Hz-3400 Hz 18 mA -4/0/0 dB 0/-7/0 dB DTMF compliant with ITU-T Rec. Q.23 Description
7-54
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
)*4 Cuic8 Re+erence o+ Po,er Consumption and 9ei ht o+ 5ach (oard

This section lists the power consumption and weight of each board of the OptiX OSN series equipment. Table 7-82 lists the power consumption and weight of each board. Table 7-82 Power consumption and weight of each board (oard Po,er Consumption $9' 9ei ht $8 ' (oard Po,er Consumption $9' 9ei ht $8 '
SDH boards N1SLQ41 N1SF64A 12 33(the OptiX OSN 3500/3500 II supports) 26(the OptiX OSN 7500 supports) N1SF64 33(the OptiX OSN 3500/3500 II/2500 REG supports) 26(the OptiX OSN 7500 supports) N1SLD64 N1SL64A N1SL64 41 40 30(the OptiX OSN 3500/3500 II/2500 REG supports) 22(the OptiX OSN 7500 supports) N2SL64 T2SL64 N1SF16 N1SLO16 N1SLQ16 N2SLQ16 32 40 26 38 20 35 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.0 0.9 1.3 N2SL4 R1SL4 R3SL4 N1SEP1 N1SLH1 N1SLT1 15 10 11 17 27 22 1.0 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.3 1.2 1.1 1.1 R3SLD4 N1SL4A N1SL4 11 17 17 0.5 0.6 0.6 1.1 R1SLD4 11 0.5 0.6 1.1 N1SLD4 N2SLD4 17 15 0.6 1.0
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
7-55
(oard
Po,er Consumption $9' 23 20 20 22 19 19 22 17 17 16 17 40 11 6 49
9ei ht $8 ' 0.9 0.6 1.1 0.9 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.6 1.1 0.4 0.4 1.5
(oard
Po,er Consumption $9' 26 20 15 15 15 12 17 17 14 10 11 16 6 6 -
9ei ht $8 ' 1.1 1.2 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.4 0.6 0.6 1.0 0.3 0.3 0.7 0.4 0.4 -
N1SLD16 N1SL16A N2SL16A N3SL16A N1SL16 N2SL16 N3SL16 N1SLQ4A N1SLQ4 N2SLQ4 N1SLD4A T2SL64A N1EU08 N1OU08 N3SLH41 PDH boards N1SPQ4 N2SPQ4 N1DXA N1DX1 N1PQ3 N1PD3 N2PD3 N1PL3A N2PL3A N1PL3 N1DM12 N1TSB4 N1C34S
N2SLO1 N3SLO1 N1SLQ1A N1SLQ1 N2SLQ1 R1SLQ1 N1SL1A N1SL1 N2SL1 R1SL1 R3SL1 N3SLQ41 N1EU04 N2OU08 -
24 24 10 15 13 19 12 15 12 15 0 3 0
0.9 0.9 0.8 1.0 0.9 1.1 1.1 1.0 0.9 1.0 0.4 0.3 0.3
N2PL3 N1PQM N1PQ1 N2PQ1 R1PD1 R2PD1 R3PD1 N1PL1 R1PL1 N2PQ3 N1TSB8 N1MU04 R1L12S
12 22 19 13 15 15 8 7 7 13 0 2 5
0.9 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.6 0.6 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.9 0.3 0.4 0.3
7-56
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
(oard
Po,er Consumption $9' 0 0 0
9ei ht $8 ' 0.4 0.4 0.4
(oard
Po,er Consumption $9' 0 3 -
9ei ht $8 ' 0.3 0.3 -
N1D34S N1D75S N1D12S
N1D12B N1L75S -
EoS/EoP boards N1MST4 N1IDQ1 N1IDL4 N1ADQ1 N1ADL4 N1EAS2 N1EMR0 N2EGR2 N1EGS4A N1EGS4 N3EGS4 N4EGS4 N1EMS4 N1EMS2 N2EGS2 N3EGS2 N1EFS4 N1ETS8 N1ETF8 N1EFF8 N1IDL4A Packet boards R1PEFS8 Q1PEGS2 R1PEGS1 12 9 8 0.3 0.6 0.4 N1PETF8 N1PEG16 N1PEX1 8 137 107 0.4 2.3 2.4 26 41 41 41 41 70 47 40 53 70 70 34 65 40 43 25 30 0 2 6 46 0.9 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.9 1.2 1.2 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 0.7 1.1 0.8 1.0 0.6 1.0 0.4 0.4 0.4 1.5 N2EFS4 N3EFS4 N1EFS0A N1EFS0 N2EFS0 N4EFS0 N5EFS0 N1EGT2 N2EGT2 N1EFT8A N1EFT8 N1EFT4 N1EFT8A N1EFT8 N1EFT4 R1EFT4 N2EMR0 N1ETF8A N1EFF8A 30 18 32 35 35 35 22 29 15 26 26 14 26 26 14 14 50 11 15 1.0 0.6 0.7 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.6 0.9 0.9 1.0 1.0 0.5 1.0 1.0 0.5 0.5 1.2 0.4 0.4 -
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
7-57
(oard
9ei ht $8 ' 1.2 1.4 0.4
(oard
Po,er Consumption $9' 68 13 -
9ei ht $8 ' 1.4 0.5 -
N1PEG8 N2PEX1 R1PEF4F EoD Boards N1EDQ41 CES boards N1MD75 N1CQ1
N1PEX2 N1PEFF8 -
70
1.0
14 12
0.5 0.5
N1MD12 R1ML1A/ B
14 16
0.5 0.4
Microwave boards N1IFSD1 WDM boards N1FIB N1MR2A N1LWX N1MR4 N1MR2C 0 0 30 0 0 0.4 1.0 1.1 0.9 1.0 N1MR2B N1MR2 N1CMR4 N1CMR2 0 0 0 0 1.0 0.9 0.9 0.8 24 1.1 N1RPWR 45 1.4
Cross-Connect and system control boards N4GSCC N1PSXCS N2PSXCS A N6GSCC T1PSXCS A 19 90 80 35 95 1.0 2.1 1.2 0.9 1.4 R1PCXLN 60 1.0 -
Auxiliary boards N1FANA XE1FAN XE3FAN R1FAN Q1SEI 19 16 10 20 10 1.2 1.5 1.2 0.8 0.9 R1AMU R1AUX R2AUX Q1AUX N1AUX 8 19 19 10 19 0.5 1.0 1.0 0.5 1.0
7-58
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
(oard
9ei ht $8 ' 0.9 0.7 1.0
(oard
9ei ht $8 ' 0.4 0.5 0.4
N1SEI Q1SAP Q2SAP
T1AUX T1EOW R1EOW
Optical amplifier boards and dispersion compensation boards N1DCU N2DCU N1RPC02 N1RPC01 61COA OBU101 0 0 110 70 10 16 0.4 0.4 4.2 4.0 3.5 1.3 62COA N1COA N1BPA N2BPA N1BA2 OBU102 75 10 20 11 20 18 8.0 3.5 1.0 1.2 1.0 1.3
Power interface boards R1PIUA R1PIUB R1PIUC N1PIUA T1PIU N1PIUB T1PIUB 2 4 5 3 8 6 6 0.5 0.4 0.5 0.5 1.3 0.6 0.5 N1PIU Q2PIU Q1PIU R1PIU UPM 8 2 8 2 1.2 0.3 1.3 0.4 15 -
)*6 Sa+ety Certi+ication

The OptiX OSN 3500 has received several safety certifications. Table 7-83 lists the safety certifications that the OptiX OSN 3500 has received.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
7-59
Table 7-83 Safety certifications that the OptiX OSN 3500 has received Item EMC Standard CISPR22 Class A CISPR24 EN55022 Class A EN50024 ETSI EN 300 386 Class A ETSI ES 201 468 CFR 47 FCC Part 15 Class A ICES 003 Class A AS/NZS CISPR22 Class A GB9254 Class A VCCI Class A Safety IEC 60950-1 IEC/EN41003 EN 60950-1 UL 60950-1 CSA C22.2 No 60950-1 AS/NZS 60950-1 BS EN 60950-1 IS 13252 GB4943 Laser safety FDA rules 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 IEC60825-1 IEC60825-2 EN60825-1 EN60825-2 GB7247 Health ICNIRP Guideline 1999-519-EC EN 50385 OET Bulletin 65 IEEE Std C95.1 Environment protection RoHS
7-60
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
)*%" 5nvironmental Conditions

The OptiX OSN 3500 requires a different environment during storage, transportation, and operation. This topic lists the environmental conditions. The following international standards are used as the reference for specifying the environmental conditions: ETS (European Telecommunication Standards) 300 019-1-3: Class 3.2 Partly temperature-controlled location NEBS GR-63-CORE: Network Equipment-Building System (NEBS) Requirements: Physical Protection 7.10.1 Environment for Storage The OptiX OSN 3500 requires a proper environment for storage. 7.10.2 Environment for Transportation The OptiX OSN 3500 requires a proper environment for transportation. 7.10.3 Environment for Operation The OptiX OSN 3500 requires a proper environment for operation.
)*%"*% 5nvironment +or Stora e

The OptiX OSN 3500 requires a proper environment for storage.
Climatic Conditions
Table 7-84 lists the climatic conditions for storage. Table 7-84 Climatic conditions for storage Item Altitude Air pressure Air temperature Rate of change of temperature Relative humidity Ran e 4850 m 55 kPa to 106 kPa -40C to +70C 1 C/min 5% to 100%
9aterproo+ Re=uirements
Generally, the equipment on the customer site must be stored indoors. There should be no water on the floor or water entering the equipment cartons. The equipment should be placed away from places where there are possibilities of water leakage such as near the auto fire-fighting facilities and heating facilities. If the equipment is stored outdoors, ensure that the following conditions are met:
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
7-61
The cartons must be intact. Take rainproof measures to prevent water from entering the cartons. There should be no water on the ground where the cartons are placed. The cartons must be free from direct exposure to sunlight.
(iolo ical Conditions

Prevent the growth of microbes such as mould and fungus. Prevent the presence of rodents and other animals.
Air Cleanness
The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive, or corrosive dust. The density of the mechanically active substances must meet the requirements specified in Table 7-85. Table 7-85 Requirements for the density of the mechanically active substances during storage 2echanically Active Substance Dust (suspension) Dust (sedimentation) Sand Content 5.00 mg/m3 20.0 mg/m2h 300 mg/m3
The density of the chemically active substances must meet the requirements specified in Table 7-86. Table 7-86 Requirements for the density of the chemically active substances during storage Chemically Active Substance SO2 H 2S NO2 NH3 Cl2 HCl HF O3 Content 0.30 mg/m3 0.10 mg/m3 0.50 mg/m3 1.00 mg/m3 0.10 mg/m3 0.10 mg/m3 0.01 mg/m3 0.05 mg/m3
2echanical Stress
Table 7-87 lists the requirements for mechanical stress during storage.
Table 7-87 Requirements for mechanical stress during storage Item Random vibration Sub&Item Acceleration spectral density Frequency dB/oct Ran e 5 Hz to 20 Hz +12 0.02 m2/s3 10 Hz to 50 Hz 50 Hz to 100 Hz -12
)*%"*# 5nvironment +or Transportation

The OptiX OSN 3500 requires a proper environment for transportation.
Climatic Conditions
Table 7-88 lists the climatic conditions for transportation. Table 7-88 Climatic conditions for transportation Item Altitude Air pressure Air temperature Rate of change of temperature Relative humidity Ran e 4850 m 55 kPa to 106 kPa -40C to +70C 1C/min 5% to 100%
9aterproo+ Re=uirements
Ensure that the following conditions are met when transporting the equipment: The cartons must be intact. Take rainproof measures to prevent water from entering the cartons. There should be no water in the transportation tool.

Air Cleanness
The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive, or corrosive dust.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
7-63
The density of the mechanically active substances must meet the requirements specified in Table 7-89. Table 7-89 Requirements for the density of the mechanically active substances during transportation 2echanically Active Substance Dust (suspension) Dust (sedimentation) Sand Content No requirement 3.0 mg/m2h 100 mg/m3
The density of the chemically active substances must meet the requirements specified in Table 7-90. Table 7-90 Requirements for the density of the chemically active substances during transportation Chemically Active Substance SO2 H 2S NO2 NH3 Cl2 HCl HF O3 Content 1.00 mg/m3 0.50 mg/m3 1.00 mg/m3 3.00 mg/m3 0.50 mg/m3 0.03 mg/m3 0.10 mg/m3
2echanical Stress
Table 7-91 lists the requirements for mechanical stress during transportation. Table 7-91 Requirements for mechanical stress during transportation Item Random vibration Sub&Item Acceleration spectral density Frequency range Shock Response spectrum I (sample weight > 50 kg) Response spectrum II (sample weight 50 kg) Ran e 1 m2/s3 5 Hz to 20 Hz -3 dBA 20 Hz to 200 Hz
100 m/s2, 11 ms, 100 times on each surface 180 m/s2, 6 ms, 100 times on each surface
7-64
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Item Fall-off
Sub&Item Weight (kg) Height (m) Weight (kg) Height (m) Weight (kg) Height (m) Weight (kg) Height (m) Weight (kg) Height (m) Weight (kg) Height (m) Weight (kg) Height (m) Weight (kg) Height (m)
Ran e < 10 1.0 < 15 1.0 < 20 0.8 < 30 0.6 < 40 0.5 < 50 0.4 < 100 0.3 > 100 0.1
NOTE The shock response spectrum is the maximum acceleration response curve generated by the equipment that is spurred by a specified shock. Static load is the pressure from the top, which the equipment with the package can endure when the equipment is placed in a specific manner.
)*%"*- 5nvironment +or 1peration

The OptiX OSN 3500 requires a proper environment for operation.
Climatic Conditions
Table 7-92 list the climatic conditions when the OptiX OSN 3500 operates. Table 7-92 Requirements for temperature and humidity Temperature Long-term working conditions 0C to 45C Short-term working conditions -5C to +55C Relative !umidity Long-term working conditions 10% to 90% Short-term working conditions 5% to 95%
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
7-65
Temperature
Relative !umidity
NOTE The temperature and humidity values are tested in a place that is 1.5 m above the floor and 0.4 m in front of the equipment. Short-term working conditions mean that the continuous working time of the equipment does not exceed 96 hours, and that the accumulated working time every year does not exceed 15 days.

Air Cleanness
The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive, or corrosive dust. The density of the mechanically active substances must meet the requirements specified in Table 7-93. Table 7-93 Requirements for the density of the mechanically active substances during operation 2echanically Active Substance Dust particle Dust (suspension) Dust (sedimentation) Sand Content 3 x 105 particles/m3 0.2 mg/m3 1.5 mg/m2h 20 mg/m3
The density of the chemically active substances must meet the requirements specified in Table 7-94. Table 7-94 Requirements for the density of the chemically active substances during operation Chemically Active Substance SO2 H 2S NH3 Cl2 HCl HF O3 NOX Content 0.30 mg/m3 0.10 mg/m3 1.00 mg/m3 0.10 mg/m3 0.10 mg/m3 0.01 mg/m3 0.05 mg/m3 0.50 mg/m3
7-66
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
2echanical Stress
Table 7-95 lists the requirements for mechanical stress during operation. Table 7-95 Requirements for mechanical stress during operation Item Sinusoidal vibration Sub&Item Velocity Acceleration Frequency range Shock Shock response spectrum II Static load Ran e 5 mm/s 5 Hz to 62 Hz 2 m/s2 62 Hz to 200 Hz
Half-sin wave, 30 m/s2, 11 ms, three times on each surface 0 kPa
NOTE The shock response spectrum is the maximum acceleration response curve generated by the equipment that is spurred by a specified shock. Static load is the pressure from the top, which the equipment with the package can endure when the equipment is placed in a specific manner.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
7-67
8 Energy Saving and Environment Protection
4
4*% 5ner y Savin
Static 5ner y Savin
5ner y Savin and 5nvironment Protection
The OptiX OSN equipment supports the control and monitoring of dynamic energy saving.
Regarding static energy saving, the OptiX OSN equipment takes the following measures: Uses an easy scheme for board design. Uses the power module with high efficiency. Replaces the linear power supplies with switching power supplies. Uses the standard digital voltage. Provides a power switch for each subrack. Thus, the power supply for the subrack can be shut down the manually.
Dynamic 5ner y Savin

Energy saving (power down) design for boards: Power down design: Idle buses are powered down. That is, the buses that are not configured with services and the buses of the idle slots are in power down state. Intelligent fans: Rotating speed of fans are controlled intelligently.
Control and 2onitorin o+ 5ner y Savin

You can control and monitor the energy saving through the NMS. You can query the power consumption of a board on a real-time basis.
4*# 5nvironment Protection

The OptiX OSN equipment is designed according to the requirements of sustainable development. All components and packages of the equipment are identified in compliance with the associated standards for recycling.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
8-1
8 Energy Saving and Environment Protection
The OptiX OSN equipment not only provides necessary packing materials, but also guarantees that the size of the package containing the equipment and accessories is at most three times the size of the net equipment. The product is also designed for easy unpacking. For details about how to unpack the equipment, see the associated manual. In addition, all hazardous substances contained in packaging decompose easily. Every plastic component that weighs over 25g is labeled according to the standards of ISO 11469 and ISO 1043-1 to ISO 1043-4. All components and packages of the equipment are provided with standard labels for recycling. Plugs and connectors are easy to find, and the associated operations can be performed by using simple tools. All the attached materials, such as labels, are easy to remove. Certain identification information, such as silkscreens, is printed on the front panel or subrack.
8-2
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
9 Compliant Standards
6
6*% ITU&T Recommendations
Table 9-1 ITU-T recommendations Recommendation G.652 G.655 G.661 G.662 G.663 G.671 G.691 G.692 G.694.1 G.694.2 G.702 G.703 G.704 G.7041 G.7042 Description
Compliant Standards
The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the ITU-T recommendations.
Characteristics of a single-mode optical fiber cable Characteristics of a non-zero dispersion-shifted single-mode optical fiber and cable Definition and test methods for the relevant generic parameters of optical fiber amplifiers Generic characteristics of optical fiber amplifier devices and sub-systems Application related aspects of optical fiber amplifier devices and sub-systems Transmission characteristics of optical components and subsystems Optical interfaces for single channel STM-64 and other SDH systems with optical amplifiers Optical interfaces for multichannel systems with optical amplifiers Spectral grids for WDM applications: DWDM frequency grid Spectral grids for WDM applications: CWDM wavelength grid Digital hierarchy bit rates Physical/electrical characteristic of hierarchical digital interfaces Synchronous frame structures used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8448 and 44736kbit/s hierarchical levels Generic framing procedure (GFP) Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS)
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
9-1
Recommendation G.706
Description Frame alignment and cyclic redundancy check(CRC) procedures relating to basic frame structures defined in Recommendation G.704 Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Interfaces for the Optical Transport Network (OTN) Protocol suites for Q-interfaces for management of transmission systems Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) management information model for the network element view Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) unidirectional performance monitoring for the network element view Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) management of lower order path trace and interface labeling for the network element view Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) configuration of linear multiplex section protection for the network element view Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) configuration of linear multiplex section protection for the network element view Loss of signal (LOS) and alarm indication signal (AIS) defect detection and clearance criteria Common equipment management function requirements Vocabulary of terms for synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) networks and equipment Synchronization layer functions Characteristics of Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) equipment functional blocks Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) management Digital transmission models Architectures of transport networks based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) Generic functional architecture of transport networks Characteristics of transport equipment - Description methodology and generic functionality Generic protection switching - Linear trail and subnetwork protection Definitions and terminology for synchronization networks
G.707 G.709 G.773 G.774 1, G.774 2, G.774 3, G.774 4, G.774 5 G.774.6 G.774.7 G.774.9 G.774.10 G.775 G.7710 G.780 G.781 G.783 G.784 G.801 G.803 G.805 G.806 G.808.1 G.810
9-2
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Recommendation G.811 G.812 G.813 G.821
Description Timing characteristics of primary reference clocks Timing requirements of slave clocks suitable for use as node clocks in synchronization networks Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks (SEC) Error performance of an international digital connection operating at a bit rate below the primary rate and forming part of an integrated services digital network Controlled slip rate objectives on an international digital connection The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the 2048kbit/s hierarchy The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the 1544kbit/s hierarchy The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) Error performance parameters and objectives for international, constant bit rate digital paths at or above the primary rate Error performance parameters and objectives for international, constant bit rate synchronous digital paths Error performance events for SDH multiplex and regenerator sections Management capabilities of transport networks based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) Types and characteristics of SDH network protection architectures Cooperation of the SDH network protection structures Optical interfaces of equipments and systems relating to the synchronous digital hierarchy Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital hierarchy for use on optical fiber cables Interfaces for the transport MPLS (T-MPLS) hierarchy Protection switching for transport MPLS (T-MPLS) networks MPLS layer network architecture Application of MPLS in the transport network Characteristics of transport MPLS equipment functional blocks Broadband aspects of ISDN B-ISDN asynchronous transfer mode functional characteristics B-ISDN general network aspects
G.822 G.823 G.824 G.825 G.826 G.828 G.829 G.831 G.841 G.842 G.957 G.958 G.8112 G.8031 G.8110 G.8110.1 G.8121 I.121 I.150 I.311
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
9-3
Recommendation I.321 I.361 I.630 M.3010 Q.811 Q.812 V.24 V.35 V.28 X.21
Description B-ISDN operation and maintenance principles and functions B-ISDN ATM layer specification ATM protection switching Principles for a telecommunication management network Lower layer protocol profiles for the Q3-interface Upper layer protocol profiles for the Q3-interface List of definitions for interchange circuits between data terminal equipment (DTE) and data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE) Data transmission at 48 kilobits per second using 60-108 kHz group band circuits Electrical characteristics for unbalanced double-current interchange circuits Use on public data networks of Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) which is designed for interfacing to synchronous V-Series modems Link Access Procedure-SDH (LAPS) Ethernet over LAPS Requirements for OAM functionality for MPLS networks OAM functions and mechanisms for Ethernet based networks
X.85 X.86 Y.1710 Y.1731
6*# I555 Standards

The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the IEEE standards. Table 9-2 IEEE standards Standard IEEE 802.17 IEEE 802.1ad IEEE 802.1ag IEEE 802.1d IEEE 802.1q IEEE 802.3 Description Resilient packet ring access method and physical layer specifications Virtual bridged local area networks Amendment 4: Provider bridges Connectivity fault management Media access control (MAC) bridges Virtual bridged local area networks Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specification
9-4
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Standard IEEE 802.3ad IEEE 802.3ae IEEE 802.3ah IEEE 802.3u
Description Aggregation of multiple link segments Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical layer, and management parameters for 10 Gb/s operation Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical layer, medium attachment units, and repeater for 100 Mb/s operation, type 100BASE-T Standards for local and metropolitan area networks: specification for 802.3 full duplex operation Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical layer, repeater and management parameters for 1000 Mb/s operation Defines precise synchronization of clocks in measurement and control systems implemented with technologies
IEEE 802.3x IEEE 802.3z IEEE 1588 V2
6*- I5T. Standards

The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the IETF standards. Table 9-3 IETF standards Standard RFC 1662 (1994) RFC 1661 (1994) RFC 1990 RFC 2328 RFC 2370 RFC 2453 RFC 2514 RFC 2615 (1999) RFC 2702 RFC 3031 RFC 3032 Description PPP in HDLC-like Framing The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) The PPP Multilink Protocol (MP) OSPF Version 2 The OSPF Opaque LSA Option RIP Version 2 Definitions of textual conventions and OBJECT-IDENTITIES for ATM management PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) over SONET/SDH Requirements for Traffic Engineering over MPLS Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Architecture MPLS Label Stack Encoding
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
9-5
Standard RFC 3270 RFC 3469 RFC 3623 RFC 3630 RFC 3916 RFC 3985 RFC 4031 RFC 4090 RFC 4110 RFC 4111 RFC 4220 RFC 4221 RFC 4364 RFC 4365 RFC 4271 RFC 4273 RFC 4377 RFC 4378 RFC 4379 RFC 4382 RFC 4385 RFC 3809 RFC 4447
Description Multi-Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) Support of Differentiated Services Framework for multi-protocol label switching (MPLS)-based recovery Graceful OSPF Restart Traffic Engineering (TE) Extensions to OSPF Version 2 Requirements for Pseudo-Wire Emulation Edge-to-Edge (PWE3) Pseudo Wire Emulation Edge-to-Edge (PWE3) Architecture Service Requirements for Layer 3 Provider Provisioned Virtual Private Networks (PPVPNs) Fast Reroute Extensions to RSVP-TE for LSP Tunnels A Framework for Layer 3 Provider-Provisioned Virtual Private Networks (PPVPNs) Security Framework for Provider-Provisioned Virtual Private Networks (PPVPNs) Traffic engineering link management information base Multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) management overview BGP/MPLS IP Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) Applicability Statement for BGP/MPLS IP Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) A Border Gateway Protocol 4 (BGP-4) Definitions of Managed Objects for BGP-4 Operations and management (OAM) requirements for multi-protocol label switched (MPLS) networks A framework for multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) operations and management (OAM) Detecting Multi-Protocol Label Switched (MPLS) Data Plane Failures MPLS/BGP Layer 3 Virtual Private Network (VPN) Management Information Base Pseudowire Emulation Edge-to-Edge (PWE3) Control Word for Use over an MPLS PSN Generic Requirements for Provider Provisioned Virtual Private Networks (PPVPN) Pseudowire Setup and Maintenance Using the Label Distribution Protocol (LDP)
9-6
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Standard RFC 4456 RFC 4684
Description BGP Route Reflection: An Alternative to Full Mesh Internal BGP (IBGP) Constrained Route Distribution for Border Gateway Protocol/MultiProtocol Label Switching (BGP/MPLS) Internet Protocol (IP) Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) Graceful Restart Mechanism for BGP Multiprotocol Extensions for BGP-4 Pseudowire Virtual Circuit Connectivity Verification (VCCV): A Control Channel for Pseudowires Requirements for Multi-Segment Pseudowire Emulation Edge-to-Edge (PWE3)
RFC 4724 RFC 4760 RFC 5085 RFC 5254
6*/ ANSI Standards

The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the ANSI related standards. Table 9-4 ANSI related standards Standard ANSI X3.296 ANSI X3.230 Description SBCON (ESCON): FICON Fiber channel - physical and signaling interface (FC-PH)
6*0 Pac8et Standards

The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the packet related standards. Table 9-5 Packet related standards Pac8et related standards ITU-T G.8112 ITU-T G.8031 ITU-T Y.1711 ITU-T Y.1720 ITU-T Y.1561 Description Interfaces for the transport MPLS (T-MPLS) hierarchy Protection switching for transport MPLS (T-MPLS) networks Operation & Maintenance mechanism for MPLS networks Protection switching for MPLS networks Performance and availability parameters for MPLS networks
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
9-7
Pac8et related standards ITU-T G.8110 ITU-T G.8110.1 ITU-T G.8121 ITU-T Y.1710 RFC 2328 RFC 2370 RFC 2453 RFC 3031 RFC 3270 RFC 3469 RFC 3623 RFC 3630 RFC 3916 RFC 3985 RFC 4031 RFC 4090 RFC 4110 RFC 4111 RFC 4220 RFC 4221 RFC 4364 RFC 4365 RFC 4271 RFC 4273 RFC 4377
Description MPLS layer network architecture Application of MPLS in the transport network Characteristics of transport MPLS equipment functional blocks Requirements for OAM functionality for MPLS networks OSPF Version 2 The OSPF Opaque LSA Option RIP Version 2 MPLS architecture Multi-Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) Support of Differentiated Service Framework for multi-protocol label switching (MPLS)-based recovery Graceful OSPF Restart Traffic Engineering (TE) Extensions to OSPF Version 2 Requirements for Pseudo-Wire Emulation Edge-to-Edge (PWE3) Pseudo Wire Emulation Edge-to-Edge (PWE3) Architecture Service Requirements for Layer 3 Provider Provisioned Virtual Private Networks (PPVPNs) Fast Reroute Extensions to RSVP-TE for LSP Tunnels A Framework for Layer 3 Provider-Provisioned Virtual Private Networks (PPVPNs) Security Framework for Provider-Provisioned Virtual Private Networks (PPVPNs) Traffic engineering link management information base Multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) management overview BGP/MPLS IP Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) Applicability Statement for BGP/MPLS IP Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) A Border Gateway Protocol 4 (BGP-4) Definitions of Managed Objects for BGP-4 Operations and management (OAM) requirements for multi-protocol label switched (MPLS) networks
9-8
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Pac8et related standards RFC 4378 RFC 4379 RFC 4382 RFC 4385 RFC 3809 RFC 4447 RFC 4456 RFC 4684
Description A framework for multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) operations and management (OAM) Detecting Multi-Protocol Label Switched (MPLS) Data Plane Failures MPLS/BGP Layer 3 Virtual Private Network (VPN) Management Information Base Pseudowire Emulation Edge-to-Edge (PWE3) Control Word for Use over an MPLS PSN Generic Requirements for Provider Provisioned Virtual Private Networks (PPVPN) Pseudowire Setup and Maintenance Using the Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) BGP Route Reflection: An Alternative to Full Mesh Internal BGP (IBGP) Constrained Route Distribution for Border Gateway Protocol/MultiProtocol Label Switching (BGP/MPLS) Internet Protocol (IP) Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) Graceful Restart Mechanism for BGP Multiprotocol Extensions for BGP-4 Pseudowire Virtual Circuit Connectivity Verification (VCCV): A Control Channel for Pseudowires Requirements for Multi-Segment Pseudowire Emulation Edge-to-Edge (PWE3)
RFC 4724 RFC 4760 RFC 5085 RFC 5254
6*3 2icro,ave Standards

The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the microwave related standards. Table 9-6 Microwave related standards Standard ITU-R F.384-7 Description Radio-frequency channel arrangements for medium and high capacity analogue or digital radio-relay systems operating in the upper 6 GHz band Radio-frequency channel arrangements for high capacity radio-relay systems operating in the lower 6 GHz band
ITU-R F.383-6
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
9-9
Standard ITU-R F.385-8 ITU-R F.386-6
Description Radio-frequency channel arrangements for fixed wireless systems operating in the 7 GHz band Radio-frequency channel arrangements for medium and high capacity analogue or digital radio-relay systems operating in the 8 GHz band Radio-frequency channel arrangements for radio-relay systems operating in the 11 GHz band Radio-frequency channel arrangements for radio-relay systems operating in the 13 GHz frequency band Radio-frequency channel arrangements for radio-relay systems operating in the 15 GHz band Radio-frequency channel arrangements for fixed wireless systems operating in the 18 GHz frequency band Radio-frequency channel arrangements for radio-relay systems operating in the 23 GHz band Radio-frequency channel arrangements for radio-relay systems operating in the 25, 26 and 28 GHz bands Radio-frequency arrangements for systems of the fixed service operating in the 38 GHz band Bandwidths and unwanted emissions of digital radio-relay systems Unwanted emissions in the spurious domain Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics and requirements for point-to-point equipment and antennas; Part 1: Overview and system-independent common characteristics Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics and requirements for point-to-point equipment and antennas; Part 2-1: System-dependent requirements for digital systems operating in frequency bands where frequency co-ordination is applied Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics and requirements forpoint-to-point equipment and antennas; Part 2-2: Harmonized EN covering essential requirements of Article 3.2 of R&TTE Directive for digital systems operating in frequency bands where frequency co-ordination is applied Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics and requirements forpoint-to-point equipment and antennas; Part 3: Harmonized EN covering essential requirements of Article 3.2 of R&TTE Directive for equipment operating in frequency bands where no frequency co-ordination is applied Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics and requirements for point-to-point equipment and antennas; Part 4-1: System-dependent requirements for antennas
ITU-R F.387-9 ITU-R F.497-6 ITU-R F.636-3 ITU-R F.595-8 ITU-R F.637-3 ITU-R F.748-3 ITU-R F.749-2 ITU-R F.1191-1 1 ITU-R SM.329-10 ETSI EN 302 217-1 V1.1.4 ETSI EN 302 217-2-1 V1.1.3
ETSI EN 302 217-2-2 V1.1.3
ETSI EN 302 217-3 V1.1.3
ETSI EN 302 217-4-1 V1.1.3
9-10
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
Standard ETSI EN 302 217-4-2 V1.2.1
Description Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics and requirements for point-to-point equipment and antennas; Part 4-2: Harmonized EN covering essential requirements of Article 3.2 of R&TTE Directive for antennas Fixed Radio Systems; Conformance testing; Part 1: Point-to-Point equipment - Definitions, general requirements and test procedures Fixed Radio Systems; Conformance testing; Part 3-1: Point-to-Point antennas; Definitions, general requirements and test procedures Fixed Radio Systems; Point-to-point and Multipoint Systems; Spurious emissions and receiver immunity limits at equipment/antenna port of Digital Fixed Radio Systems Hollow metallic waveguides Part 2: Relevant specifications for ordinary rectangular waveguides Flanges for waveguides Part 2: Relevant specifications for flanges for ordinary rectangular waveguides
ETSI EN 301 126-1 V1.1.2 ETSI EN 301 126-3-1 V1.1.2 ETSI EN 301 390 V1.2.1 iec 60153-2-1974 iec 60154-2-1980
6*) 5nvironment Related Standards

The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the environment related standards. Table 9-7 Environment related standards Standard IEC 60068-2 IEC 60068-3-3 IEC 60721-2-6 IEC 60721-3-1 Description Basic environmental testing procedures Environmental testing - Part 3: Background information - Subpart 3: Guidance. Seismic test methods for equipments Environmental conditions appearing in nature - Earthquake vibration Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3: Classification of groups of environmental parameters and their severities - Section 1: Storage Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3: Classification of groups of environmental parameters and their severities - Section 3: Stationary use at weatherprotected locations Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations Partly temperature-controlled location Network equipment-building system (NEBS) requirements: Physical protection
IEC 60721-3-3
ETS 300 019-1-1 ETS 300 019-1-3 NEBS GR-63-CORE
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
9-11
6*4 52C Standards

The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the EMC related standards. Table 9-8 EMC related standards Standard IEC 61000-4-2 EN 61000-4-2 IEC 61000-4-3 EN 61000-4-3 IEC 61000-4-4 EN 61000-4-4 IEC 61000-4-5 EN 61000-4-5 IEC 61000-4-6 EN 61000-4-6 IEC 61000-4-29 EN 61000-4-29 CISPR 22/EN 55022 CISPR 24/EN 55024 ETSI EN 300386 Description Electromagnetic compatibility-Part4-2: Testing and measurement techniques-Electrostatic discharge immunity test Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-3: Testing and measurement techniques-Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic field immunity test Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-4: Testing and measurement techniques-Electrical fast transient/burst immunity test Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-5: Testing and measurement techniques-Surge immunity test Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-6: Testing and measurement techniques-Immunity to conducted disturbances, induced by radio-frequency fields Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-29: Testing and measurement techniques-Voltage dips, shot interruptions and voltage variations on d.c. input power port immunity tests Information technology equipment-Radio disturbance characteristics-Limits and methods of measurement Information technology equipment-immunity charateristics-Limits and methods of measurement Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters (ERM); Telecommunication network equipment; ElectroMagnetic compatibility (EMC) requirements Elecromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters (ERM); Additional electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) telecommunications equipment for enhanced availability of service in specific applications Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Radiated emission testing of physically large telecommunication systems Power supply interface at the input to telecommunications equipment; Part 2: Operated by direct current (dc)
ETSI EN 201468
ETSI EN 300127
ETSI EN 300132-2
9-12
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
6*6 Sa+ety Compliance Standards

The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the safety compliance related standards. Table 9-9 Safety compliance related standards Standard EN 60950 IEC 60950 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No 1-M94 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No 950-95 73/23/EEC UL 60950-1 IEC 60529 GR-1089-CORE Description Information technology equipment - safety Safety of information technology equipment including electrical business equipment Audio, video and similar electronic equipment Safety of information technology equipment Low voltage directive Safety of information technology equipment Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code) Electromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical Safety
6*%" Protection Standards

The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the protection related standards. Table 9-10 Protection related standards Standard IEC 61024-1 IEC 61312-1 IEC 61000-4-5 ITU-T K.11 ITU-T K.20 ITU-T K.27 ITU-T K.41 Description Protection of structures against lightning Protection against lightning electromagnetic impulse part I: general principles Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)- Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques - Section 5: Surge immunity test Principles of protection against overvoltage and overcurrents Resistibility of telecommunication switching equipment to overvoltages and overcurrents Bonding configurations and earthing inside a telecommunication building Resistibility of internal interfaces of telecommunication centres to surge overvoltages
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
9-13
A Glossary
A
Terms and abbreviations are listed in an alphabetical order. A.1 Numerics A.2 A A.3 B A.4 C A.5 D A.6 E A.7 F A.8 G A.9 H A.10 I A.11 J A.12 L A.13 M A.14 N A.15 O A.16 P A.17 Q A.18 R A.19 S A.20 T A.21 U A.22 V A.23 W
Glossary
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A-1
A Glossary
A*% Numerics
1+1 protection An architecture that has one normal traffic signal, one working SNC/trail, one protection SNC/trail and a permanent bridge. At the source end, the normal traffic signal is permanently bridged to both the working and protection SNC/trail. At the sink end, the normal traffic signal is selected from the better of the two SNCs/trails. Due to the permanent bridging, the 1+1 architecture does not allow an extra unprotected traffic signal to be provided. IEEE 802.3 Physical Layer specification for a 100 Mb/s CSMA/CD local area network. IEEE 802.3 Physical Layer specification for a 100 Mb/s CSMA/CD local area network over two pairs of Category 5 unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) or shielded twisted-pair (STP) wire. Defined in IEEE 802.3, it is an Ethernet specification that uses the twist pair with the maximum length of 100 meters at 10 Mbit/s for each network segment. A 1:N protection architecture has N normal service signals, N working SNCs/trails and one protection SNC/trail. It may have one extra service signal. Pulse per second, which, strictly speaking, is not a time synchronization signal. This is because 1PPS provides only the "gauge" corresponding to the UTC second, but does not provide the information about the day, month, or year. Therefore, 1PPS is used as the reference for frequency synchronization. On certain occasions, 1PPS can also be used on other interfaces for high precision timing. Reshaping, Retiming, Regenerating.
100BASE-T 100BASE-TX
10BASE-T
1:N protection
1PPS
3R
A*# A
ABR AC ACAP Available Bit Rate Alternating Current The Adjacent Channel Alternate Polarization (ACAP) operation provides orthogonal polarizations between two adjacent communication channels.
A-2
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A Glossary
Active/Standby switching of cross-connect board
If there are two cross-connect boards on the SDH equipment, which are in hot back-up relation of each other, the operation reliability is improved. When both the cross-connect boards are in position, the one inserted first is in the working status. Unplug the active board, the standby one will run in the working status automatically. When the active cross-connect board fails in self-test, the board is pulled out, the board power supply fails or the board hardware operation fails, the standby cross-connect board can automatically take the place of the active one. A network element that adds/drops the PDH signal or STM-x (x < N) signal to/from the STM-N signal on the SDH transport network. See add/drop multiplexer See optical add/drop multiplexing The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher order VC) and a AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to the multiplex section frame start. One or more Administrative Units occupying fixed, defined positions in an STM payload are termed an Administrative Unit Group (AUG).An AUG-1 consists of a homogeneous assembly of AU-3s or an AU-4. A user who has authority to access all the Management Domains of the EMLCore product. He has access to the whole network and to all the management functionalities. N/A Alarm Indication Signal A means of alerting the operator that specified abnormal condition exists. When an alarm is generated on the device side, the alarm is reported to the N2000. Then, an alarm panel prompts and the user can view the details of the alarm.
add/drop multiplexer
ADM ADM Administrative Unit
Administrative Unit Group
Administrator
aging time AIS Alarm Alarm automatic report
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A-3
A Glossary
alarm cable alarm filtering
The cable for generation of visual or audio alarms. The alarms are reported to the N2000 BMS, which decides whether to display and save the alarms according to the filtering states of the alarms. The filtered alarms are not displayed and saved on the N2000 BMS, but still monitored. On the cabinet of an NE, there are four indicators in different colors indicating the current status of the NE. When the green indicator is on, it indicates that the NE is powered on. When the red indicator is on, it indicates that a critical alarm is generated. When the orange indicator is on, it indicates that a major alarm is generated. When the yellow indicator is on, it indicates that a minor alarm is generated. The ALM alarm indicator on the front panel of a board indicates the current status of the board. (Metro) A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failure has been detected. It is associated with multiple transport layers.
alarm indication
Alarm indication signal
A-4
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A Glossary
Alarm inversion
For the port that has already been configured but has no service, this function can be used to avoid generating relevant alarm information, thus preventing alarm interference. The alarm report condition of the NE port is related to the alarm inverse mode (not inverse, automatic recovery and manual recovery) setting of the NE and the alarm inversion status (Enable and Disable) setting of the port. When the alarm inversion mode of NE is set to no inversion, alarms of the port will be reported as usual no matter whatever the inversion status of the port is. When the alarm inversion mode of the NE is set to automatic recovery, and the alarm inversion state of the port is set to Enabled, then the alarm of the port will be suppressed. The alarm inversion status of the port will automatically recover to "not inverse" after the alarm ends. For the port that has already been configured but not actually loaded with services, this function can be used to avoid generating relevant alarm information, thus preventing alarm interference. When the alarm inverse mode of the NE is set as "not automatic recovery", if the alarm inversion status of the port is set as Enable, the alarm of the port will be reported. Alarms are detected and reported to the N2000 UMS, and whether the alarm information is displayed and stored is decided by the function of alarm masking. These alarms masked are not displayed and stored on the N2000 UMS. Alarm severity is used to identify the impact of a fault on services. According to ITU-T recommendations, the alarm is classified into four severities: Critical, Major, Minor, Warning. When alarms of various levels occur at the same time, certain lower-level alarms are suppressed by higher-level alarms, and thus will not be reported. See Automatic laser shutdown See Automatic Protection Switching Pertaining to, being, or characteristic of something that is not dependent on timing.
Alarm Masking
Alarm Severity
Alarm suppression
ALS APS asynchronous
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A-5
A Glossary
Asynchronous Transfer Mode
A data transfer technology based on cell, in which packets allocation relies on channel demand. It supports fast packet switching to achieve efficient utilization of network resources. The size of a cell is 53 bytes, which consist of 48-byte payload and 5-byte header. See Asynchronous Transfer Mode See Automatic Transmit Power Control Reduction of signal magnitude or signal loss, usually expressed in decibels. See Administrative Unit See Administrative Unit Group A mechanism that enables devices to negotiate the SPEED and MODE (duplex or half-duplex) of an Ethernet Link. A function that enables the shutdown of the laser when the optical interface board does not carry services or the fiber is faulty. The automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function shortens the working time of the laser and thus extends the service life of the laser. In addition, the ALS prevents human injury caused by the laser beam. Automatic Protection Switching (APS) is the capability of a transmission system to detect a failure on a working facility and to switch to a standby facility to recover the traffic. A method of automatically adjusting the transmit power at the opposite end based on the transmit signal detected at the receiver.
ATM ATPC attenuation AU AUG auto-negotiation
Automatic laser shutdown
Automatic Protection Switching
Automatic Transmit Power Control
A*- (
backplane A backplane is an electronic circuit board containing circuitry and sockets into which additional electronic devices on other circuit boards or cards can be plugged; in a computer, generally synonymous with or part of the motherboard. A periodic operation performed on the data stored in the database for the purposes of database recovery in case that the database is faulty. The backup also refers to data synchronization between active and standby boards.
backup
A-6
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A Glossary
bandwidth
A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in a network. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies the transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate. Backward Defect Indicator See Bit Error Rate A component installed on two sides of the cabinet for binding various cables. The binding strap is 12.7 mm wide, with one hook side (made of transparent polypropylene material) and one mat side (made of black nylon material). BIP-X code is defined as a method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by the transmitting equipment over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the first bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of all X-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc. Even parity is generated by setting the BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of the signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position within the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includes the BIP-X. An error that occurs in some bits in the digital code stream after being received, judged, and regenerated, thus damaging the quality of the transmitted information Bit error rate. Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used to measure the communications quality of a network. See Building Integrated Timing Supply Binding several seriel paths into a parallel path, thus improving the data throughput capacity. Bridge Protocol Data Unit
BDI BER Binding strap binding strap
BIP
bit error
Bit Error Rate
BITS bound path
BPDU
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A-7
A Glossary
bridge
A device that connects two or more networks and forwards packets among them. Bridges operate at the physical network level. Bridges differs from repeaters because bridges store and forward complete packets, while repeaters forward all electrical signals. Bridges differ from routers because bridges use physical addresses, while routers use IP addresses. The process of sending packets from a source to multiple destinations. All the ports of the nodes in the network can receive packets. A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range is determined by the broadcast address. Base Station Controller Base Station Subsystem A function which integrates some simple WDM systems into products that belong to the OSN series . That is, the OSN products can add or drop several wavelengths directly. A building timing supply that minimizes the number of synchronization links entering an office. Sometimes referred to as a synchronization supply unit. Backbone WDM System
broadcast
Broadcast
BSC BSS Build-in WDM
Building Integrated Timing Supply
BWS
A*/ C
cabling The method by which a group of insulated conductors is mechanically assembled or twisted together. A hole which is used for cable routing in the cabinet. The frame which is used for cable routing over the cabinet. The trough which is used for cable routing in the cabinet. Captive nuts (or as they are more correctly named, 'tee nuts') have a range of uses but are more commonly used in the hobby for engine fixing (securing engine mounts to the firewall), wing fixings, and undercarriage fixing.
cabling aperture Cabling frame cabling trough captive nut
A-8
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A Glossary
CAR CAS CBR CBS CCDP CCM CDR CDVT Cell Delay Variation Tolerance
See committed access rate Channel Associated Signaling See Constant Bit Rate Committed Burst Size Co-Channel Dual Polarization Continuity Check Message Clock and Data Recovery See Cell Delay Variation Tolerance This parameter measures the tolerance level a network interface has to aggressive sending (back-to-back or very closely spaced cells) by a connected device, and does not apply to end-systems. The system that gathers all the information about alarms into a certain terminal console. Connectivity Fault Management One type of network that all network nodes are connected one after one to be in series. A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between two or more locations in a network. The channel can be established through wire, radio (microwave), fiber or a combination of the three.The amount of information transmitted per second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits per second. For example, b/s (100 bit/s), kb/s (103 bit/s), Mb/s (106 bit/s), Gb/s (109 bit/s), and Tb/s (1012 bit/s). Committed Information Rate The circuit of the service port on the access device. Common and Internal Spanning Tree Class of service (CoS) is a technology or method used to classify services into different categories according to the service quality.
Centralized alarm system CFM Chain network channel
CIR Circuit CIST class of service
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A-9
A Glossary
Class of Service
Class of Service is abbreviated to CoS. CoS is a rule for queuing. It classifies the packets according to the service type field or the tag in packets, and specifies different priorities for them. All the nodes in DiffServ domain forwards the packets according to their priorities. A device that sends requests, receives responses, and obtains services from the server. Also called frequency synchronization, clock synchronization means that the signal frequency traces the reference frequency, but the start point need not be consistent. The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in a network. Cell Loss Priority See Configuration Management A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface. CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classified into QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission rate can be defined. A process that combines multiple virtual containers. The combined capacities can be used a single capacity. The concatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence. A command file for an NE which defines the configuration of the NE hardware. With the file, the NE can coordinate with other NEs in the entire network. Configuration data is the key factor for the normal running of the entire network. In a network, a system for gathering current configuration information from all nodes in a LAN. To set the basic parameters of an operation object. An extra intra-network or inter-network traffic resulting in decreasing network service efficiency.
client
Clock Synchronization
Clock tracing
CLP CM committed access rate
Concatenation
Configuration Data
Configuration Management
Configure congestion
A-10
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A Glossary
Connection point
A reference point where the output of a trail termination source or a connection is bound to the input of another connection, or where the output of a connection is bound to the input of a trail termination sink or another connection. The connection point is characterized by the information which passes across it. A bidirectional connection point is formed by the association of a contradirectional pair. constant bit rate. A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based on the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on precise clocking to ensure undistorted transmission. It refers to the speed and capability for a group of networking devices to run a specific routing protocol. It functions to keep the network topology consistent. A process in which multiple channels of low-rate signals are multiplexed into one or several channels of required signals. A service that provides enhancements to an underlying service in order to provide for the specific requirements of the convergence service user. In the context of message handling, a transmittal event in which an MTA transforms parts of a message content from one encoded information type to another, or alters a probe so it appears that the described messages were so modified. N/A See class of service See Class of Service Central Processing Unit See Cyclic Redundancy Check An alarm in unrecovered and unacknowledged state, unrecovered and acknowledged state, or recovered and unacknowledged state. Treatment measures must be taken on these alarms.
Constant Bit Rate
convergence
Convergence
Convergence service
Conversion
corrugated tube CoS CoS CPU CRC current alarm
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A-11
A Glossary
Current Performance Data
Performance data stored in the current register. An NE provides two types registers for each performance parameter of the performance monitoring entity. The registers are 15-minute register and 24-hour register, which are used to accumulate the performance data within the current monitoring period. A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmission was error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values. Communications protocols such as XMODEM and Kermit use cyclical redundancy checking.
Cyclic Redundancy Check
A*0 D
DC DCC DCD DCE DCN DDF DDN Defect demultiplexing Direct Current Data Communication Channel Data Carrier Detect Data Circuit-terminal Equipment Data Communication Network See Digital Distribution Frame Digital Data Network A limited interruption in the ability of an item to perform a required function. To separate from a common input into several outputs. Demultiplexing occurs at many levels. Hardware demultiplexes signals from a transmission line based on time or carrier frequency to allow multiple, simultaneous transmissions across a single physical cable.
A-12
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A Glossary
Device set
It is an aggregate of multiple managed equipments. Device set facilitates the authority management on devices in the management domain of the U2000. If some operation authorities over one device set are assigned to a user (user group), these operation authorities over all devices of the device set are assigned to the user (user group), thus eliminating the need to set the operation authorities over these devices respectively. It is suggested to design device set according to such criteria as geographical region, network level, device type, etc. Values for a 6-bit field defined for the IPv4 and IPv6 packet headers that enhance class of service (CoS) distinctions in routers. Differentiated Services CodePoint. A marker in the header of each IP packet using bits 0-6 in the DS field. Routers provide differentiated classes of services to various service streams/flows based on this marker. In other words, routers select corresponding PHB according to the DSCP value. Differentiated Services Digital Distribution Frame. A frame which is used to transfer cables. A signal in which information is represented by a limited number of discrete statesfor example, high and low voltagesrather than by fluctuating levels in a continuous stream, as in an analog signal. In the pulse code modulation (PCM) technology, the 8 kHz sampling frequency is used and a byte contains 8 bits in length. Therefore, a digital signal is also referred to as a byte-based code stream. Digital signals, with simple structures and broad bandwidth, are easy to shape or regenerate, and are not easily affected by external interference. The distributed link aggregation group (DLAG) is a board-level port protection technology used to detect unidirectional fiber cuts and to negotiate with the opposite end. In the case of a link down failure on a port or a hardware failure on a board, the services can automatically be switched to the slave board, thus realizing 1+1 protection for the inter-board ports. See Distributed Link Aggregation Group
differentiated services code point
Differentiated Services Code Point
DiffServ Digital Distribution Frame digital signal
Distributed Link Aggregation Group
DLAG
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A-13
A Glossary
DNI domain DQDB DSCP DSCP DSL DSLAM DSR DTE DTR Dual Node Interconnection
See Dual Node Interconnection A logical subscriber group based on which the subscriber rights are controlled. Distributed Queue Dual Bus See differentiated services code point See Differentiated Services Code Point Digital Subscriber Line Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer Data Set Ready Data Terminal Equipments Data Terminal Ready DNI provides an alternative physical interconnection point, between the rings, in case of an interconnection failure scenario. Digital Video Broadcast- Asynchronous Serial Interface Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing
DVB-ASI DVMRP DWDM
A*3 5
E-AGGR E-LAN E-LAN Ethernet-Aggregation Ethernet LAN A L2VPN service type that is provided for the user Ethernet in different domains over the PSN network. For the user Ethernet, the entire PSN network serves as a Layer 2 switch. Ethernet line. An point-to-point private service type that is provided for the user Ethernet in different domains. A component on the side of the subrack. It is used to install the subrack into a cabinet. See Embedded Control Channel Ethernet in the First Mile A sudden flow of electric current through a material that is normally an insulator.
E-Line
Ear bracket ECC EFM ElectroStatic Discharge
A-14
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A Glossary
Embedded Control Channel
An ECC provides a logical operations channel between SDH NEs, utilizing a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer. Element Management System The technique used by layered protocols to add header information and possibly tail information to the protocol data unit. A path protocol which connects the host with various control units in a storage system. It is a serial bit stream transmission protocol. The transmission rate is 200 Mbit/s. A part, device, subsystem, functional unit, equipment or system that can be individually considered. For ETH-OAM, an OAM entity generally refers to a specified system or subsystem that supports the OAM protocol. For example, a Huawei Ethernet service processing board is an OAM entity. Ethernet Over Dual Domains See Ethernet Private Line Ethernet Private LAN Service See Enterprise System Connection See ElectroStatic Discharge Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf or cabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap. A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining.. The Ethernet alarm group periodically obtain the statistics value to compare with the configured threshold. If the value exceeds the threshold, an event is reported. Both a LAN service and a private service. Transport bandwidth is never shared between different customers.
EMS encapsulation
Enterprise System Connection
Entity
EoD EPL EPLAN ESCON ESD ESD jack
Ethernet
Ethernet Alarm Group
Ethernet Private LAN
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A-15
A Glossary
Ethernet Private Line
A point-to-point interconnection between two UNIs without SDH bandwidth sharing. Transport bandwidth is never shared between different customers. An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over shared bandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks. European Telecommunications Standards Institute See ethernet virtual private line service An operation to check if the protection switching protocol functions normally. The protection switching is not really performed. This command exercises ring protection switching of the requested channel without completing the actual bridge and switch. The command is issued and the responses are checked, but no working traffic is affected. The number of the subnet that an NE belongs to, for identifying different network segments in a WAN. The extended ID and ID form the physical ID of the NE. The traffic that is carried over the protection channels when that capacity is not used for the protection of working traffic. Extra traffic is not protected.
ethernet virtual private line service
ETSI EVPL Exercise Switching
Exerciser - Ring
Extended ID
extra traffic
A*) .
Failure If the fault persists long enough to consider the ability of an item with a required function to be terminated. The item may be considered as having failed; a fault has now been detected. For any link specified in a ring network, if the data packets transmitted by the source node are constrained by the fairness algorithm, the source node is provided with certain bandwidth capacities. This feature of RPR is called fairness. An algorithm designed to ensure the fair sharing of bandwidth among stations in the case of congestion or overloading.
Fairness
fairness algorithm
A-16
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A Glossary
fault
An accidental condition that causes a functinal unit to fail to perform its required function. Fiber Channel See frequency diversity See fiber distributed data interface Forward Defect Indicator Fast Ethernet Code(s) used to select/activate a service feature (e.g. forwarding, using two or three digit codes preceded by * or 11 or #, and which may precede subsequent digit selection). See forwarding equivalence class See Forward Error Correction A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and for connections between subracks or inside a subrack. A new generation connection protocol which connects the host with various control units. It carries single byte command protocol through the physical path of fiber channel, and provides higher rate and better performance than ESCON. A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couple the optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. A connector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and a optical source (or a detector). A standard developed by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for high-speed fiber-optic local area networks (LANs). FDDI provides specifications for transmission rates of 100 megabits (100 million bits) per second on networks based on the token ring network.
FC FD FDDI FDI FE feature code
FEC FEC fiber
Fiber Connect.
Fiber Connector
fiber distributed data interface
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A-17
A Glossary
fiber/cable
Fiber & Cable is the general name of optical fiber and cable. It refers to the physical entities that connect the transmission equipment, carry transmission objects (user information and network management information) and perform transmission function in the transmission network. The optical fiber transmits optical signal, while the cable transmits electrical signal. The fiber/cable between NEs represents the optical fiber connection or cable connection between NEs. The fiber/cable between SDH NEs represents the connection relation between NEs. At this time, the fiber/cable is of optical fiber type. See Fiber Connect First In First Out An aggregation of packets that have the same characteristics. On the T2000 or NE software, flow is a group of classification rules. On boards, it is a group of packets that have the same quality of service (QoS) operation. At present, two flows are supported: port flow and port+VLAN flow. Port flow is based on port ID and port+VLAN flow is based on port ID and VLAN ID. The two flows cannot coexist in the same port. This function forces the service to switch from the working channel to the protection channel, with the service not to be restored automatically. This switch occurs regardless of the state of the protection channels or boards, unless the protection channels or boards are satisfying a higher priority bridge request. A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload at the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during transmission are corrected at the receive end. A term used in Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) to describe a set of packets with similar or identical characteristics which may be forwarded the same way; that is, they may be bound to the same MPLS label. Field Programmable Gate Array
FICON FIFO Flow
Forced switch
Forward Error Correction
forwarding equivalence class
FPGA
A-18
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A Glossary
frame
A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame length is represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle. A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words, a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements pre-specified by the sending and receiving parties. An operating condition of a clock, the output signal of which is strongly influenced by the oscillating element and not controlled by servo phase-locking techniques. In this mode the clock has never had a network reference input, or the clock has lost external reference and has no access to stored data, that could be acquired from a previously connected external reference. Free-run begins when the clock output no longer reflects the influence of a connected external reference, or transition from it. Free-run terminates when the clock output has achieved lock to an external reference. A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies with a certain frequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading. File Transfer Protocol The system that can transmit information in both directions on a communication link.On the communication link, both parties can send and receive data at the same time.
Free-run mode
frequency diversity
FTP Full duplex
A*4 G
Gain The ratio between the optical power from the input optical interface of the optical amplifier and the optical power from the output optical interface of the jumper fiber, which expressed in dB.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A-19
A Glossary
Gateway IP
When an NE accesses a remote network management system or NE, a router can be used to enable the TCP/IP communication. In this case, the IP address of the router is the gateway IP. Only the gateway NE requires the IP address. The IP address itself cannot identify the uniqueness of an NE. The same IP addresses may exist in different TCP/IP networks. An NE may have multiple IP addresses, for example, one IP address of the network and one IP address of the Ethernet port. Gateway NE refers to the NE that communicates with the NMS via Ethernet or serial port line. The non-gateway NE communicates with the gateway NE via ECC and communicates with the NMS via the gateway NE. The gateway NE is a communication route that the U2000 must pass through when managing the entire network. The communication status between the gateway NE and the U2000 can be:(1) Normal: The current communication is efficient; (2) Connecting: The destination gateway responds, and the communication is interrupted but is being connected; (3) Disconnected: The destination gateway does not respond (Maybe the network cable is disconnected or not within the same network segment), and the communication is unreachable or the gateway is disabled manually. Gigabit Ethernet Generic Framing Procedure GFP is a framing and encapsulated method which can be applied to any data type. It has been standardized by ITU-T SG15. See Gateway Network Element Global Positioning System Global System for Mobile Communications Generic Traffic Shaping Graphic User Interface
Gateway Network Element
GE GFP GFP
GNE GPS GSM GTS GUI
A*6 !
half-duplex An operation mode of the Ethernet port. In half-duplex mode, a port can only send or receive data at a time.
A-20
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A Glossary
handle
A component of the panel. It is used to insert or remove boards and RTMs in and out of slots. A connection mode in which a fiber jumper is used to connect the input optical interface to the output optical interface of a board to achieve signal loopback. High level Data Link Control Header Error Control The confirmed alarms that have been saved in the memory and other external memories. The performance data that is stored in the history register or that is autoreported and stored in the NMS. Higher Order Path Higher Order Path Termination
Hardware loopback
HDLC HEC History alarm History Performance Data
HP HPT
A*%" I
IC IDU IEEE IETF IF IGMP IGMP Snooping Integrated Circuit Indoor Unit Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Internet Engineering Task Force Intermediate Frequency See Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP proxy means that in some network topologies, the device does not set up the multicast routes, but to learn the information about the accessed multicast group members and forward it to the upstream multicast router. The upstream multicast router sets up the multicast routes. The IMA frame is used as the unit of control in the IMA protocol. It is a logical frame defined as M consecutive cells, numbered 0 to M-l, transmitted on each of the N links in an IMA group.
IMA frame
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A-21
A Glossary
Input jitter tolerance
The maximum amplitude of sinusoidal jitter at a given jitter frequency, which, when modulating the signal at an equipment input port, results in no more than two errored seconds cumulative, where these errored seconds are integrated over successive 30 second measurement intervals. The factors such as fiber cut, degradation of equipment, and removal of connectors may result in the loss of the optical power signals. The function of intelligent power adjusting (IPA) enables the ROP laser and booster amplifier (BA) of a section to be shut down automatically. In this way, the maintainers, their eyes in particular, can be protected for the exposed optical fibers when they are performing the repairs. The area for the interface boards on the subrack. The cables and optical fibers which are used for interconnecting electrical interfaces and optical interfaces within the cabinet. The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups among the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish and maintain multicast group memberships. Internet Protocol In the TCP/IP protocol, it is used to uniquely identify the 32-bit address of the communication port, An IP address consists of a network ID and a unique host ID. An IP address consists of the decimal values of its eight bytes, separated with periods; for example,192.168.7.27. The IP Over DCC follows TCP/IP telecommunications standards and controls the remote NEs through the Internet. The IP Over DCC means that the IP over DCC uses overhead DCC byte (the default is D1-D3) for communication. See Intelligent power adjusting Intermedia System-Intermedia System Integrated Services Digital Network International Standard Organization Internet Service Provider
Intelligent power adjusting
Interface board area Internal cable
Internet Group Management Protocol
IP IP address
IP over DCC
IPA IS-IS ISDN ISO ISP
A-22
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A Glossary
IST ITU-T
Internal Spanning Tree International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication Standardization
A*%% E
Jitter Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control system instability. Jitter tolerance is defined as the peak-to-peak amplitude of sinusoidal jitter applied on the input ATM-PON signal that causes a 1 dB optical power penalty at the optical equipment.
jitter tolerance
A*%# >
label Label A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification. A short identifier that is of fixed length and local significance. A label is used to uniquely identify the FEC to which a packet belongs. A label does not contain topology information. It is carried in the header of a packet and does not contain topology information. See Link Aggregation Control Protocol See link aggregation group Local Area Network Link Access Procedure-SDH A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laser light has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductor laser as the light source. A concept used to allow the transport network functionality to be described hierarchically as successive levels; each layer being solely concerned with the generation and transfer of its characteristic information.
LACP LAG LAN LAPS Laser
Layer
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A-23
A Glossary
layer 2 switch
A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmits and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is the second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called layer 2 switch. See Loopback Loopback Message Loopback Reply Lucent Connector See Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme Liquid Crystal Display See Local craft terminal A permission that the vendor provides for the user with a specific function, capacity, and durability of a product. A license can be a file or a serial number. Usually the license consists of encrypted codes, and the operation authority varies with different level of license. In the topology view, a link is used to identify the physical or logical connection between two topological nodes. Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) is part of an IEEE specification (802.3ad) that allows you to bundle several physical ports to form a single logical channel. LACP allows a switch to negotiate an automatic bundle by sending LACP packets to the peer. An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were a single link. The Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS) is designed to allow the dynamic provisioning of bandwidth, using VCAT, to meet customer requirements. Logical Link Control
LB LBM LBR LC LCAS LCD LCT License
Link
Link Aggregation Control Protocol
link aggregation group
Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
LLC
A-24
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A Glossary
Local craft terminal
A single layer network management scheme that manages a transmission network consisting of a maximum of five NEs. In this way, the comprehensive management of the multi-service transmission network is achieved. Normally, the cross-over network cables and serial port cables are used to connect the local craft terminal (LCT) to an NE. Then, the LCT can configure and maintain a single NE. When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from being switched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has been switched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel to the working channel. Loss of frame Loss Of Multiframe A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the signal or message can be analyzed for errors. Loss Of Signal When the performance event count value is smaller than a certain value, a threshold-crossing event occurs. The value is the lower threshold. Lower Order Path Link State Pass Through Label Switched Path Label Switching Router Link Trace
Locked switching
LOF LOM Loopback
LOS Lower Threshold
LP LPT LSP LSR LT
A*%- 2
MA MAC Maintenance Association See Maintenance Association Medium Access Control That portion of a Service Instance, preferably all of it or as much as possible, the connectivity of which is maintained by CFM. It is also a full mesh of Maintenance Entities.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A-25
A Glossary
Maintenance Domain
The network or the part of the network for which faults in connectivity are to be managed, belonging to a single administration. The boundary of a Maintenance Domain is defined by a set DSAPs, each of which may become a point of connectivity to a Service Instance. See Metropolitan Area Network A protection switching. When the protection path is normal and there is no request of a higher level switching, the service is manually switched from the working path to the protection path, to test whether the network still has the protection capability. A procedure by which tributaries are adapted into virtual containers at the boundary of an SDH network. A quadrate cardboard with four holes. It is used to mark the positions of the installation holes for the cabinet. Maximum Burst Size Message Communication Function Minimum Cell Rate See Maintenance Domain The average power of a pseudo-random data sequence coupled into the fibre by the transmitter. Maintenance End Point A metropolitan area network (MAN) is a network that interconnects users with computer resources in a geographic area or region larger than that covered by even a large local area network (LAN) but smaller than the area covered by a wide area network (WAN). The term is applied to the interconnection of networks in a city into a single larger network (which may then also offer efficient connection to a wide area network). It is also used to mean the interconnection of several local area networks by bridging them with backbone lines. The latter usage is also sometimes referred to as a campus network. Management Information Base Maintenance Intermediate Point
MAN Manual switching
Mapping
Marking-off template
MBS MCF MCR MD Mean launched power
MEP Metropolitan Area Network
MIB MIP
A-26
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A Glossary
MODEM MP MPID MPLS MS MSA MSOH MSP MST MSTI MSTP MSTP MTIE MTU Multi-Protocol Label Switch
MOdulator-DEModulator Maintenance Point Maintenance Point Identification See Multi-Protocol Label Switch Multiplex Section Multiplex Section Adaptation See Multiplex Section Overhead See multiplex section protection Multiplex Section Termination Multiple Spanning Tree Instance See Multi-service transmission platform See Multiple spanning tree protocol Maximum Time Interval Error Maximum Transmission Unit A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of IP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability of networks, and is beneficial to routing. It is based on the SDH platform, capable of accessing, processing and transmitting TDM services, ATM services, and Ethernet services, and providing unified management of these services. A process of transmitting packets of data from one source to many destinations. The destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP address ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicast group rather than a host.
Multi-service transmission platform
Multicast
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A-27
A Glossary
Multiple spanning tree protocol
The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs. The overhead that comprises rows 5 to 9 of the SOH of the STM-N signal. See SOH definition. A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a "protection" channel. A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higher order path or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplex section.
Multiplex Section Overhead
multiplex section protection
Multiplexing
A*%/ N
N+1 protection A radio link protection system composed of N working channels and one protection channel. See network element The main operation interface, of the U2000, which is used to manage the OptiX equipment. In the NE Explorer, the user can configure, manage and maintain the NE, boards, and ports on a per-NE basis. A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. One NE is at least equipped with one system control board which manages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software runs on the system control board. The interface at a network node which is used to interconnect with another network node. Network Segment means any discrete part of the Network.
NE NE Explorer
network element
network node interface
network segment
A-28
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A Glossary
NLP NMS NNI NPC nrt-VBR NRZ NSAP NTP
Normal Link Pulse Network Management System See network node interface Network Parameter Control Non Real-Time Variable Bit Rate Non Return to Zero code Network Service Access Point Network Time Protocol
A*%0 1
OA OADM OAM OAM auto-discovery See Optical Amplifier Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer Operations, Administration and Maintenance In the case of OAM auto-discovery, two interconnected ports, enabled with the Ethernet in the First Mile OAM (EFM OAM) function, negotiate to determine whether the mutual EFM OAM configuration match with each other by sending and responding to the OAM protocol data unit (OAMPDU). If the mutual EFM OAM configuration match, the two ports enter the EFM OAM handshake phase. In the handshake phase, the two ports regularly send the OAMPDU to maintain the neighborhood relation. See Optical Channel Protection See Optical Distribution Frame Outdoor Unit Out-of-frame Second Overhead Access Function Optical Line Terminal The capability of many programs and operating systems to display advice or instructions for using their features when so requested by the user. Optical Network Unit Out of Frame
OCP ODF ODU OFS OHA OLT Online Help
ONU OOF
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A-29
A Glossary
optical add/drop multiplexing
A process that adds the optical signals of various wavelengths to one channel and drop the optical signals of various wavelengths from one channel. Devices or subsystems in which optical signals can be amplified by means of the stimulated emission taking place in a suitable active medium. A passive device that increases the attenuation in a fiber link. It is used to ensure that the optical power of the signals received at the receive end is not extremely high. It is available in two types: fixed attenuator and variable attenuator. In an optical transmission link that contains multiple wavelengths, when a certain wavelength goes faulty, the services at the wavelength can be protected if the optical channel protection is configured. A component normally attached to an optical cable or piece of apparatus for the purpose of providing frequent optical interconnection/disconnection of optical fibers or cables. A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers. A component that connects several transmit or receive units. A device that sends a very short pulse of light down a fiber optic communication system and measures the time history of the pulse reflection. A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or maintenance engineers of different stations. Open Systems Interconnection Optical Switch Node Open Shortest Path First See Optical Time Domain Reflectometer Optical Transponder Unit. A device or subsystem that converts the accessed client signals into the G.694.1/G.694.2-compliant WDM wavelength.
Optical Amplifier
Optical attenuator
Optical Channel Protection
Optical Connector
Optical Distribution Frame Optical Interface Optical Time Domain Reflectometer
orderwire
OSI OSN OSPF OTDR OTU
A-30
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A Glossary
Output optical power Overhead
The ranger of optical energy level of output signals. Extra bits in a digital stream used to carry information besides traffic signals. Orderwire, for example, would be considered overhead information.
A*%3 P
Paired slots Two slots of which the overheads can be passed through by using the bus on the backplane. When the SCC unit is faulty or offline, the overheads can be passed through between the paired slots by using the directly connected overhead bus. When two SDH boards form an MSP ring, the boards need to be inserted in paired slots so that the K bytes can be passed through. When services are passed through, it indicates that transmission equipment does not process the service received and only detects the signal quality. A performance resource object defined in the network management system. The left end of a path is a device node whose port needs to be specified and the right end of a path is a certain IP address which can be configured by the user. By defining a path in the network management system, a user can test the performance of a network path between a device port and an IP address. The tested performance may be the path delay, packet loss ratio or other aspects. Path protection is a special case of fixed partitioning sub-path protection technique where every primary path is partitioned into only one sub-path (i.e., h = D, diameter of the network). Peak Burst Size Personal Computer Pulse Code Modulation Peak Cell Rate See Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy Provider Edge. A PE is the name of the device or set of devices at the edge of the provider network with the functionality that is needed to interface with the customer.
pass through
Path
path protection
PBS PC PCM PCR PDH PE
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A-31
A Glossary
Performance register
Performance register is the memory space for performance event counts, including 15-min current performance register, 24-hour current performance register, 15-min history performance register, 24-hour history performance register, UAT register and CSES register. The object of performance event monitoring is the board functional module, so every board functional module has a performance register. A performance register is used to count the performance events taking place within a period of operation time, so as to evaluate the quality of operation from the angle of statistics. The performance threshold is a limit for generating an alarm for a selected entity. When the measurement data satisfies the preset alarm threshold or exceeds the preset grads, the PM subsystem generates a performance alarm. Performance events usually have upper and lower thresholds. When the performance event count value exceeds the upper threshold, a performance threshold-crossing event is generated; when the performance event count value is below the upper threshold for a period of time, the performance threshold-crossing event is ended. In this way, performance jitter caused by some sudden events can be shielded. A few performance events only have one threshold, which is the special case that upper threshold and lower threshold are equal. Traditional ATM Permanent Virtual Connection that is established/released upon a request initiated by a management request procedure (that is all nodes supporting the connections need to be instructed by the network management). Protection Ground Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode Peak Information Rate
performance threshold
Performance threshold
Permanent Virtual Connection
PGND PIM-SM PIR
A-32
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A Glossary
plesiochronous
Qualifying two time-varying phenomena, time-scales, or signals in which corresponding significant instants occur at the same rate, any variations in rate being constrained within specified limits. Note: Corresponding significant instants are separated by time intervals having durations which may vary without limit. The Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH) is a technology used in telecommunications networks to transport large quantities of data over digital transport equipment such as fibre optic and microwave radio systems. Phase-Locked Loop An indicator whose value defines the frame offset of a virtual container with respect to the frame reference of the transport entity on which it is supported. Packet Over SDH A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies power for the subracks in the cabinet. Point-to-Point Protocol See Pseudo-Random Binary Sequence Primary Reference Clock In the hierarchy of signaling system No.7, when the upper layer applies for services from the lower layer or the lower layer transmits services to the upper layer, the data is exchanged between the user and the service provider. In this case, the data transmitted between adjacent layers is called primitive. The line, such as the subscriber cable and trunk cable, which are hired by the telecommunication carrier and are used to meet the special requirement of the user. The line is also called hired line. Generally, the switch device is not contained. A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, the cable is yellow and green. A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PLL Pointer
POS Power box
PPP PRBS PRC Primitive
Private Line
protection grounding
Protection path
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A-33
A Glossary
Protection service Protection subnet
A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labelled protection. In the NMS, the protection subnet becomes a concept of network level other than multiplex section rings or path protection rings. The protection sub-network involves NEs and fibre cable connections. The user interface, of the network management system, which is used to manage protection in the network. Packet Switched Power Spectral Density A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of the values of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences. See Permanent Virtual Connection Pseudo Wire Pseudo wire. A mechanism that bears the simulated services between PEs on the PSN(Packet Switched Network).
Protection View
PS PSD Pseudo-Random Binary Sequence
PVC PW PW
A*%) C
QoS Quality of Service See Quality of Service Quality of Service, which determines the satisfaction of a subscriber for a service. QoS is influenced by the following factors applicable to all services: service operability, service accessibility, service maintainability, and service integrity.
A*%4 R
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with the STP protocol. Remote Defect Indication Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average received power at point R to achieve a 1 x 10-10 BER.
RDI Receiver Sensitivity
A-34
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A Glossary
Reference clock
A reference clock is usually of high stability , accuracy and autonomy and it's frequency can be compared with other clock as a benchmark. A piece of equipment or device that regenerates electrical signals. The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the amplitudes, waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within specified limits. The regenerator section overhead comprises rows 1 to 3 of the SOH of the STM-N signal. An remote optical amplifier sub-system designed for applications where power supply and monitoring systems are unavailable. The ROPA subsystem is a power compensation solution to the ultra-long distance long hop (LHP) transmission. A network topology being developed as a new standard for fiber optic rings. Radio Frequency Request For Announcement Request for Information A ring network is a network topology in which each node connects to exactly two other nodes, forming a circular pathway for signals. Radio Network Controller A route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically. Links a local network to a remote network. For example, your company's network probably uses a router to connect to the Internet. Can be used to connect a LAN to a LAN, a WAN to a WAN, or a LAN to the Internet. Rendezvous Point See Resilient Packet Ring
REG Regeneration
Regenerator section overhead
Remote optical pumping amplifier (ROPA)
Resilient Packet Ring RF RFA RFI ring network
RNC route
router
RP RPR
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A-35
A Glossary
RS232
In the asynchronous transfer mode and there is no hand-shaking signal. It can communicate with RS232 and RS422 of other stations in point-to-point mode and the transmission is transparent. Its highest speed is 19.2kbit/s. The specification that defines the electrical characteristics of balanced voltage digital interface circuits. The interface can change to RS232 via the hardware jumper and others are the same as RS232. See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Radio Transmission Node Receiver
RS422
RSTP RTN RX
A*%6 S
S1 byte In an SDH network, each network element traces step by step to the same clock reference source through a specific clock synchronization path, thus realizing the synchronization of the whole network. If a clock reference source traced by the NE is lost, the clock of this NE will trace another clock reference source of lower level. To implement protection switching of clocks in the whole network, the NE must learn about the clock quality information of the clock reference source it traces. Therefore, ITU-T defines S1 byte to transmit the network synchronization status information. It uses the lower four bits of the multiplex section overhead S1 byte to indicate 16 types of synchronization quality grades. The specific coding information is shown in the following table. Auto protection switching of clocks in the synchronous network can be implemented by using S1 byte and following the certain switching protocol. Storage Area Network Square Connector Sustainable Cell Rate See space diversity See Signal Degrade See Synchronous Digital Hierarchy Serious Disturbance Period
SAN SC SCR SD SD SDH SDP
A-36
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A Glossary
SEC Section
SDH Equipment Clock The portion of a SONET transmission facility, including terminating points, between (i) a terminal network element and a regenerator or (ii) two regenerators. A terminating point is the point after signal regeneration at which performance monitoring is (or may be) done. Self-healing is the establishment of a replacement connection by network without the NMC function. When a connection failure occurs, the replacement connection is found by the network elements and rerouted depending on network resources available at that time. The ECC channel realized by means of serial port. A network device that provides services to network users by managing shared resources, often used in the context of a client-server architecture for a LAN. A measure that ensures that the services can be received at the receive end. Severely Errored Second Synchronous Equipment Timing Source Parameters of a system or operation that can be selected by the user. See Signal Fail See SF Signal Fail. A signal that indicates the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect condition (non-degrade defect) is active. See Small Form-Factor Pluggable Single-line High speed Digital Subscriber Line The Side Mode Suppression Ratio (SMSR) is the ratio of the largest peak of the total source spectrum to the second largest peak. Common signal cables cover the E1cable, network cable, and other non-subscriber signal cable.
Self-healing
Serial port extended ECC server
Service protection SES SETS settings SF SF SF
SFP SHDSL Side Mode Suppression Ratio
signal cable
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A-37
A Glossary
Signal Degrade
SD is a signal indicating the associated data has degraded in the sense that a degraded defect (e.g., dDEG) condition is active. SF is a signal indicating the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect condition (not being the degraded defect) is active. A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the transmission of management information between any two points. The polling mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control information about each device is maintained by a management information block. Angle-bars on which shelves and chassis may slide and be supported within a cabinet or shelf. A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers. See Side Mode Suppression Ratio SubNetwork Connection See Subnetwork connection multipath protection See SubNetwork Connection Protection Set the SNC node on the protection sub-network to support sub-network connection protection that spans protection sub-networks. The SNCP node of the ring sub-network can support electric circuit dually feed and selectively receive a timeslot out of the ring, thus implementing sub-network connection protection. The SNCP node is generally set on the node on the line board with the path protection type of the dual fed and selectively received. See Subnetwork Connection Tunnel Protection See Simple Network Management Protocol Signal Noise Ratio
Signal Fail
Simple Network Management Protocol
slide rail
Small Form-Factor Pluggable SMSR SNC SNCMP SNCP SNCP node
SNCTP SNMP SNR
A-38
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A Glossary
space diversity
A protection mode. The main and standby radios are set up in Hot Standby mode, but are connected to their own antennas. Both antennas, separated by a specific distance, are receiving the signal transmitted from the online radio at the other end of the lin Spanning Tree Protocol. STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop. STP applies to the redundant network to block some undesirable redundant paths through certain algorithms and prune a loop network into a loop-free tree network. Synchronous Physical Interface See Synchronization Status Message Synchronization Supply Unit A multiplexing technique whereby information from multiple logical channels can be transmitted across a single physical channel. It dynamically allocates bandwidth only to active input channels, to make better use of available bandwidth and allow more devices to be connected than with other multiplexing techniques. Compare with TDM. SDH Transport Module -4 See Spanning Tree Protocol It is used to differentiate the different network sections in the sub-network conference. Actually it is the first several digits (one or two) of the user phone number. An orderwire phone number is composed of the sub-network number and the user number. A logical entity in the transmission network, which comprises a group of network management objects. A subnet can contain NEs and other subnets. The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine, server or router and is matched with the IP address. The only difference is that SNCP is of 1+1 protection and SNCMP is of N+1 protection. That is, several backup channels protect one active channel in SNCMP.
Spanning Tree Protocol
SPI SSM SSU Statistical multiplexing
STM-4 STP Sub-network number
subnet
subnet mask
Subnetwork connection multipath protection
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A-39
A Glossary
SubNetwork Connection Protection
A working subnetwork connection is replaced by a protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance falls below a required level. SNCTP provides a VC-4 level channel protection. When the working channel is faulty, the services of the entire VC-4 path can be switched over to the protection channel. A part used to support and fix a cabinet on the antistatic floor An attribute set to determine whether an NE monitors the alarm. Under suppression status, NE will not monitor the corresponding alarm conditions and the alarm will not occur even when the alarm conditions are met. Switching Virtual Connection There may be the case that several protected boards need to be switched; thus the tributary board switching priority should be set. If the switching priority of each board is set the same, the tributary board that fails later cannot be switched. The board with higher priority can preempt the switching of that with lower priority. It refers to the period of time between the start of detecting and the moment when the line is switched back to the original status after protection switching occurs in the MSP sub-network. A message that is used to transmit the quality levels of timing signals on the synchronous timing link. Through this message, the node clocks of the SDH network and the synchronization network can aquire upper stream clock information, and the two perform operations on the corresponding clocks, such as tracing, switchover, or converting hold), and then forward the synchronization information of this node to down stream.
Subnetwork Connection Tunnel Protection
Support Suppression state
SVC Switching priority
Switching restoration time
Synchronization Status Message
A-40
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A Glossary
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SDH is a transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines the transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode, transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B-ISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speed counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is only used only for signals. SDH is suitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since it uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure. A clock providing timing services to connected network elements. This would include clocks conforming to Recommendations G.811, G.812 and G.813.
Synchronous source
A*#" T
T2000 The T2000 is a subnet management system (SNMS). In the telecommunication management network architecture, the T2000 is located between the NE level and network level, which can support all NE level functions and part of the network level management functions. See also NM. A lite version of T2000. It is an element level management system for the optical transmission network. It can manage SDH, DWDM and Metro optical transmission equipment. See also LCT. In the SDH transport hierarchy, the TCM is located between the AU/TU management layer and HP/LP layer. It uses the N1/N2 byte of POH overhead to monitor the quality of the transport channels on a transmission section (TCM section). See Tandem Connection Monitor See Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol Time Division Multiplexing N/A Trace Identifier Mismatch
T2000 LCT
Tandem Connection Monitor
TCM TCP/IP TCP/IP TDM tie wrap TIM
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A-41
A Glossary
Time Slot
Continuously repeating interval of time or a time period in which two devices are able to interconnect. Also called the moment synchronization, time synchronization means that the synchronization of the absolute time, which requires that the starting time of the signals keeps consistent with the UTC time. Terminal Multiplexer Telecommunications Management Network See Type of Service See Tributary Protection Switch A network level management function of the network management system. Through trail management, you can configure end-to-end services, view graphic interface and visual routes of a trail, query detailed information of a trail, filter, search and locate a trail quickly, manage and maintain trails in a centralized manner, manage alarms and performance data by trail, and print a trail report. A transmitter and receiver housed together in a single unit and having some circuits in common, often for portable or mobile use. Common name for the suite of protocols developed to support the construction of worldwide internetworks. A process during which the signaling protocol or data is not processed in the content but encapsulated in the format for the processing of the next phase. A component that can be installed in the cabinet for holding chassis or other devices. A fault can be located for each service path by performing loopback to each path of the tributary board. There are three kinds of loopback modes. 1. No loopback: It is the normal status. No loopback is needed when the equipment runs efficiently; 2. Outloop: When arriving at the line board after passing the input port in the local NE, the input signal is directly looped back to the service output end; 3. Inloop: The input signal is returned along the original trail from the tributary board of the target NE.
Time Synchronization
TM TMN ToS TPS Trail management function
Transceiver
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol transparent transmission
Tray Tributary loopback
A-42
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A Glossary
Tributary Protection Switch
Tributary protection switching, a function provided by the equipment, is intended to protect N tributary processing boards through a standby tributary processing board. An information structure which provides adaptation between the lower order path layer and the higher order path layer. It consists of an information payload (the lower order VC) and a TU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to the higher order VC frame start. One or more Tributary Units, occupying fixed, defined positions in a higher order VC-n payload is termed a Tributary Unit Group (TUG). TUGs are defined in such a way that mixed capacity payloads made up of different size Tributary Units can be constructed to increase flexibility of the transport network Time To Live Tributary Unit See Tributary Unit Group A field in an IP packet (IP datagram) that is used for quality of service (QoS). The TOS field is 8 bits, broken into five sub-fields.
Tributary unit
Tributary Unit Group
TTL TU TUG Type of Service
A*#% U
UART UAS UBR underfloor cabling UNI Unprotected Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter Unavailable Second Unspecified Bit Rate The cables connected cabinets and other devices are routed underfloor. See User Network Interface Pertaining to the transmission of the services that are not protected, the services cannot be switched to the protection channel if the working channel is faulty or the service is interrupted, because protection mechanism is not configured.
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A-43
A Glossary
Unprotected sub-network
It refers to a sub-network without any protection mechanism. The purpose of such configuration is to provide the basic data of trail protection for the subsequent trail management. An operation to report some or all configuration data of an NE to the T2000. The configuration data then covers the configuration data stored at the T2000 side. The critical value that can induce unexpected events if exceeded. Uninterruptible Power Supply Cables or fibers connect the rack with other equipment from the top of the cabinet. A client user of the NMS. The user name and password uniquely identifies the operation rights of a user in the NMS. The interface between a network and the user of network services. Universal Time Coordinated
Upload
Upper threshold UPS Upward cabling User
User Network Interface UTC
A*## V
VB VBR VC VCG VCI Virtual concatenation Virtual Container Virtual Bridge Variable Bit Rate See Virtual concatenation Virtual Concatenation Group Virtual Channel Identifier N/A A Virtual Container is the information structure used to support path layer connections in the SDH. It consists of information payload and path Overhead (POH) information fields organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125 or 500 s. A subset of the active topology of a Bridged Local Area Network. Associated with each VLAN is a VLAN Identifier (VID).
Virtual local area network
A-44
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A Glossary
Virtual Private Network
The extension of a private network that encompasses encapsulated, encrypted, and authenticated links across shared or public networks. VPN connections can provide remote access and routed connections to private networks over the Internet. See Virtual local area network Virtual Path Virtual Path Identifier See Virtual Private Network
VLAN VP VPI VPN
A*#- 9
Wait to Restore Time A period of time that must elapse before a from a fault recovered - trail/connection can be used again to transport the normal traffic signal and/or to select the normal traffic signal from. A period of time that must elapse from a recovered fault before an LSP/span can be used again to transport the normal traffic and/or to select the normal traffic from. Wide Area Network The long-term variations of the significant instants of a digital signal from their ideal position in time (where long-term implies that these variations are of frequency less than 10Hz). A washer is a thin flat ring of metal or rubber which is placed over a bolt before the nut is screwed on. Wavelength Division Multiplexing. WDM technology utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of single mode optical fibre, uses multiple wavelengths as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in a single fibre. The wavelength protection group is important to describe the wavelength protection structure. Its function is similar to that of the protection subnet in the SDH NE. The wavelength path protection can only work with the correct configuration of the wavelength protection group. See Wavelength Division Multiplexing
Wait-to-Restore
WAN Wander
washer
Wavelength Division Multiplexing
Wavelength protection group
WDM
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)
A-45
A Glossary
WFQ Winding pipe Working path WRED WTR WTR
Weighted Fair Queuing A tool for fiber routing, which acts as the corrugated pipe. The channels allocated to transport the normal traffic. Weighted Random Early Detection See Wait-to-Restore See Wait to Restore Time
A-46
Issue 02 (2010-11-01)

OSN 3500 V200R011C00 Product Description PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

OSN 3500 V200R011C00 Product Description PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V200R011C00

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

About This Document

About This Document

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

About This Document

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

Updates in Issue "# $#"%"&%%&"%' (ased on Product Version V#""R"%%C""

Updates in Issue "% $#"%"&")&#"' (ased on Product Version V#""R"%%C""

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

About This Document

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

# So+t,are Architecture and !ard,are Structure*******************************************************************#&%

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

- .unctions and .eatures *************************************************************************************************************-&%

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

/ Products and Application Scenarios **************************************************************************************/&%

3 Security 2ana ement****************************************************************************************************************3&%

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

) Technical Speci+ications ***********************************************************************************************************)&%

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

4 5ner y Savin and 5nvironment Protection*************************************************************************4&%

6 Compliant Standards *****************************************************************************************************************6&%

A Glossary ************************************************************************************************************************************ A&%

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

Figure 1-1 exterior of the OptiX OSN 3500

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

Figure 1-2 Network application of the OptiX OSN 3500

%#% Dual&Core Architecture7 2ulti&Service Transmission

%## Support +or -G 2obile (ac8haulin 7 Providin an 1ptimal Transmission Solution

%#- (uilt&In 9D2:2icro,ave7 .le;ible Net,or8in

#%-*# Slot Allocation

#%/*% Classi+ication o+ the (oards